CHAPTER 4 DISCOVERER USERS MANUAL AND PROGRAM RESUMES Section 4A—CHAPTER SUMMARY AND DISCOVERER PLUS BASIC CONCEPTS

. 4.1. Chapter Summary. This chapter explains basic concepts and provides some step-by-step instructions for using Oracle Discoverer Plus. This chapter also provides basic information regarding reports built using Oracle Discoverer Plus. NOTE: Permission has been obtained from Oracle Corporation to use copyrighted material. 4.1.1. Summary of Sections. Section contents are as follows: 4.1.1.1. Section 4A. This section provides users provides basic concepts and provides some step-by-step instructions for using Oracle Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.2. Section 4B. This section includes all daily reports and listings that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.3. Section 4C. This section includes all monthly reports and listings that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.4. Section 4D. This section includes all quarterly reports that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.5. Section 4E. This section includes all semiannual reports that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.6. Section 4F. This section includes all annual reports that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.7. Section 4G. This section includes all as-required reports that have moved from processing via SBSS to processing via Discoverer Plus. 4.1.1.8. Section 4H. This section includes reports created for processing via Discoverer Plus that were not previously SBSS reports. 4.1.1.9. Section 4I. This section is not used. 4.1.1.10. Section 4J. This section includes reports created for processing via Discoverer Plus that were previously MAJCOM Reports. 4.2. Overview. 4.2.1. Section Summary. This chapter provides users with information to successfully generate and/ or process ad hoc queries. 4.2.2. Scope. This chapter provides detailed information on all aspects of the Discoverer ad hoc query tool. 4.2.3. Audience. Primary audience for this chapter is all RPS operators and any Standard Base Supply System (SBSS) user requiring data from the reports database. 4.2.4. Prerequisites. Users of Discoverer should have a basic understanding of table relationships within the SBSS.

4–1

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4.3. How Discover Works . 4.3.1. How Discoverer Works. Discoverer provides the supply technician/analyst with a userfriendly ad hoc data retrieval tool. It gives the user capability of retrieving, organizing, and displaying data; when they want it, in the way they want it. In addition to giving the user an option of creating their own query from scratch, a number of standard ad hoc queries have been provided. Although standard ad hoc queries contain a predefined set of data, they allow the flexibility of applying conditions, changing sort sequence, and modifying the display. This tool will also prove invaluable to the supply manager as it helps them make sound decisions with the embedded analytical functions.

4–2

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.1. Oracle Discoverer.

Discoverer solves many of the problems normally associated with databases. Now you can easily: Find data you know is in the database. See data displayed quickly without waiting for the computer to spend time searching through the entire database. View data in a familiar format that is easy to read and understand. Analyze data using a wide array of techniques; including drilling up and down through the data's details, finding data that meets certain conditions or falls within ranges you specify, sorting data, comparing results from "what if" scenarios, and so on. Prepare reports of your analytical results and findings. Share data with others, and in other applications (such as Excel, Hyper-Text Markup Language (HTML), etc.) Discoverer uses a new, unique way of accessing data. Comparing Discoverer with previous data access methods can help you understand new concepts used with Discoverer Plus. The following two figures compare old data access methods with the new Discoverer methods.

4–3

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.2. Old Method of Data Access.

Before you start working with Discoverer, the Discoverer Administrators at HQ 754th Electronics Systems Group (HQ 754 ELSG) create an End User Layer (EUL) providing the user a view into the

4–4

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 reporting database. They identify all data needed by separate business areas: Inventory, Item Detail, Management, Organization, SRD/RID/I&SG, Support, System, and Transaction History. Figure 4.3. EUL Team.

The Discoverer Administration team organizes data for each business area into folders. These folders contain specific data needed for ad hoc reporting. Figure 4.4. Admin Team.

So when you want to create a query, using Discoverer. Step 1 Figure 4.5. Computer User.

Create a workbook from the business areas and folders that contain the data you want to view and analyze.

4–5

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.6. Discoverer Method of Data Access.

Step 2 Figure 4.7. Example of Discoverer Query.

Run the ad hoc report. Workbook opens quickly and displays data in a familiar format. The user doesn’t have to fully understand databases. 4.3.1.1. What is an End User layer (EUL)? A layer of information used by Oracle Discoverer to hide the complexities and details of underlying database. The End User Layer provides a userfriendly view into the data, making it easier and faster to create queries because it organizes the data to reflect particular business areas. The same data can also be used for more than one situation. 4.3.1.2. What is a Business Area? A business area is a logical grouping of database tables or views that apply to your specific data requirements. For example, Stock Control wants data about due-outs and due-ins, while Storage & Issue is interested in warehouse information. Although some of the required data may be the same, the exact combination of tables and views for each element or section is usually unique. Using the Administration Edition, the Discoverer Administrator tailors the grouping of data to provide you with the proper access to the precise data needed for analysis, decision support, and presentation of results. Business areas are further divided into folders. 4.3.1.3. The EUL for the supply reports database has been organized into eight different business areas:

4–6

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4.3.1.3.1. Inventory: Contains all inventory related tables; such as inventory adjustment information, details frozen for inventory, inventory control, etc. 4.3.1.3.2. Item Detail: Contains all detail tables; such as adjusted level detail, supply point detail, part number detail, etc. 4.3.1.3.3. Management: Contains all management tables used for analysis; such as excess stratification, requisition summary, weapon support effectiveness, etc. 4.3.1.3.4. Organization: Contains all organizational information; such as delivery destination, organization cost center, reporting organizational file identity, etc. 4.3.1.3.5. SRD/RID/I&SG: Contains all SRD, routing identifier, and interchangeable and substitute group data; such as interchangeable & substitute group stock number relationship, order & ship time by routing identifier, standard reporting designator consumption, etc. 4.3.1.3.6. Support: Contains all support type tables; such as system designator, exception phrases, cumulative reject suspense, etc. 4.3.1.3.7. System: Contains system type tables; such as base constants, special control, supply table counts, etc. 4.3.1.3.8. Transaction history: Contains all daily and consolidated transaction history information; such as daily transaction history, transaction summary, consolidated transaction history, etc. 4.3.1.4. What is a Folder? A folder is a collection of related items (data elements) within a business area. Folders are very similar to records in today’s SBSS. They are created and defined in the End User Layer (EUL) using the Administration Edition. 4.3.1.5. Understanding Joins. Before a user can select data from different folders, a relationship must exist between those different data elements. These relationships are created in Discoverer with “Joins.” A “Join” serves several purposes: 1) Brings or links different tables (Folders) together; 2) Provides relationship between different tables; 3) Logical pairing of tables in a database on matching data in specific columns. NOTE: Order of table selection when creating a “Join” determines the “Master Table” and “Detail Table.” The first table selected is the Master; the second table selected is the detail. It is very important to select the proper table as the Master and Detail to achieve desired results. For example, if you want to choose due-outs with due-ins, you would select the due-out table first to make it the “Master” and the duein table second to make it the “Detail” table. If this is selected in the other order it would provide invalid records. 4.3.1.5.1. Discoverer uses two types of “Joins”: 1) Inner (Natural) and 2) Outer. 4.3.1.5.1.1. An Inner-Join is based on a one-to-one or one-to-many relationship. It retrieves all rows from one table and any matching rows from another table. When values in two tables match, they are combined and displayed as one row.

4–7

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 For example: Inner-Join between the requisition number on the due-out detail and the requisition number on the due-in detail will only return due-outs that have requisition numbers. For example: Inner-Join between the stock number on the item record and the stock number on the supply point detail will return only those stock numbers that have a supply point detail assigned. 4.3.1.5.1.2. Outer-Join is based on a one-to-one, one-to-many, or one-to-none relationship. It retrieves all rows from one table and any matching rows from another table. When values in two tables match, they are combined and displayed as one row. It also displays all rows from one table even if the joined table does not have a matching value. For example: Outer-Join between the requisition number on the due-out detail and the requisition number on the due-in detail will return due-outs that have requisition numbers and due-outs without requisition numbers. For example: Outer-Join between the stock number on the item record and the stock number on the supply point detail will return all stock numbers, with or without a supply point detail assigned. 4.3.1.6. Understanding Workbooks and Worksheets. Think of a workbook as a three-ring-binder filled with specific data for reports. The workbook has pages, or worksheets, that contain data for different options of the report. For example, if the workbook is for Exception Phrases, different worksheets are the types of exception codes: Excess, Issue, Requisition, and Shipment. 4.4. Starting Discoverer. This chapter explains the following topics: What is a Discoverer Connection? About starting Discoverer. About starting Discoverer for the first time. How to start Discoverer using an existing connection. How to exit Discoverer. How to create a Discoverer connection. How to edit a Discoverer connection. How to delete a Discoverer connection. When and Why do I need to change my password? How do I change the password for a connection? 4.4.1. What is a Discoverer Connection? A Discoverer connection stores login details, enabling an easy connection to the application. Each connection stores the following information:

4–8

3.4. Starting Discoverer for the First Time.g.4. You may see a dialog about security.4.2. TO START DISCOVERER: Use an existing user-defined connection (known as a private connection) that you created yourself Create a new user-defined connection (known as a private connection) USE THIS METHOD WHEN: You want to connect to Discoverer using login details that you previously saved You want to connect to Discoverer using a new login 4.4.4. select the option "Always trust content from Oracle Corporation. 4.4.3. 4–9 . Depending on which Internet browser you are using and how the base network is configured: 4. use the private connection that you previously created.4. This process initializes the Discoverer program on your machine. When starting Discoverer. 4." Click Yes (or OK or Grant.4. Chapter 4 Database user name Database name Language EUL 4. How to Start Discoverer Using an Existing Connection. To start Discoverer.1.1.4. 4. You may need to follow a one-time only set up process (J-Initiator) when you start Discoverer for the first time.2. depending on browser) to continue starting Discoverer.2.1. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the process. printers).3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4. If you do not want to see the dialog every time you connect. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. Enter Discoverer Uniform Resource Locator (URL). you can use one of the following methods: Table 4. Starting Discover. This security dialog appears when Discoverer requests extra permissions to access the Discoverer server or local devices (e. Launch a Web browser. To start Discoverer using an existing connection: 4. About starting Discoverer.

4. 4. 4. click Show in the Details column to display more information about a login. Chapter 4 Figure 4.4.4. choose File/Exit. To exit Discoverer. Follow the steps in the Workbook Wizard to either open a workbook or create a new workbook.4.4.4.1.4.8.6.5.3. 4.9.5. Enter your password and click Connect. NOTE: To confirm that you are using the correct login.5. Click Yes to save changes before closing Discoverer. Step 1 of 10: Create/Open Workbook.4.1.4.5. Figure 4. NOTE: A list of existing Discoverer connections is displayed in the Connection column. 4. a dialog prompts you to save or discard the changes. Discoverer Plus Connection Page.4.4. Discoverer starts and displays the Workbook Wizard.1. If there are unsaved changes in one or more currently opened workbooks. 4–10 . Click the name of a connection in the Connection column to start Discoverer. When you have finished using Discoverer to analyze data. To hide additional information. exit the application: 4.4. User-ID & Password Page. 4. Credentials page is then displayed. The User-ID (User Name) and Language are defaulted based on the connection you selected. How to Exit Discoverer.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Discoverer saves all changes that you have made since you last saved the workbook. click Hide.4.

Enter Discoverer Uniform Resource Locator (URL) 4. Discoverer saves none of the changes that you have made since you last saved the workbook. If you started Discoverer from an Internet start page.6. Click Create Connection to display the Create Connection: Connection Details page. 4. 4.” A new private connection is used when you want to start Discoverer using login details that have not been saved previously. and database details for the connection that you want to create. The connection name is displayed in the Connections column on the Connect to Discoverer Plus page. A list of the existing Discoverer connections is displayed in the Connection column. Click Apply to save the details entered.4. If you shut down the web browser that you used to start Discoverer during a Discoverer session. Figure 4.6. Create Connection: Connection Details.4.2.4.4.4. password.7. 4. Discoverer will also exit.4. 2. The Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. Enter a connection name by which you want to identify the new connection into the Connection Name field.6.1.5.6. The new connection that you have created is included in the list of connections. Enter a description of the connection in the Connection Description field (optional). To create and save login information in a Discoverer connection: 4.6. 4–11 .6. you may want to add the names of the workbooks that the connection will be used to access.6. For example.4. 4. 4.5. the browser application is not closed.8. Specify the user name.4.10.6.4. Launch a Web browser. Login information is created and saved in what is called a “Private Connection.4. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. Chapter 4 4.4.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Refer to Figure 4.1. 4.3.10. Click No to close Discoverer without saving changes. How to Create and Save Login Information in a Discoverer Connection. Discoverer connections are used to save login information and serve as a shortcut when signing in. 4. NOTES: 1.6.2.

6. For example. you might want to change the user name that you use to connect to Discoverer. Click Continue.4. 4. How do I Edit a Discoverer Connection? You edit a Discoverer connection when you want to change the login details stored in that connection.2. Launch a Web browser.8.4.7.5.4. 4.8.4. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. Delete Confirmation dialog is displayed.4.7.8.4. A list of the existing Discoverer connections is displayed in the Connection column.9. A list of the existing Discoverer connections is displayed in the Connection column. 4. 4. When you connect to Discoverer.7. 4. For example. To edit a Discoverer connection: 4. To connect to Discoverer using the connection that you have created.7. 4. you are prompted to enter a new password when the password expires. If you do not change the password in this period. How do I Change the Password For a Connection? You change the password for a connection when a password: 4–12 .4.8.1.4. The Edit Connection page is displayed. click Hide. click Show in the Details column to display more information about a connection. NOTE: To confirm that you are using the correct connection. click Hide. Your User Administrator specifies how long you can keep the same password before you have to change it. Click the pencil icon in the Update column next to the name of the connection that you want to edit.7.3.4.7.4. NOTE: You can now use the updated connection to start Discoverer.4. To hide additional information. 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. To hide additional information. you might want to delete a temporary connection that you no longer need.3. you will have to change your password periodically to maintain data security. NOTE: It is also important to change your password if you think that someone else has found out what the password is. Click Yes to delete connection and return to the Connect to Discoverer Plus page. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed.4.8. click the new connection name in the Connection list. Enter URL for Discoverer.2.5. 4.4.4.4. When and Why do I Need to Change My Password? Typically. You will know your password has expired if you start Discoverer and are prompted to enter a new password. Enter URL for Discoverer.4.7. 4. 4. click Show in the Details column to display more information about a connection. you will be notified that your password will expire in a specified number of days. How do I Delete a Discoverer Connection? You delete a Discoverer connection when you want to remove login details permanently. Click the trashcan icon in the Delete column next to the name of the connection that you want to delete. Change the connection details as required.1.6.4.4. NOTE: To confirm that you are using the correct connection. 4.7.4.8. 4. 4.10. To delete a Discoverer connection: 4. Launch a web browser. 4.9. Chapter 4 4.7.

Chapter 4 Has expired Is about to expire Has become known by another user 4.10. Click Finish.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. In the Current Password field. It shows the data in the workbook.6. Click Change Database Password.4. 4–13 .4. The topics include: The workbook window The four types of displays Seeing the next page of data Formatting a Worksheet 4. In the New Password field. Enter URL for Discoverer.10.4.10.1.4. 4. enter the current database password for the current user name.7.3. an error message is displayed with advice on which value to change.2. re-enter the new database password for the current user name.5.4. Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. 4. 4.10. NOTE: If any of the password details that you entered were invalid. 4. 4. In the Verify Password field.5. A list of the existing Discoverer connections is displayed in the Connection column. Launch a web browser.5.10. The Connect to Discoverer Plus page is displayed. 4.4. The workbook window is where you will do most of your work with Discoverer Plus.10.1.10. Click the Update icon next to the connection for which you want to change the password. Workbook Window. 4. You can now use the connection to start Discoverer.4. What You See on the Screen. Change Database Password screen is displayed. The following information explains how to use the various items on the screen while working with Discoverer Plus.4. enter a new database password for the current user name.

and getting “Help. saving files. Menu and tool bar.1.5.1. Chapter 4 Figure 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Each menu selection provides a dialog or Wizard to help you perform a task. Workbook Window. Discoverer provides a standard menu and tool bar.11. The Menu bar includes selections for common tasks such as printing.” The Tool bar includes shortcuts for your most common tasks. 4–14 . Much of Discoverer’s power is accessible from the menu bar. NOTES: Key to Figure: Menu and Tool Bar Page Axis Top Axis Left Axis Data Points Worksheet Tabs Page Scroll Buttons Page Scroll Bar (Horizontal) Page Scroll Bar (Vertical) 4.

4.5. If the worksheet is larger than the screen. Data points are the data that you want to use for analysis purposes or to see listed on a table. Another way of thinking about axis items is that they are the items that would appear on the axes of a graph. If you previously opened the worksheet in the current session. exception code. NOTES: Key to Figure When a pointer is on a button. 4. Axis Items. Axis items represent data that you can pivot on a cross tab worksheet or that can be column headings on a table. such as number of inventory discrepancies or extended value of requisitions by budget code.5.1. 4. and K (Munitions).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. it appears right away.2.5.1. Data Points. 4. 4. Also. type account code.5. the data is usually numerical. Click the scroll bars to see the rest of the worksheet.6. Four Types of Display. etc. it enlarges and displays a small tool tip that tells you what the button is for. Click to open or view the various worksheets in the workbook.12.2. Typical axis items are System Designator. Tool Tips. Click to scroll through the worksheet pages in the workbook. Figure 4. Data can be displayed four different ways on the workbook window: 4–15 .1.5.5. activity code.1.4.3.1. notice that when you put the cursor on a button. and left axis on the workbook window represent data that have a relatively few. ERRCD. discrete values associated with them. Worksheet tabs. the button enlarges and displays its tool tip. When creating a new worksheet. usually type account code has only a few values associated with it: B (Supplies).1.1. P (Fuels). E (Equipment).5. identify the data that become axis items. it extends off the edges of the screen. 4. (Totals in this example). Page scroll bars.1.5. Page axis. 4.5. Text on the status bar shows a slightly expanded version of the explanation.2. Discoverer queries the database and then displays it.2. For example.2. These tabs can be renamed. If you haven't opened the worksheet yet. Functions controlled by these buttons are also available from the menus. On a cross tab worksheet. Data points of a table or cross tab are the data in the "body" of the worksheet. Stock Record Account Number (SRAN). Page scroll buttons. top axis. Chapter 4 Clicking a button on either bar executes that button's function. 4.

Cross tab and Page-Detail Cross tab. Table Layout with page details.5.2. lists of due-outs with their corresponding due-in. Figure 4. and so on. each page would show one budget code with all the corresponding stock numbers.13.2.5. above. Chapter 4 The Table and Page-Detail Table. As you can see. You set the criteria for displaying portions of data in order to see exactly what you want on each page. A table layout with page details is a table with multiple pages of data. which lists data in rows and columns. in the example in Figure 4. lists of DIFM details from various organizations. recurring way. Table layout. Usually this type of layout is used to study data details in a specific. 4. 4–16 . it is essentially a listing of data. Typical data for tables includes such layouts as a stock number list with all of its indicative data sorted by warehouse location or budget code. Figure 2-3 Discoverer Table Layout. you may want to see the stock numbers by budget code. The most familiar layout for data is a table.13.1. 4. Here is a sample of a table layout on the workbook window. In this scenario. For example.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. where each page shows various portions of the data in detail.

For example. in Discoverer. the data points (that is. and count of each type reject for each function number. short for "cross-tabulation.2. a typical cross tab might show the total number of a specific rejects by function number. count of a type of reject. In this example. A cross tab layout has three axes: side axis. Chapter 4 Figure 4. and reject number. Because each axis can hold several data items. cross tabs can show the interrelationships between many dimensions of data on the various axes. Discoverer Table Layout With Page Items. in this case the total of a particular reject for a function number. top axis. TRIC. Each row and column intersection shows the data points. a cross tab can display many dimensions of data. The reject number and function number are axes of the cross tab as rows and columns. function number. function number.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. In other words.3.14. there are three sets of original data: reject number. the following figure is a sample cross tab that shows five dimensions of data: system designator. the intersections. or cells on the cross tab) are the count of a particular 4–17 . and page axis. and data points. Every cross tab has at least three dimensions of data: rows. 4. columns. However. For example. A cross tab. Cross tab layout." relates two different sets of data and summarizes their interrelationship in terms of a third set of data.5.

One of the most powerful features of cross tabs is that they can uncover subtleties in the data that are not readily apparent from a table of data or from the raw data itself.3. NOTES: Key to Figure Page axis. Side axis. 4. The next page of data would show the same type of data. cross tabs can show relationships between two sets of numbers when.16. there is no meaningful correlation between them at all. A page detail cross tab layout is a cross tab with multiple pages of data. Therefore. Top axis. in fact. 4. Seeing Next Page of Data. Page detail cross tab layout. When the page axis contains data.5. the table or cross tab displays one page of data at a time.5. so you can group the data on separate pages. NOTE: A word of caution: Used incorrectly.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. To see another page of data on a table or cross tab: 4. Figure 4. such as the rejects for Stock Record Account Number (SRAN) 5000. Click the down arrow next to the data you want to see.4. This side axis also contains two data items: Function Number and Reject Number. you must understand the correlation of the data before the cross tab relationships make sense. This top axis contains two data items: Reject # Count and TRIC.5. except for the next system designator.5.15.2.1.5. Cross Tab Layout With Page Items.3. 4–18 . Chapter 4 type reject. You set the criteria for displaying portions of data in order to see exactly what you want on each page. 4. it contains a single data item: Stock Record Account Number (SRAN).2. A page displays all of the data for a particular data item. In this sample. See Figure 4.

2. and 5000. In the following figure. in combination. 3300.5. Therefore. 5. the page axis has two data items: Stock Record Account Number (SRAN) and excess exception code. A dot indicates the current page being displayed on the table or cross tab. A drop-down list appears showing the pages available for that data item. Drop-Down List on Page Axis Items.3. The SRANS are 2823. and A. the excess exception codes are 1. the Table has 9 pages of data: 4–19 . 3. NOTES: Key to Figure Click the down arrow to select the next page of data for the particular data item.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 Figure 4.16. Select the page that you want to see next from the drop-down menu. 4.

18. EEX – 5 SRAN – 5000. NOTES: Key to Figure Looking at the page labels. EEX . See Next page of Data. Chapter 4 SRAN – 2823.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3 SRAN – 2823. EEX – 1 SRAN – 2823. EEX – A SRAN – 3300. EEX – 5 SRAN – 2823. Figure 4. See Next Page of Data. To see data for other SRANs. EEX – A SRAN – 5000. EEX – 3 SRAN – 5000. click the down 4–20 .17. you can see that this table shows data for Stock Record Account Number (SRAN) 2823 and excess exception code (EEX) 5. EEX – A Figure 4. EEX – 1 SRAN – 5000.

4. click the down arrow in the EEX item. 4.1. The dot next to 2823 indicates that the table currently displays the page for SRAN 2823 data. column names.4.4.5. to change the font size. Workbook Wizard.4.5.1.1.1.1. In the list box on the left. The Example box shows you the item's current heading format. you can reformat a worksheet. select them from the list. From the Sheet menu. You can change font size. The formats you create using the Format Panel apply to one worksheet at a time. background colors. To change the format of worksheet data: Figure 4.1.4.4. 4.1. Click the Format Data button to change the way worksheet data appears in cells. You can even select multiple items to format simultaneously. To view data for 3300 and 5000.1.4.1. click the items that you want to format.5.5.5.19. 4.1. 4.2. The following sections describe how to do this. and so forth are all part of the default format set up by the Discoverer Administrator. The Format Panel of the Workbook Wizard appears.4. You can format one item at a time or format multiple items. and alignment of numbers. and alignment one column at a time or one row at a time.5. With a workbook open.5. Edit worksheet Data Format.1. color. Formatting a Worksheet. Chapter 4 arrow in the SRAN item.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. in this case the different SRANS. A drop-down list shows other items available. for example. Then choose an EEX from the list.1. 4. However. 4–21 . To see data for other excess exception codes. Part of a Discoverer Administrator's responsibility when designing pre-defined workbooks is to format each worksheet. Workbook Wizard Format Panel. Text fonts.4.3. color. Workbook Wizard provides the Format Panel to help you customize the way text. 4. and dates appear in your worksheets. The Format Data dialog appears. choose Format. click on the tab for the worksheet that you want to format. numbers.

and Dialog Box. Click one or more of the Style buttons to make your data bold.5.1. underlined. 4. Click the icons next to Text and Background to choose their colors from a color palette.1. Click the Size drop-down menu to increase or decrease the font size for data. the Format Data dialog. With Number.6.1. currency or percentages). Click the Number tab 4–22 .5. or strikethrough.4. Click the Show Actual font size checkbox if you want to preview your changes in the Example box using the font size as well as the other changes that you chose above.4.20.5. you will also see a tab labeled Number on the Format Data dialog. Do one of the following.1. do any of the following. Format Data. italic. If the item you are formatting contains numbers (for example. 4. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Click the Wrap words in cell checkbox if you want long words to be visible inside a single cell.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click one horizontal alignment button and one vertical alignment button to change the way data is aligned within worksheet cells.

The Format Panel of the Workbook Wizard appears. Year or Quarter).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. you will also see a tab labeled Text on the Format Data dialog. From the Sheet menu. or Capitalized. lowercase.5.1. 4. With a workbook open. to show or hide a currency symbol for your country. choose Format. then click the Choose a Language option at the Discoverer Start Page.4.1.1.5.5. click on the tab for the worksheet that you want to format.21. or to create a custom number format. 4.4.4. Excess Exception Code). Chapter 4 to add or remove decimal places.2. Click the Date tab to change how dates appear in your worksheet.2. Follow screen instructions for starting Discoverer. and choose a different Country setting. 4–23 . close Discoverer.2. you will also see a tab labeled Date on the Format Data dialog. Format Data with Text Dialog Box. NOTES: The currency symbol displayed is determined by the Country setting.2. To change the format of row and column headings: 4. To change the currency symbol. If the item you are formatting contains dates (for example. Click the Text tab to change the text's capitalization to UPPERCASE. If the item you are formatting contains text (for example.1. Edit worksheet column format. Figure 4.

1. Format Heading Dialog box. Workbook Wizard Format Panel.5.2.5.22.3.4.4. and alignment of headings. color. The Format Heading dialog box appears. You can format the heading for one item at a time or format multiple headings.1. Figure 4.4. Chapter 4 Figure 4. do any of the following: 4–24 . In the Format Data dialog.2.2. click the item that you want to format.4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4.5. 4. In the list box on the left. For example: the change the font size.1. Click the Format Heading button to change the way row and column headings appear on the worksheet. 4.5.23. The text inside the Example box shows you the item's current heading formatting.

3. 4.5.2. 4.4. From the Sheet menu.4.1. 4.1.3. Click Edit Heading button to change the way an item's name appears on the worksheet. to change the heading TRIC to TRIC Code.5.2.3. click the item that you want to edit.5.4. and then click OK.3. Preview your changes in the Example box.3. choose Format. With a workbook open. italic. Workbook Wizard Format Panel. Click one or more of the Style buttons to make your data bold.4.3.24.1. The Format Panel of the Workbook Wizard appears.5.1.5. To change a heading's heading: 4. 4. For example.5. Click the Wrap words in cell checkbox if you want long words to be visible inside a single cell. 4–25 .1. 4. You return to the Format Panel.1. Click the Show Actual font size checkbox if you want to preview your changes in the Example box using the font size as well as the other changes that you chose above. or strikethrough. Click one horizontal alignment button and one vertical alignment button to change the way data is aligned within worksheet cells.6. The Edit Heading dialog appears. where you can also format row and column headings or change the way an item's name is displayed in a worksheet.4. click on the tab for the worksheet that you want to format.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 Click the Size drop-down menu to increase or decrease the font size for data. Figure 4. Click the icons next to Text and Background to choose their colors from a color palette.4. Edit Heading of a Column Heading.4. In the list box on the left.1. underlined.

The new name for the worksheet appears on its tab.3.4. To Rename a Worksheet: 4. 4–26 .5.1.1. You return to the Format Panel. In the Heading text box.1.1. which is located on the bottom of the worksheet.5.3.4. Edit Heading Dialog Box.6. Renaming and Moving a Worksheet. 4.2. 4. type the new name for the worksheet. From the menu. Click OK.4.5.4. 4.1. type a new name for this item.4. Figure 4. 4.1. Rename Worksheet Dialog Box.1.1. choose Sheet | Rename Sheet.4.5.1. The Rename Worksheet dialog box appears. 4.4.4.4.26. Move a Worksheet. Open the workbook that contains the sheet you want to rename.2.5.3. 4.4. where you can also format worksheet data and format row and column headings. Do one of the following: Double-click the tab at the bottom of the worksheet you want to rename.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4.4.1.5.1.4.5. 4. 4.4.1.1.5.4.25.5.1. In the New Name text field. Click OK.4.4.5. Chapter 4 Figure 4.1.

From the menu.1.4.1. To resize a window: 4. the pointer is a horizontal arrow. Move Worksheets Dialog Box. used to change the width of the dialog box.5. 4.5.4.4. 4. 4.5.5. Move Worksheets dialog box appears. Pointer becomes a horizontal or vertical arrow. Worksheet moves up or down to a different position. Put the pointer on an edge of the window.4. 4.5. When you are finished. choose Sheet Move Sheet.2. You may find a more appropriate size better for your particular computer monitor.1. 4. 4–27 . Many of Discoverer's windows can be resized horizontally or vertically.4.5.4.27.5.1. Resizing windows.4. In the Figure below.5.2.5. click OK.4.1.4.2.5. Figure 4.1.1.1.5. Open the workbook that contains the worksheets you want to reorder.5.2. Repeat step 3 for every worksheet you want to reorder.3.4.4.4. Chapter 4 To reorder worksheets in a workbook: 4. Click on the name of a worksheet and click the up arrow or down arrow.2.2.4.1.1.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4.4.

6. When the pointer is on the top or bottom edge.5. 4.5.1. 4. To see a workbook's properties: 4. Looking at a workbook’s properties. 4.5. drag it to the left or right. Workbook Properties dialog box appears showing information about the Workbook.1. Drag the pointer to adjust the width of the dialog box.1. Open the workbook.4.28.4.3.1.5.4. 4–28 . You can record additional information about the workbook in the Description box. Chapter 4 Figure 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4. Choose File | Manage Workbooks | Properties.6.2. A workbook's properties provide basic information about the workbook.1. When the pointer is on the side edge.6.5. Window Resize Arrow. drag it up or down.

Open the workbook that contains the data you want. 3. Conditions filter data and display only the data that meets the conditions. 4.1.6. To create a new workbook.1. Reduce the amount of data by using Conditions. Your Database Administrator usually supplies the various passwords and server access instructions to log on to Oracle Discoverer Plus and open a workbook.6. 4. select from choices. Getting the Data You Want. you must have the appropriate database privileges. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Existing workbooks/worksheets may require modification in order to meet your needs. Workbook Properties Dialog Box. 4. you open the one that contains the specific data you want.6. 5.1. called parameters. Edit a workbook/worksheet. customized for displaying exactly the right combination of data. Opening an Existing Workbook.1. if necessary. 4–29 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If several workbooks exist. 4.1.6. Getting specific data--the data that you want to see--from report’s database involves five basic steps: 1.1. you can create a new one.1. As part of the process to open a workbook.1. Go to the Discoverer Web site address. If none of the workbooks meet your requirements. One parameter might be the Stock Record Account Number (SRAN) of the base you want to query.2. Connecting to the Oracle Reports Database. To connect to the reports database: 4.6. 4. 2. Launch your Web browser. which define the precise data you want to see in the workbook. Create a new workbook. if necessary.29. The following steps explain the basic process.

4.6. Figure 4. Connect to Oracle Discoverer dialog appears. Click Connect. Chapter 4 4. click the option "Always trust content from Oracle Corporation. 4–30 . Connect to Oracle Discoverer.5. 4. In the Connect box.8.1. This security dialog appears because Discoverer requests extra permissions so it can access the Discoverer server or local devices.1.31.4. enter the name of the database that you wish to use.1.1. Welcome page appears.1.1.1. If not enter it in the Username box. 4. such as a printer. Your user name should already be in the Username box. 4.1. You may also see a dialog about security.1.6.6.6.6.30. See your Database Administrator for password and database name details.6. Welcome to Discoverer Page. "Click Yes (or OK or Grant depending on the type of dialog) to continue launching Discoverer. 4.1.6. Click the Click to Start icon.1. In the Password box.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If you don't want to see this dialog every time you connect.1.7. Figure 4. enter your password.3.

Figure 4.6.1. Open Workbook Dialog Box.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.2. Chapter 4 The first screen of the Workbook Wizard appears.33.32. The dialog then shows options for opening a workbook from the database or a scheduled workbook. Workbook Wizard. Click Open an existing workbook. Figure 4. Choose one of the following: 4–31 . This option is not available if you don't have access rights granted by the Database Administrator. 4. 4.6.6.2.1. To open a workbook: 4. Opening a Workbook.2.1.2. Open an existing workbook shows options for opening one of your existing workbooks. Create a New Workbook starts the process to create a new workbook. The wizard steps you through the process to get the specific data you want to see.

1. Scheduled: Displays a list of workbooks previously scheduled to run at a certain times (usually overnight. A dialog box asks if you want to run the query for the worksheet. Scheduled workbooks run automatically and are available when you need to open them. The workbook opens.4. A query causes Discoverer to find the most recent data to fill in the worksheet. Run Query Confirmation.2. Figure 4. Normally you click “Yes” because you want to see the most recent data associated with the sheet. Discoverer evaluates the query to determine how much time it will take to open the first worksheet. The workbook can be shared easily with others who have access to the database.1.6. or at some periodic interval).3.35. Click No 4–32 . Depending on your selection. either a list of stored workbooks or a list of scheduled workbooks appears.2. 4. a progress dialog shows you the time estimate for loading the first sheet. Select a workbook that contains the data you want to see. 4. Figure 4.6. Depending on the default options you've selected for opening worksheets. Chapter 4 Database: Opens a dialog box for selecting a workbook stored as part of a specific database.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. and click Open. Select a Workbook to Open.34. on a weekend.

a dialog box shows you the progress and elapsed time while Discoverer is finding the data. For example. 4. Click Yes to see the data. If you can't wait the estimated time. At the end of the process. but the worksheet will be empty. Figure 4. Here's a sample: 4–33 .2. If you click Yes.37. Query Progress Indicator. click No.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6.36. Time Estimate. you can be doing other work while Discoverer gets the data for the worksheet. Figure 4. your workbook appears. Discoverer will remain open. Chapter 4 if you don't want to see the data in the worksheet.1. This dialog box is mainly for your convenience because. if the query time is more than a few minutes.5. click No if you want to create a new worksheet and don't need to see the data on the existing worksheet. Discoverer now evaluates the query to determine how much time it will take to open the workbook and shows you an estimate.

NOTE: Only one workbook at a time can be open.3.3. From the menu. Viewing Scheduled Workbooks. and then Open while a workbook is already open. Chapter 4 Figure 4.38.6. Discoverer Workbook.1. Open Workbook Dialog Box. and then Close to close the current workbook. choose File. 4–34 .3.6.2. For example. To open another workbook: 4.1.6. and then Open. the current workbook closes automatically. Choose File. Opening Another Workbook. Figure 4.4. The Open Workbook dialog appears.1. 4. 4.6. If you choose File. you might want to automatically run the Stock Number Directory (M14) at the end of each month.39.1. or run a workbook every week based on the number of special inventories.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4. Scheduled workbooks run at a specified time.

If you run a scheduled workbook overnight (or over the weekend) and 4–35 . You can open a scheduled workbook when you start Discoverer. such as a monthly M14. Discoverer Administrator must provide appropriate privileges to schedule a workbook. The results of the scheduled report are saved on the server and are available when you connect to the database and start Discoverer. A scheduled workbook produces a worksheet or set of worksheets with the results derived from running the workbook. scheduling a workbook to run at night or on the weekend avoids overburdening the server during business hours.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 Often. workbooks that you want to schedule are designed specifically for that purpose. You want to run a workbook at regular intervals. or while working in a workbook. you do not need to leave your computer on overnight (or whenever you schedule the report to run). the workbook might include special calculations or conditions that produce the results you want on a periodic basis only. Typically you schedule workbooks if: The workbook will take a long time to run. Because a scheduled report runs on the server. rather than for your day-to-day analysis. For example.

Discoverer has filtering techniques both when you open a workbook initially and as you are working with the data.” If you are already connected to the database. Open Scheduled Workbook Dialog Box. However. a message reminds you that the new data on the worksheet is not the same as that derived from the scheduled workbook.40. from the menus choose File. Chapter 4 want to see the results first thing the next morning. Parameters. Databases often contain enormous amounts of information. open the workbook as you connect to Discoverer. and then Open. “Open an Existing Workbook. Click Scheduled.2. Discoverer has a number of ways to filter out the data that you don't need to see and to find the specific data you want. Figure 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Parameters offer predefined choices of data when you open a workbook.6. and one key task necessary to work with a database efficiently is to find the specific information you want to see or analyze.1. The Open Workbook dialog appears. Select the scheduled workbook you want to see and click Open.2. 4. One way to filter out unnecessary data and find the specific information you want when opening a workbook is to select and apply parameters. To open a scheduled workbook: Do one of the following: Connect to the database and launch Discoverer as described in section. and then Open. NOTE: The worksheets produced by running the scheduled workbook contain data derived specifically for that report and you can work with the worksheet in the normal manner. suppose you are located at a Global Logistics Support Center (GLSC) with access to data from 4–36 . if you change any of the data.6. For example. The dialog lists the scheduled workbooks. 4.

4. each person can open the worksheet and get just the data of interest to themselves.2. Discoverer users often create parameters when creating the initial workbook. that is.6. 4.2. a dialog lists the parameters so you can select the ones you want on the worksheet. For example.3.2. Conditions are designed more for analysis so you can apply condition statements while you are involved with data analysis to find very specific sets of data.1.1. 4–37 . In addition. anyone with the proper access rights (granted by the Discoverer Administrator) can create parameters too.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3. 4. you can change parameter values every time the query is refreshed. 5000.3. Specific data to see on a worksheet can be chosen.2.6. If one of the parameters is "SRAN. etc.3. 4. you can choose: 4." you choose the SRAN for Barksdale as data values for that parameter. The two parameters are essentially placeholders in the condition statement until the person opening the worksheet picks a data value for each one.6. 4. Choosing data values for a parameter when a workbook opens. Parameters actually use “condition” statements to find specific data. Worksheets open more quickly. Multiple data values for a single parameter.3. However.2. When the workbook opens it shows data from only that base--exactly what you want to see.3. 4800. NOTES: Although choosing a data value for a parameter limits the data initially displayed on the worksheet-for example. However. conditions and parameters can also be used with each other for more sophisticated filtering procedures. You are opening the Stock Number Directory (M14) workbook. but you only want to see data from Barksdale AFB. Although similar. You can always add any additional data as you are working on the worksheet. Chapter 4 several accounts. and you can edit parameter values from the menu.6.6. because amount of data on a worksheet is limited by the choices offered by the parameter. However.2.1. the workbook opens with data from all the bases which you have access.6. If several people are using a worksheet. Discoverer finds all the data based on the selected values.2. 3300.1. you limit the data to “XB3” items only--parameters do not limit the data available for the worksheet as you are working with it. fixed statements. Without the parameter. if the two parameters for a worksheet are SRAN and Type Account Code.1. Then. 4. Users are required to make an entry for each parameter prior to running the query. When opening a worksheet with predefined parameters. The main benefits of using Parameters are: 4. Data value for a single parameter. unlike regular conditions that find the same data each time they're applied.3.2.6. parameters offer choices at the time the worksheet opens. parameters and conditions are designed for different purposes. the SRAN(s) are the data values. Parameters offer you a choice and help you open a workbook quickly to see just the data that you want to see. The term data values refer to the choices offered when creating or choosing parameters.3.6. conditions are specific. if the parameter is for choosing base(s) for which you want to see data. Depending on the design of the parameters. the underlying condition statement is "Find all the data about <SRAN> for a <Type Account Code>". For example. 4.3.6.

If parameters are defined for the worksheet. 4.6. This type of parameter selection offers complete flexibility to choose the exact combination of data to see.2.6. Example of Query Using Parameter Values. In the example below. a dialog lists the available parameters. 4–38 . The Values dialog appears.42.3.3. To choose a data value for a parameter: 4.3.6.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.41. Choose a data value for the parameter by doing one of the following: The worksheet appears and contains data only for the values you chose. click the drop down arrow and choose Select Multiple Values. Chapter 4 4.3. Open a worksheet. Example of Query Using Parameter Values.3.1. The resulting worksheet contains data only for Eglin.2.2. From the Edit Parameter Values dialog. Data values for multiple parameters. the parameter value of SRAN =“2823” is selected. 4.3. you can select several data values when opening the worksheet.2.6.2. Figure 4. If the parameter is set up to allow for multiple data values.3. Figure 4.6. 4.

6.3. Figure 4.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.43. 4–39 .3. The worksheet is refreshed to display only data from the items selected.6.4. Another Example of Query Using Parameter Values. If the workbook has multiple parameters defined.44. Chapter 4 Figure 4. 4.2. Click OK on the Values dialog and then click OK on the Parameters dialog. To see all Items. 4.6. click the drop down arrow next to each parameter and select a data value for each one. Select Values Dialog Box. The following example shows two Parameters--one for bases and the other for type due out--so you can select a combination of data to see.2. click Select All.3. select the check box(es) next to the items that you want to see in your Worksheet.5. In the Select Values list.6. 4.

3. creating a parameter is similar to creating a simple condition statement. To create a new parameter: 4.3. you may want to edit the parameter so that SRAN XXXX is the default value for the SRAN parameter. Worksheet level.6.3.3. or headings.6.3.6.45.46. 4. In addition to creating parameters. 4.6.6. Edit worksheet with Parameters Tab Highlighted. Here. You specify the data item to use for the parameter (for example.1. you can edit them to change their default values.2.3. The New Parameter dialog box appears. For example. 4–40 .2.1. Because parameters use condition statements to find specific data.1.3.6. if you find the majority of your work is with a particular base. 4. Display the worksheet to which you want to apply the parameter. the parameter applies to all worksheets in your workbook. Figure 4. Chapter 4 Figure 4.2. 4.1.2. descriptions. Here.3.3.3. 4. The Edit Worksheet dialog opens with the Parameters tab highlighted. From the menu.3.2.3. You can create parameters at two levels: 4. Edit Parameter Values Dialog Box with Two Parameters.3. Create and edit parameters.6.6. Create a parameter.3. Changes to the parameter in any worksheet cascade to all worksheets in the workbook.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. the list of SRANs in the database) and then specify the choices available for that parameter. Workbook level. the parameter applies to the current worksheet only. choose Tools | Parameters.3.3.2. Click New. 4.3.1.

47. The list shows the data items currently used in the worksheet. Select this option if you want the person using the worksheet to be able to select multiple data values for the Parameter when opening the worksheet. Creates a condition with an operator. type text that prompts the user to make a selection. Create Condition/Use Operator. the condition statement uses BQ as the UJC in the formula. What prompt do you want to show to other users? This text appears in the dialog that appears prior to opening the worksheet.4. If you don't type a name. and you select ‘BQ’ as the data value for the Parameter. Click 'Allow only one value for all Sheets' to make the parameter value cascade across all worksheets in the workbook.6.3. Let other users select multiple values. If this option is not selected. You can select the operator from the dropdown list. For example. What default value do you want to give this Parameter? This is the preselected data value for the Parameter. the person can choose only one value for the Parameter. Chapter 4 Figure 4. to create a Parameter for selecting a UJC. if the condition statement uses UJC in its formula. What is the value of this parameter if it is used in more than one sheet? Allows you to create the Parameter either at Workbook level or Worksheet level. Type in or select the features of the parameter. Click the drop down arrow and select a data value from the list.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. or type the default value directly into the box. What do you want to name this parameter? Type the name that you want to appear in the Parameters dialog.3. It is likely this box will be left blank. It also shows all items related to the items selected in the worksheet and all calculations. it explains the Parameter. select the data item that contains the UJCs. New Parameter Dialog Box. For example. Discoverer inserts a default parameter name. What description do you want to show to other users? This text also appears in the dialog. 4. select equals (=) to create a condition with 4–41 . Click 'Allow a different value in each Sheet' to make the parameter value apply to the current worksheet only. For example. Parameterized Conditions refer to condition statements that use a Parameter in their formulas. Which item do you want to base your parameter on? Select the data item for the Parameter from the drop down list.

6. Click OK. To edit an existing parameter: 4.3. Edit a parameter.1.3.3. Edit Worksheet Dialog Box. the portion of the dialog for creating parameterized conditions is not available because you are already defining a condition. therefore. The Edit Parameter Values dialog appears. a new Condition is created and activated. Moving the Parameters up and down in the Parameters dialog changes their position in the dialog that appears when opening a worksheet. 4. 4.6.2.48. to find all the data after the year 1997 the condition formula is "Year" > 1997.6.6. Figure 4.2. The Edit Worksheet dialog opens with the Parameters tab highlighted. Display the worksheet to which you want to apply the parameter.3. Deleting the condition deletes the Parameter and vice versa.3.3. For example.5. NOTE: If you are creating a parameter as part of a condition. Chapter 4 the formula "For Item" = "Parameter's Name. The new Parameter now appears in the Parameters dialog box. choose Tools.3. then Parameters. From the menu.3.3.2.3. Parameters that are part of an active condition are automatically activated as well.6. 4.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If you select the option Create Condition/Use Operator in the New Parameter dialog.3. 4–42 .3. 4. and you can specify the data value. Click the name of the parameter you want to edit and then click Edit. The Edit Parameter dialog appears. The worksheet then appears with data from 1998 on.6. 4.3. The worksheet now displays the specific result for the data specified in the Edit Parameters dialog.3. the Parameter is also activated.3. To deactivate a parameter.6.3." A typical use of this feature is to find data values greater then (>) or less than (<) a data value. Click OK in the Edit Worksheet Parameters dialog box. deactivate the condition.

3. 4. Edit Parameter Dialog Box.8.3. NOTE: You can click the Refresh icon to display the Edit Parameters dialog. fixed statements.” but you only want to see data for the Munitions Maintenance Squadron.6. Condition statements tell Discoverer to find and display only the data that meets the condition.3.7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click OK in the Parameters tab to apply your changes.5.6.3. For example. You return to the Parameters tab. you might want to limit the display of historical data of a stock number to the last two 4–43 .3. However. 4.3. Select a new data value.6.6. 4.4.3.3. To select different parameter values: 4. Conditions are specific. the workbook opens and displays data only for that organization. Edit Parameters dialog appears. conditions and parameters can also be used with each other for more sophisticated filtering procedures.3. 4.3.6. A typical data analysis task is to filter the data to find only that data that meets certain conditions. and click OK.3. choose Sheet. 4. suppose a workbook contains all “due-outs.49. then Edit Parameter Values.3.6. (or choose Sheet. parameters and conditions are designed for different purposes. For example.3. Another way to filter out unnecessary data and find the specific information you want when opening a workbook is to apply conditions. Although similar. then Refresh Sheet). Click OK. Conditions.6. By applying the condition statement of ORG Code=123.5. Chapter 4 Figure 4. You'll see the results corresponding to the data value you have chosen. From the menu.3. Conditions also filter the data to display only the exact information you want.3.6. 4.4. Parameters offer you a choice and help you open a workbook quickly to see just the data that you want to see. Conditions are designed more for analysis so you can apply condition statements while you are involved with data analysis to find very specific sets of data. Type in or select the features of the parameter that you want to change.

6. Conditions Tab Dialog Box. except ones stored in Warehouse 01. Discoverer assigns the single quotes automatically. Extended Price > 3000--The worksheet displays items with an extended price greater than $3. Some sample conditions are: Year = 1998 or 1999--The displayed data applies to 1998 and 1999 only. Chapter 4 months. Edit Worksheet. Choose Tools. displays only the data the condition meets.00.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Turning on a condition filters out the data you don't want to see. Turning a condition on. Using conditions.1. Text values in conditional expressions must be in single quotes. Warehouse Location <> 01%--The worksheet displays data for all items. then Conditions or click the Condition icon on the Toolbar to see the Conditions dialog.000.6.5.1. Alternatively. Figure 4. you can specify a condition based on a calculated value that computes which data can meet the condition. To view available conditions: 4. turn the condition off.5. Several features for creating conditions involve advanced analysis techniques. View available conditions. Click the drop down arrow next to the text box labeled View Conditions for to determine which conditions you want to see. instead of creating a condition for a defined data element. You can turn these conditions on and off to find the data you want to see. 4.5.50. Turning a condition off restores the other data to the display.1. but it will not be displayed. For example. 4.1. you want to see the data for only two types of Exception Codes. The Conditions dialog appears. Each of these tasks involves filtering the data to find the specific data that meets the conditions.1. The workbook may contain data from other years. 4.1. 4–44 .2.1. Conditions previously defined for a worksheet are listed on the Conditions dialog.1.5.6. Normally. If you want to see all the data again.6.

6. All Items-.lists conditions defined for all items in the workbook. 4.lists only the conditions turned on for the current worksheet.3.6.51. click the box next to it so a checkmark appears.1. To turn on a condition. 4. The Delete button permanently removes the condition from your workbook. If you select two (or more) conditions that conflict.1. NOTES: Do not click the Delete button to turn off a condition. Select one of the following: <Data Item>-. To turn conditions on and off: 4.5. a warning appears. Chapter 4 Figure 4.5. Click OK. the two conditions "Demand Level = 2" and "Demand Level = 5" conflict because the first condition removes data 4–45 .lists conditions that apply only to the selected data item. Choose Tools. click a checkmarked box to remove the checkmark.1.1. Discoverer finds the data that meets the condition(s). and then Conditions or click the Condition tool on the Toolbar to see the Conditions dialog.6.5. Choosing Conditions Relating to Items. Activate/deactivate conditions.1. You can turn on more than one condition at a time. and displays it. Active Only-.2.2. The Conditions dialog lists the conditions already defined for your workbook.6.2.2.5.1. To turn off a condition.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. and shows which are turned on or off.5.3. For example.1.2.6. 4. 4.

2.5.6. Choose Tools. you can create your own condition statements. In that case the worksheet appears with no rows of data.2. To create a new condition: 4. Complex conflicts may not be detected. Figure 4.6.5.” explains how to create more complex condition statements.2. or click the Conditions tool on the Toolbar to see the Conditions dialog box. and then Conditions. Condition Incompatibility Warning Box. 4–46 .6. “Grouping Multiple Conditions. the second condition tries to display only stock numbers with a demand level of “5” at the same time. Creating new conditions. Click the New button to see the New Condition dialog box. This section explains how to create relatively simple condition statements.52.2. The section.5. 4. Chapter 4 for all stock numbers except ones with a demand level of “2”. If none of the existing conditions filter the data to find the specific information that you want to see.1. 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

6. check the box Generate name automatically. Descriptions typed here appear in the Conditions dialog when the condition is selected.5. New Condition Dialog Box. 4.6. the condition.53. Chapter 4 Figure 4. To automatically generate a name for the condition based on the data item.3.2.6.4.2. If you don't enter a description. the name and description are usually sufficient to explain how the condition will filter the data. You build or edit a formula by first choosing an item and condition and then choosing or entering the appropriate values in the Value(s) text box. 4.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click the drop down button for Item and choose the data item for the first part of the Condition formula. 4.2. straightforward conditions. What description would you like to give your condition? For simple. advanced conditions might need more detailed descriptions for clarity. 4–47 . Create the formula for the condition statement using the Formula section of the dialog.5. Type text for the following: What would you like to name your condition? Type a name in the text box.5. the condition formula automatically appears as the description. and the values that you select for it. However.

Figure 4.55.2. the boxes for the condition operator and value are removed because the condition you select is already complete.5. 4. The drop-down list of values is a shortcut so you don't have to manually type the data value for an item. Other options on the drop-down list include Create Calculation and Select Condition.2.54. 4–48 .5. If you are editing an existing condition. data values for various items might or might not appear in the list. Click the drop down button for Operator and choose the condition operator you want.6. Condition Operator Dialog Box. It is for quickly replacing an existing condition on the Edit Condition dialog. However. 4. appears on the drop-down list.7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Data Items Drop Down List. If clicking the Value(s) drop list button shows a list of data values you can then select the value you want for the item instead of manually typing it. depending on whether your Discoverer Administrator set up the data element to show a list of values. which use calculations or other conditions to create the first part of the condition.6. Chapter 4 Figure 4. To complete the definition of the condition click in the Value(s) box and enter a data value. the option. A list of defined condition appears and you can select the one you want. Copy Condition. You can then use the condition to create a more advanced condition. It replaces the currently selected condition in the Edit Condition dialog.6. If you select an existing condition as the item.

Click OK in the Conditions dialog to see the data that meets the condition. You can also create new parameters for the item by selecting New Parameter from the dropdown list." and then clicking the drop list button displays B." 4.Serviceable Balance. A dialog for creating a new calculation appears. = Item Table.6. For example.10.5. 4. you can choose the option Select parameter from the drop-down list to select an existing parameter for the item.6. The new condition appears in the Conditions dialog and is turned on ready to be applied to the data.5. Figure 4. If the condition requires more than one value. Condition operators. Using the equals sign you can also type a calculation directly into the Item box or Value box. select Create Calculation. The condition will then substitute the results of the calculation for the item or value where you specified a calculation. Click OK in the Conditions dialog to see the data that meets the condition.2. A list of data values appears and you can select the ones you want.2.5. The dialog for creating new parameters appears.8.56. See the example below. the calculation appears with an equals sign in front of it so Discoverer knows it is a calculation.” selecting "Activity Code is equal to. If the selected item for the condition has parameters defined for it.” “D.6. D. The following table describes the condition expressions: 4–49 . Click OK." click the Match Case box.2. NOTE: If you use parameters in a condition.Demand Level. If you are dealing with text and want the condition to match the uppercase and lowercase characters in the text. Chapter 4 For example. such as ": my Parameter. E. 4. and F as the choices." If you are using calculations. To use another item as the condition's value. choose Select Item.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3. you can choose Select Multiple Values from the drop-down list. A list of the items in the worksheet appears and you can select an item from the list. click the box for Match Case. To use the results of a calculation as the value. if the four values for the data item named Activity Code are “B. such as "=Item Table. if you want the condition to filter the data to find all "Widgets" but not "widgets.9. 4. the parameter appears in the formula with a colon in front of it. Values Selection Dialog Box.6.” “E” and “F.

zero) Is not contained UJC NOT IN (`AA'. Contains no Commission IS NULL. Greater than or Demand Level >= 10.000 or less values than or equal to $2. Not equal Demand Level <> 0. . Chapter 4 Table 4. Less than Demand Level < 10. zero) Contains some Commission IS NOT NULL. `BQ' ‘1A’). Less than or Demand Level <= 10. finds data that contains at more values least one of the values.000. Condition Expressions.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. items with a Demand Level other than 0 are displayed. displays items between two with a Unit Price greater than or equal to $1. only the items with a Demand Level of 0 are displayed. displays outside of two items with a Unit Price less than $1000 or greater than values $2. displays data only when data (not even commission has no value. EXPRESSION MEANING = Equals <> > < <= >= LIKE EXAMPLE Demand Level = 0. all items with a Demand Level equal to equal to or less than 10 are displayed. The percent (%) sign matching) matches any number of characters. Not similar to Nomenclature NOT LIKE `A%'.2.000. Similar to Nomenclature LIKE `A%'. all items with a Demand Level equal to equal to or greater than 10 are displayed. finds all nomenclatures not beginning with A. A value lies Unit Price NOT BETWEEN 1000 AND 2000. all items with a Demand Level greater than 10 are displayed. finds all nomenclatures (using wildcard beginning with the letter A. does not display items in one or more where the UJC on the Due-Out is AA. all items with a Demand Level less than 10 are displayed. `1A'). values A value lies Unit Price BETWEEN 1000 AND 2000. The percent (%) sign matches any number of characters. or 1A. displays data when data (even commission has any value. BQ. `BQ'. An underscore symbol (_) matches a single character. . Greater than Demand Level > 10. Contains one or UJC IN (`AA'. IN IS NULL IS NOT NULL NOT IN BETWEEN NOT BETWEEN NOT LIKE 4–50 . An underscore symbol (_) matches a single character.

The condition statement is: Serviceable Balance >10 AND Routing Identifier= ‘FLZ’. Note: These two expressions have the same meaning because both are supported by SQL programming. NOTES: There isn't a NOT operator. finds all items where the SLC does not equal 1. and all stock numbers with a budget code equal to ‘8’ regardless of the source of supply. Grouping multiple conditions. and all those with a RID of ‘FHZ’. Stock numbers from other RIDs and with a serviceable balance less than 10 are not displayed.6. The data display shows stock numbers with budget code of ‘8’ regardless of RID. Examples: Find stock numbers with Warner Robins AFB as the source of supply and serviceable balance greater than 10.5. if you use an SQL programming statement to create a complex conditional value. To group multiple conditions: 4. The Advanced Conditions dialog appears. Discoverer can recognize it regardless of which expression you use in the program. Chapter 4 != and ^ = Not equals Shelf Life Code (SLC)! = `1'.6. Therefore. 4. You can also nest statements.5. In the New Condition dialog.4. Find stock numbers with Tinker AFB as the source of supply.5. The condition statement is: Budget Code = 8 OR Routing Identifier= ‘FHZ’.4.1.4. 4. click the Advanced button. You can group multiple condition statements.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.1. Group multiple conditions. so one statement is contained within the definition of another statement. 4–51 . but you can create negated conditions by using complementary operators. Conditions consisting of multiple statements are connected using the AND/OR operators.

And and Or. 4. when you first write multiple statements they are grouped with the logical AND operator. To change the group operator to OR.4. You use these buttons to create the advanced condition. Create the second line of the condition.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. or NOT OR. 4. Discoverer adds Insert buttons for New Item.5. In the example above it is Budget Code = ‘S’. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Click the New Item button to add another line to the condition statement.4.1. Notice the new Group column added at the left side of the dialog. The Group column indicates how the statements are grouped by the operator.6. By default.6.5.6. 4–52 .58.4. New Condition Dialog Box.1. NOT AND.5.3. 4.5. Create the first line of the condition.1.6. click the drop-down menu next to it.4. Figure 4. Click OK to save the multi-statement condition.57.2. Example of Advanced Condition Statement. 4.1. Discoverer displays the formula at the bottom of the dialog so you can verify that the statement's logical construction is correct.4.

4–53 .59. 4. NOTES: 1. Undo only works after a deletion. Click the And or Or button to add another group to the condition.6.5.5. Chapter 4 NOTES: You can drag conditions and items on the dialog. Using the AND/OR operators can be tricky.5.4. 4.5. You can also select Copy Condition from the Item drop-down list. especially when grouping statements.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 2. Dragging Condition A onto Condition B replaces Condition B with Condition A.1. Applying conditions to worksheets. For example.2. so you can restore it if you need to.4. The operators can also be "nested" to several levels to group multiple conditions. When you finish creating a condition.5. Nest multiple conditions. Discoverer checkmarks it to indicate it is ready to be applied to the data.2. In that case.2. Click the column handle next to the group operator. 4.4. 4.3. the Undo button becomes active. If you delete a condition. To nest multiple conditions: 4.4. the condition to find stock numbers with demand levels greater than 5 and ERRCD XD2 or ones with demand levels greater than 5 with budget code 8 for any ERRCD is: Demand Level>5 AND (ERRCD='XD2' OR Budget Code=8). the values of the copied condition replace the values of the selected condition. 4.2.5. Check the data carefully to see if the condition produces the desired result.2.6.1.5.2. Click OK to save the multi-statement condition. Example of Condition Nesting.6.4.5.6. The formula at the bottom of the dialog shows the new statement construction.6. Figure 4.5. To apply an existing condition: 4.6.4.

you may not want to delete a condition in case you'll need it in the future.4. Make the changes you want to the condition. A message tells you that the condition cannot be reviewed or edited. or click the Conditions tool on the Toolbar.60.2. Select the condition in the Conditions dialog. make sure it is checked on and click OK. 4. and then Conditions.6.5.5. 4.6.6. and then Conditions. 4.6.3. Click the Delete button. 4.1. Click OK to apply the condition to the data and see the results. but you cannot make changes.5.6. You can still turn these conditions on and off.2.6. however. advanced conditions containing sub queries created in Discoverer 4.1.5.1..6.2. you can edit the condition to find the newer data.1.1. To apply that edited condition to the data. Deleting a condition removes it permanently from the workbook.5. cannot be reviewed or edited. 4.3. 4. For example. Editing and deleting conditions. or click the Conditions tool on the Toolbar.5. The condition is now edited. The Edit Condition dialog appears.1. 4. The Conditions dialog appears. The Conditions dialog appears.6.5.6. Apply Existing Condition.6.1. Select the condition you want to delete.6.5.6. to analyze your data in the way you want. Discoverer removes the condition from the list. 4. Chapter 4 Figure 4.6. but your query now requires data for budget codes 8 & 9.2.5.5.1. However.6. 4–54 . Click OK. 4.5.2.6. 4. you can edit the statement. You can click the Show button to review the condition and see its formula.1.2.6.6. To edit a condition: 4.6.6.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6. 4.5. If a condition statement does not find the exact data you want. Choose Tools.6.5. To delete a condition: 4.6.6. In addition.5. If you select one of these conditions. NOTE: You cannot edit conditions created by the Discoverer Administrator. Delete a condition. Edit a condition. if the statement finds data for budget code 8.6.5. Choose Tools.6. the Edit button changes to Show.2. Click the Edit button.1. because you can turn conditions on and off.

6. Before a user can select data from different folders. Thus. you may want to create additional workbooks and worksheets.6. only those folders with a Join (relationship) with the selected folder are available. In fact.1.6.6. Create a new workbook. For example.3. 4.6. Every other folder is inaccessible (grayed-out).2. you create the initial worksheet for the new workbook. For example: An Outer-Join between the requisition number on the due-out detail and the requisition number on the due-in detail will return due-outs that have requisition numbers and due-outs without requisition numbers.6. while working with Discoverer.6. If you have the appropriate access rights (usually granted by the database administrator).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Inner-Join is based on a one-to-one or one-to-many relationship. These relationships are created in Discoverer with “Joins. Required Steps: 4. you may want to consolidate Requisition Analysis information in a separate workbook that you share with all bases in a Major Command (MAJCOM).1. with or without a supply point detail assigned.1.6. Discoverer Administrator at HQ 754 ELSG/ILSS creates worksheets and workbooks for use by all Air Force Supply personnel. they are combined and displayed as one row. 2) Provides a relationship between different tables.3. Select the type of display for the new worksheet or workbook. It will also display all rows from one table even if the joined table does not have a matching value. Discoverer uses two types of “Joins”: 1) Inner (Natural) and 2) Outer.3. For example: An Outer-Join between the stock number on the item record and the stock number on the supply point detail will return all stock numbers. It will retrieve all rows from one table and any matching rows from another table. For example: An Inner-Join between the requisition number on the due-out detail and the requisition number on the due-in detail will only return due-outs that have requisition numbers. NOTE: The same process is used to create workbooks and worksheets. For example: An Inner-Join between the stock number on the item record and the stock number on the supply point detail will return only those stock numbers that have a supply point detail assigned.6.6. 4. you can use the steps explained in this chapter to create workbooks and worksheets. Chapter 4 4.1.2. a relationship must exist between those different data elements.6. An Outer-Join is based on a one-to-one.6.2. On the other hand. 4. to create a new workbook.6.2. When values in two tables match. or one-to-none relationship. they are combined and displayed as one row.6. Basic steps to create a new workbook or worksheet are as follows: 4. When values in two tables match. It will retrieve all rows from one table and any matching rows from another table. However.” A “Join” serves several purposes: 1) Links different tables (Folders) together. Create a New Workbook. When a user selects an item or folder to create a worksheet.1. 3) Provides logical pairing of tables in a database on matching data in specific columns.6.6. 4–55 . Table Joins. 4. one-to-many. 4. the steps described in this section are for both processes--building a new workbook and building a new worksheet. you may want to create a special worksheet as a scheduled report that gets printed each week as part of your local inventory management.

1. and then New to create a new workbook. 4.2. Step 2 of 10: Select Items dialog appears.3. Create Worksheet Wizard.6.6. 4.6.3.6. except the dialog titles are "Create Workbook" instead of "Create Worksheet. 4.3.1. The Workbook Wizard. NOTES: The sample dialogs in this section are for creating a new worksheet. Sort the data.6.3. Figure 4. It is used for selecting the data that you want on the new worksheet.6. Step 1. The dialogs for creating a new workbook are the same.3.6.3.3.3.6.6.6. Select conditions to apply to the data.6. This dialog is where you select the layout--table or cross tab--which you want to use to display the data on the new worksheet. 4. 4.2.4. 4.6. and then New Sheet to build a new worksheet.3. Click the radio button for the type of display for the new worksheet. Optional Steps: 4.2." Worksheet Wizard Step 1 of 10 Create/Open Workbook dialog appears.3. 4.2.3.3.6.2.6. Arrange the data on a table or cross tab layout.6.6. To create a new workbook or worksheet: 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3. Choose File. 4–56 .61.6. Chapter 4 4. Click Next. As you select each type.2. the corresponding description is displayed as well.3.6.6.1.6.3.2. Select calculations to apply to the data.2. Choose either of the following: Choose Sheet. Select the data that belongs on the worksheet or in the workbook.3.

To include data on the new worksheet. you move it from the Available column to the Selected column. The following describes the icons displayed in the window: Business area. Click the plus (+) sign next to a folder to see all of the items in it. Holds the items that you can select for your worksheets. You can select a specific budget code to add to the worksheet.62. The freeze code item is expanded to show the list of 4–57 . For example.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. click the drop-down arrow and choose from the list of business areas. Folders. Step 2. Items also have plus signs (+) next to them. This dialog box lists the data in the business area that you can use to build the new worksheet. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Select Items Wizard. indicating you can select values for those items as well. the Item Table item contains the item record data in the database. The following figure shows that the Item Table folder is expanded to show its items (such as freeze code and stock number). To select another business area for the new worksheet. Displays a business area created by the Discoverer Administrator.

Figure 4. Condition. indicating you can select values for those items as well. Min. The mathematical functions to aggregate the data. The icons that may appear in the expanded list are: Axis Item.4. Max.3. Numeric items also behave as Axis items on tables. Click the plus (+) sign next to a folder to see all of the items in it.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. such as summing the price of obligated due-outs for organizations. Axis Item Value. That is. and Min. axis items remain constant and have relatively few values. Aggregations. See Available Items. Max. Numeric Item. By 4–58 .3.6.6. The Database or Discoverer Administrator sets which aggregation is the default. such as the names of Exception Codes. The values of numeric items can change as you analyze the data. For example.6. Chapter 4 values that correspond to freeze code (Null. not for individual items.3. Represents numeric data. Q. you can count the number of text items. for text items such as Region. freeze code item contains the names of the various freeze codes in the database. and Detail. Freeze Codes. Others are grayed out. I. Folders containing items available for the current worksheet are active. Max. For numeric data. and S) and the ways to aggregate the data (Count. the typical aggregations are Count. The values of an axis item are shown as a list of values.63. Items may have plus signs next to them as well. Average. Count. One of the values of an axis item. you can find the Sum or Average of the numeric data with the aggregation. For example.5. 4. or find the highest or lowest (where A might be the highest and Z the lowest). The database administrator defines conditions for the folder. A filter for finding specific data. You can select a specific freeze code to add to the worksheet. 4. C. The aggregation in boldface type is the default. corresponds to the data in the body of a cross tab.6. Corresponds to a column on a table or a level on a cross tab. A.3. they are displayed as inactive. Shelf Life Codes. If a relationship does not exist between the two folders. Min). Select the business area from the drop-down menu at the top of the Available list. the typical aggregations are Sum.

select the specific data items to add to your worksheet. The Right Arrow (Add) button in the middle of the dialog becomes active.6. does not automatically include aggregate functions. ‘Ctrl-click’ to select items not adjacent to one another. ‘Shift-click’ on items to select multiple items. You can also drag the selected items from the Available list to the Selected list. results in all budget code values appearing on the worksheet. or click the Left Arrow (Remove) button. All values are automatically included as well. moves all the data within the folder to the list. Moving a numeric item to the Selected list automatically includes its default aggregation functions. ultimately. Depending on the items you select from multiple folders.8.6. You can select data at various levels in the Available list.3. To remove an item from the Selected list.3. moving the Budget Code item to the Selected list. 4. This means there are multiple ways of combining the items they contain and you select which method is used.6. 4.6. Similarly.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. to the worksheet. Selecting and moving an axis item. Figure 4.6.6. From the list of available data items. moving an item to the Selected list moves all values in it to the list and. The following example shows several items moved to the Selected list.3.3.6.3.7. For example. Those items are then the data items for the new worksheet. Click Right Arrow (Add) button to move the available items to the Selected list. For example: selecting a folder and moving it to the selected list. however. you are implicitly creating and activating the condition `Freeze Code' = <name>. Chapter 4 doing this. 4–59 . you may see a dialog that asks you to identify the manner in which the folders are joined.64. Example of Selected Items. 4. click it and drag it back to the Available list.

4.65. To edit a worksheet: 1. you can click Finish to create a new worksheet. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Click the Edit Sheet icon on the toolbar. 4–60 .6. At this point. shows the next (optional) page for adding other features to the new worksheet.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. or choose Sheet.6. 4.9. Editing a Worksheet.6. Join Folders Dialog Box.7. Open the worksheet you want to edit.3. and then Edit Sheet.3. 2. Clicking Next.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6.1. Chapter 4 Edit Sheet dialog appears. 4–61 .7.7.2. You can also delete items from a worksheet using the Table Layout tab or the Cross tab Layout tab.3.7.1. Add an item to current worksheet.7. except Table Layout tab becomes Cross tab Layout and the dialog does not include the Sort tab.1. Click the Left Arrow button. First tab on the Edit Sheet dialog is for adding or deleting items on a worksheet.1. Select the item in the selected list.6.2.6.7. Figure 4. Select the item in the Available list. depress the Delete key.4.6. 4.2.1. The layout shows the current arrangement of the items on the worksheet.6.7.6.66. For example.6. 4. and columns on a worksheet by editing the layout.7.1.7. Adding a new item to a worksheet inserts a column to the table or a row or column to a cross tab.1. 4.2.6. Open the worksheet that you want to edit. To delete an item from the current worksheet: 4. To add an item to the current worksheet: 4. A similar dialog appears for cross tab worksheets. 4.” you can add an item for the demand level. 4. The Figure above is for editing a tabular worksheet.1. To change a Worksheet’s Layout: 4. Adding and deleting items on a worksheet.1. To sort cross tab data. if the original worksheet did not contain the item “Demand Level.2.1.1. 4.2. and then Edit Sheet. Delete an Item from Current Worksheet.1.6. Click the plus (+) sign next to folders and items to see their contents.7.6. 4. 4.1.1.2.6. You can rearrange and pivot the page items.7.1. Click on the item.6. Click the Right Arrow button or drag the item to the Selected list.2.7.3.7. 4. 4.7.6. Click the Edit Sheet icon on the toolbar. and then Sort.1.2. Click the Table Layout tab or Cross tab Layout tab.2. Changing a worksheet’s layout. choose Tools. Edit Worksheet Dialog Box. axis items.1. or choose Sheet.

4. 4. A black line on the top/bottom/side of an adjacent item shows where the items will be located when you release the mouse button. To delete an item from the layout.2.67.7.7.6. select it and click the Delete key on the keyboard.5.7.2. 4. Chapter 4 Figure 4. 4.6. Drag the item to its new position on the layout.6.2.2.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Release the mouse button when the item is in its new position. 4. Select one of the items on the layout.6. 4–62 .7. Examples of Table and Cross Tab Layout.7.

Switching to another worksheet. uncheck Show Page Items.3.68. If the worksheet contains rows with duplicate data you can hide those rows by clicking the option. Tabs on the bottom of the workbook window show the various worksheets in the workbook. Chapter 4 Following examples on the Table layout show: Moving the Exception Code column to the right to become the second column on the worksheet Pivoting the ENC item from a column to become a Page Item. 4. Clicking a tab switches to the next worksheet.7.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. drag all items from that box to the report body. Hide Duplicate Rows. Figure 4. Examples of Rearranging Columns on a Table. To remove the Page Items box from the top of the worksheet. 4–63 .

IEX Options SNUD.2. Master SNUD is the active worksheet in the workbook. Discoverer searches the business area to find the data that belongs on the worksheet.6.6.1. IEE SNUD. Click Yes to open the worksheet. opening a worksheet for the first time takes a few moments while the search is completed.70. If you haven't opened it yet. NOTES: Key to Figure Click these tabs to switch to another sheet in the workbook.3. Click the appropriate tab at the bottom of the workbook window. and SNUD by IEX & Whse. SNUD by Whse. To switch to another worksheet: 4. This figure shows the worksheets named Master SNUD.3. Switch to Another Worksheet. A dialog box reminds you that the search will take place. 4–64 . Because each worksheet involves a query (search) of the business area. clicking the tab switches to it immediately.7. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Open a Worksheet. Figure 4.69.7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If you've already opened the worksheet. 4.

7.4.7. 4. It is important to note the author of a workbook is the only one who can “Save” changes to the workbook using its current name. If you haven't made changes to any worksheet in the workbook. Click Yes to save the changes. a dialog box reminds you to save the changes. Saving a workbook saves all of its changes. To save a workbook: Choose one of the following: Choose File. If the workbook contains any unsaved changes on any worksheet.4.4.1.4.71. 4. Saving a Workbook.6. 4. and then Save As.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. and then Save. choose File. click No to close the workbook without saving the changes. The changes are saved and the workbook remains open (author of the workbook only). it closes. and then Save. The dialog appears for saving a workbook under a new name. To close and save a workbook at the same time. Figure 4. Save Work Book Reminder. click Cancel to keep the workbook open without saving the changes. The changes are saved and the workbook remains open. it closes. Chapter 4 Discoverer then estimates the time involved for the search and gives you the option to open the worksheet.6. and then Close. Click OK to open the worksheet.7. To save the workbook under a different name: 4–65 .7.3.6. If you haven't made changes to any worksheet in the workbook. If the workbook contains any unsaved changes on any worksheet. a dialog reminds you to save the changes (author of the workbook only). To close and save a workbook at the same time. choose File. choose File.2. 4.6. To save the workbook under a new workbook name. Anyone other than the author can only “Save” changes made to the workbook using a different workbook name (“Save As”). Save a workbook under the same name: To save a workbook. choose File | Close.

Chapter 4 Choose File. Enter a new name for the workbook and click “Save”.5.6.7.72. Data in a workbook appears as the result of querying the database at a particular time. Delete Workbook from Database dialog box appears and lists the workbooks currently in the database. Refreshing often applies to databases receiving data from online transactions or other dynamic sources. Save Workbook to Database dialog box appears and lists the workbooks already saved to the database.5. Save Workbook to Database Dialog Box. and then Save As.7.6. Refreshing Data in a Workbook.6.6.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4. Discoverer displays the worksheet results based on the updated data.1. you re-query the database. 4. You should not delete a workbook unless you are certain you won't need it in the future.6. To delete a workbook: 4.1. 4–66 . 4. Choose File | Manage Workbooks | Delete. Deleting a Workbook.7.7. Deleting a workbook permanently removes it. Figure 4. and then Refresh Sheet. To refresh data in a worksheet: Choose Sheet. To refresh the data. Refreshing the data ensures that the information you are viewing is up-to-date.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. and then Duplicate as Cross tab). 4. etc. Duplicate the worksheet to create a new worksheet.1. A graph is a pictorial presentation of numeric data.7. bar. and then Duplicate as Table and Sheet. 4. are displayed as bars. Discoverer provides the Graph Wizard to help you create and edit graphs. About Worksheets and Graphs. and others.73. what kind of graph you want. 4.7. pie slices. Each Discoverer worksheet can have one graph. (using the options Sheet. and then click Delete.7. scatter graphs.6. and then create a graph for the new worksheet. and how the graph should look. Values from worksheets. A graph is also an analysis tool used to visually highlight relationships or trends. Terminology below appears in the Graph Wizard: 4–67 . If you already have a graph in a worksheet and want create a completely new graph. 4. pie. Types of graphs include area. lines. Graphing Terminology. A series of dialogs takes you through the processes of choosing the data you want to graph. Presenting Data on a Graph.6.2. you can either: First delete the existing graph. or data points. Chapter 4 Figure 4. and then create a new graph. line.2. Click the name of the workbook you want to delete. Delete Workbooks from Database Dialog Box.7.

in a stacked bar graph. a group is a subset of the displayed data. 4. Horizontal bars place more emphasis on comparisons and less emphasis on time. Line graph: A graph that shows trends or changes in data at even intervals. 4. Pie graph: A graph in which data is represented as sections of a circle. or sub-types. Markers of the same shape and color are referred to as a data series.7. Most graph subtypes have a three-dimensional effect that you can switch on and off as required (using the 3D-Effect check box). For example. the Area Graph has three sub-types: Area. The stacked subtype shows each value's relationship to a whole. The stacked subtype shows each value's relationship to a whole. however the data points are not connected by a line. For example. such as 3D-Cube and Surface.7.7.4. Marker. rather than standing vertically. or data points (in scatter graphs).7. To present your worksheet data visually in Discoverer.7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4. Even the individual slices of a pie chart can have labels.3.1. Both the X-axis and the Y-axis can have labels. if your bar graph shows count of stock numbers for a particular budget code. 4. and Pie Graph. A bar graph shows variation over a period or illustrates comparisons between values. A single bar represents each value.4. A pie graph shows the proportion of parts to a whole.4. areas (in area graphs). 4. 4. labels at the top of each bar would show the total count for each budget code. 4.4.7.6. Bar graph: A graph that compares values using vertical bars. Each graph type has one or more variations. Percent Area. which have two Y-axes. Area graph: A type of graph in which data is represented as a filled-in area. Choosing Best Type of Graph for Your Data. Data Markers can be bars (in bar graphs). Bar Graph.4. Line Graph. Horizontal Bar graph: Identical to a bar graph except that the bars lie horizontally. Graph Types Described. Chapter 4 Group. which are used to represent multi-dimensional data. Dual-Y graphs are useful for showing the following types of data: Data of different measures (such as Sales on the Y1-axis and Profit on the Y2-axis) Data of different scales (such as Region Sales on the Y1-axis and Percent of Total Sales on the Y2axis). Point graph: Similar to a line graph in that data is represented by points. NOTES: The 3D-Effect should not be confused with three-dimensional graphs.2. you can choose from 12 graph types: For example. A Marker is a graphical object that represents data values. Data is represented as a line that connects a series of data points. each stack of bars is a group. For example. generally Markers that are connected to each other or are aligned with each other. It is useful for 4–68 . slices (in pie graphs).4. lines (in line graphs).3.7.4. Labels are text attached to graph Markers. In a graph.7. making the circle look like a sliced pie. Some graphs also have dual-Y subtypes.4.5. and Stacked Area. Although similar to an area graph. a line graph emphasizes trends. 4. Label.

such as the high. you need to have the correct Worksheet configuration for the style of graph that you wish to use. The circular shape allows you to present cyclical data and is especially useful for showing directional data.4. a Y edge.4. such as the highest value. a wall. Each bubble is a value whose coordinates are specified by three numeric measures.7. To create meaningful graphs in Discoverer. 4.11. and a Z edge.7. Stock graphs are useful for comparing the prices of different stocks or the stock price of an individual stock over time. Scatter graph: A graph with points scattered over the plot area. The 3D Effect checkbox allows you to add depth to any graph type. 4. A bubble graph is useful for comparing three measures that have many values. and 3D Surface. 4.8.12.13. this graph type is not the same as one created using the 3D Effect checkbox. for example Quarter. that is.4. one row or one column of data at a time.4. Sales. When you create bubble graphs. Bubble graph: Bubble graphs add another measure to the points of a scatter graph because the size of the bubble is significant. The third measure determines the size of the bubble. All points are the same size.4. Note that a pie graph always displays only one data series. Stock graph: A graph in which each data Marker typically shows three values. Note. A scatter graph shows relationships between two measures. follow these guidelines: 4–69 .7.7. 3D graphs have a floor. where you can see an X edge.4. 4. and a background.4.7. This section contains advice on getting the best results when using graphs in Discoverer. and Profit. and closing stock price. 3D Cube. 3D graph: A true three-dimensional graph. Each point is a value whose coordinates are specified by two numeric measures.9. A bubble graph shows relationships between three measures. Creating bubble graphs. 3D Area. A scatter graph is useful for comparing two measures that both have many values.7. 4.10.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.7.7. Chapter 4 emphasizing a significant element. Polar graph: A circular scatter graph. low. for example Sales and Cost. 4. Notes on creating graphs. 4. These types of 3D graphs are useful for showing trends or to compare values. regardless of their value. There are four 3D graph subtypes: 3D Bar.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4.the bubble’s location on the Y-axis. 4. Figure 4. Z Item . Chapter 4 You need at least three Items. When you create high-low-close stock graphs. (which should be positive numbers).the bubble’s location on the X-axis.the size of the bubbles.7. Y Item. X Item. Creating stock charts.74. follow these guidelines: 4–70 .14. Example Data Configuration for a Bubble Graph.

and prices overlap.75. February and March). the data must be in multiples of three. 4. When you create graphs with dual-Y series. Series 1 is displayed on the Y1 axis. and so on. All subsequent series are displayed on the Y1 axis. Example Data Configuration for a High-Low Stock Chart. The series should be the name of the stock whose prices you show in the graph. (January. Figure 4. 4–71 . If a high-low stock graph contains more than one series of data.4. For example. some stock markers will obscure other stock markers. Series 2 is displayed on the Y2 axis.75. shows a worksheet configuration for charting a stock price over time. and Closing prices must appear on the same row or column series as groups of three. 3. 2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. such as three columns for period 1. High-low-close stock graphs usually have only one series of data. Chapter 4 You need at least three items in the following order: High price Low price Closing price Stock values for High. follow these guidelines: The dual-Y facility can be used with the following types of graph: Bar Line Area Dual-Y graphs require at least two series of data. To display data for more than one period.' Figure 4. By default. Low.7. three columns for period 2. Creating dual-Y charts.15. Worksheet data arranged 'Series by row. the series are displayed in the following way: 1.

simply click the Finish button. Choose a graph subtype (for example. If at any time you want to use your previous settings for the remaining steps.1.5.5. Figure 4. Each time you use the Graph Wizard..7. Graph Wizard: Graph Type. 4. To create a graph: 4.7. The Y2 axis represents Costs on the scale 0 to 50. the Y1 axis represents Sales on the scale 0 to 1 million. which Y-axis is used for each series. The Graph Wizard appears.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The corresponding graph subtypes appear in the Graph subtype box on the right side.76. From the Graph menu. Chapter 4 In Figure 4. Discoverer saves your settings for the next graph you create. bar or dual-Y bar). 4–72 .2. Figure 4. Choose the type of graph that you want by clicking an icon in the Graph type box on the left side.7. Creating a Graph.000.77.5.76. The Plot Area tab of the Graph Wizard can be used to change. Discoverer provides the Graph Wizard to help you create a graph of your worksheet data. choose New Graph. 4. Example Data Configuration for a Dual-Y Bar Graph.

6. null values are not represented in the graph. 4. Click a radio button to choose whether you want to graph a column or a row of data. If you are not creating a pie chart.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.78.7. Graph Wizard Titles.5. put a checkmark in the Show Title checkbox.7. both the individual data points and their totals. skip to step 7. The Pie Chart Options dialog appears. Note that a pie chart shows values as parts of a whole. Type the title you want in the text box. Answer the question. and Series. time. Totals Only to graph only the data in the Totals columns or rows of your worksheet.7. The Titles. click the 3D Effect checkbox to add depth to any graph type. Put a checkmark in the Show null values as zero checkbox if you want a Marker with a zero value for all null values. Click Next. or other worksheet information to the title.5. click the Insert drop-down menu and select the element you want to insert. Both Data and Totals to graph everything in your worksheet. If you want to add the date.4.5. If active. 4. Totals. "What would you like to display in your graph?" by clicking one of the radio buttons: Data Only to graph all the data point values of your worksheet but exclude any totals. and Layout dialog appears: Figure 4. Totals. so you can graph only one column or row at a time. 4.5.3. 4–73 .5. Otherwise.7. Click the Pie Chart Options button for additional controls. If you want a title on your graph. 4. Chapter 4 Description box at the bottom of the Graph Wizard describes the purpose of each graph type. Click the Font button to choose the font size and color for your title.

Axis. 4. skip to step 17. click the Show X-Axis Title checkbox. Click the one that you want to graph. Totals.5.7. the X-Axis dialog box appears. If you are creating a pie chart. Like the graph itself.8. and then click OK to return to the Titles. Type the title you want in the text box. the X-axis can also have its own title. 4. Click the Axis Title Font button to choose the font size and color for your X-axis title.80. If you are not creating a pie chart.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click Next. If you want to add a data item name to the title. Figure 4. Pie Chart Options.7. The Pie Chart Options dialog lists the columns or rows that you currently have in your worksheet. 4.5.79. Graph Wizard X .7. click the Insert drop-down menu and select the item that you want to insert. 4–74 . If you want a title on the Xaxis. Chapter 4 Figure 4. and Layout dialog.5.7.9.

If you want a thicker line to indicate the Y1-axis. 4. Click the Axis Label Font button to choose a font size and color for the axis labels. 4.7. Click the Next button. If you also want a label for the tick marks on the X-axis. If you are creating a dual-Y graph.11.13. If you want to add the name of the data item to the title. Repeat steps 12 through 16 for the second Y-axis.16.5. the Y1-axis can also have its own title. Revenues in Thousands from 0 to 60 in increments of 10. 4.7. and then type the scales that you want for your data. Type the title you want in the text box.5.14. Click the Axis Label Font button to choose a font size and color for labels.7. 4.7. Choose a color for the line from the Color palette.12. click the Insert drop-down menu and select the item that you want to insert. Figure 4. Do any of the following: 4–75 . for example.7. select the line thickness that you want from the Line thickness drop-down menu.5. Choose a color for the line from the Color palette.5. Or check the Logarithmic scale checkbox.18. the Y2-Axis dialog appears. if you want to choose your own scale.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Like the X-axis.10.7. uncheck the Set Automatically checkboxes. If you want a thicker line to indicate the X-axis.7.5.7.5. continue to step 18.5.81. click the Show Y1-Axis Title checkbox. However.5. select the line thickness that you want from the Line thickness drop-down menu. Chapter 4 4. Click the Axis Title Font button to choose the font size and color for your Y1-axis title. Click the Next button. 4. log 10) from the drop-down menu.15. Plot Area dialog appears. and then choose a Log base (example.5. If you want a title on the Y1axis. Otherwise. 4. click a radio button and select how often you want labels to appear. The Y-Axis dialog box appears. 4. Graph Wizard Y-Axis. Discoverer will automatically set the scale for your Y1-axis data by measuring the lowest and highest values.7.17. 4.

5.19. you can reposition the legend by dragging it with the cursor. NOTE: Once you have created your graph. Choose where you want to position the legend on the graph from the Location drop-down menu. Graph Wizard: Plot Area. Select a border color and background color from their color palettes. For a dual-Y graph. for series (rows or columns from your worksheet) that are displayed in your graph. 4–76 . To decide whether the label should appear on top of a marker or inside a marker (for example. Insert a checkmark to add text that pops-up whenever you hover the mouse over a data marker. 4. Click the Legend Font button to choose a font size and color for text that appears in your legend. To position the graph.20. Click the Next button. select which axis to use for each series. Insert a checkmark to add labels for data markers.7. After a short delay. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Select options. see Positioning Your Graph with Your Worksheet.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.82. click the Back button until you return to the dialog that you want. Click the color palette icon to choose a background color. The Legend dialog appears. 4.7. the graph appears. Graph Wizard: Legend.7. click the Finish button.21.5. If you want to show a legend on your graph. Click the Horizontal and Vertical gridlines checkboxes.83. click the Options button next to this selection. 4. on top of a bar or inside a bar). such as color. To change any of your choices. and then choose a line width and color for each. Click the Options button next to this selection to decide what text to display in the pop-up. When you are ready to create the graph. click the Show legend checkbox. Figure 4.5.

6. Also. Positioning the graph with your worksheet affects how they appear together on screen. Figure 4. Table 4. The Example area on the right shows you how your text will appear in your graph. 4.2.84. From the Graph menu. Title Font Dialog Box.7. and underlined styles. choose Display Graph. center. Positioning the graph does not affect the order that the worksheet and graph print.6. To position your graph: 4.7. Click any combination of Style buttons for bold.7. italic.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Select a color for your text from the Text color palette. You can call this dialog from the following Discoverer dialog boxes. Font Options dialog is used to set the font style for the various components of your graph.7.6.7. Select a font size from the Size drop down menu.7.1. Positioning Your Graph With Your Worksheet. DISCOVERER DIALOG BOX BUTTON OPTION USED TO CALL THE FONT DIALOG BOX Graph Wizard: Titles.3. or right.7. (see example screen shot of the Title Font dialog below). Totals.1. Chapter 4 4. & Title Font Layout Graph Wizard: X-Axis Axis Title Font Graph Wizard: X-Axis Axis Label Font Graph Wizard: Y1-Axis Axis Title Font Graph Wizard: Y1-Axis Axis Label Font To set font options: 4. 4. Choosing Font Options.) Click OK to return to the previous dialog. Font Options Dialog Box. 4. click one of the Alignment buttons to align your text to the left. From the Display Graph submenu. Select a font style from the Font drop-down menu.7. click one of the following: 4–77 .2. (Click the Actual font size checkbox to see how large the text will look on your graph.7.

colors. This chapter explains how to find and arrange the data that you want to analyze. you can use the Graph Toolbar to quickly make cosmetic changes to the look of your graphs without using the Graph Wizard. Click Fit to window if your graph is too large to fit completely inside its windowpanes without scroll bars.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.10. 4. you can change fonts. When working with graphs. Analyzing Data.10.1.1.8. Hide/Unhide Graph to display the graph or hide the graph. The Hide option does not delete the graph. Pivoting Data. or top axis.1. Topics include: Pivoting data Drilling into and out of the data's details Sorting data Adding calculations to data Totaling data Finding percentages 4. Right of Data to display the graph in a window that is connected to the right side of the worksheet window. Click Yes to delete the graph.7. the graph updates automatically. Any changes you make to the graph are also saved automatically when you save the worksheet. To delete your graph 4.7.8. Chapter 4 Separate Window to display the graph in a window that floats above the worksheet window. choose Delete Graph. 4. Using the Graph Toolbar.9. For example. 4. Discoverer saves the graph automatically for you as part of the worksheet. A warning message appears. 4. 4–78 .1.10. If the data in your worksheet changes. From the Graph menu. Deleting Your Graph. side axis.7. Left of Data to display the graph in a window that is connected to the left side of the worksheet window. Above Data to display the graph in a window that is connected to the top of the worksheet window.2.1.7. 4.7.3. You can move the graph window to any location on your screen by dragging it with the mouse.8. 4. and text alignment. Below Data to display the graph in a window that is connected to the bottom of the worksheet window.7. When you save a worksheet.7.7. you have even more control over the elements you can pivot. Pivoting organizes data by moving items from the main body of a table worksheet to the page axis. For example. you can move data items from the main body of the cross tab worksheet to the page axis.10. On a cross tab worksheet. Saving Your Graph. 4. The graph resizes so that it is completely visible inside its window.

represented by a black bar. To pivot an item on a table: 4.3. The Edit Sheet dialog appears with the Table Layout tab selected.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4.8.1. 4. and then switching data from the X-axis to the Y-axis. Drag the column to its new location. how the data is arranged is an important aid to analysis because it reveals data relationships that may not be apparent.1.1. and so on. Pivoting Items on a Table. track progress over weeks. In other words.4. One way to think about pivoting data is to visualize the data plotted on a graph.8. choose Sheet. Open the table with the data you want to pivot. or click the Layout icon on the toolbar. The layout shows the items on the table and their current positions on the table.1. 4.1. Unit of Issue column moves to the Page Axis.1. Click OK. and release the mouse button.1. and then Table Layout.1. Figure 4. 4–79 .1.8.2.8. Pivoting data on a table. spot trends when you see progressions.1.8.85. From the menu. The following example shows how to pivot the Unit of Issue column to the Page Axis. Chapter 4 Laying out data on a table or cross tab organizes it so you can easily compare results side by side.1. months and years. 4.

just as you do to move the columns on a table as shown above.8. 4. 4. putting the Unit of Issue on the Page axis means that only one Unit of Issue at a time appears on each page of the worksheet. In addition.1. 4–80 .8.1.8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. pivoting data from one axis to another creates a new set of data relationships.2.2. Figure 4.1.1. choose Sheet. The following example shows what the worksheet looks like before and after pivoting the Unit of Issue item to the page axis. Open the cross tab with the data you want to rearrange. 4.3. and then Cross tab Layout. the new arrangement can add levels of data to an axis. Figure 4.1. Page Item Drop-Down List.8.3. 4. if the data on the side axis is for Function Number. As you can see.3. The Edit Sheet dialog appears with the Cross tab Layout tab selected.2. To pivot an item on a cross tab: 4.87. Because the data relationships on a cross tab depend on the intersection of the axis items. Pivoting Data on a Cross-Tab. Chapter 4 The Unit of Issue column moves to the Page Axis on the Worksheet. Worksheets after Pivoting Data on a Table. For example.2.2. select a new one from the Unit of Issue drop-down list.1. To see the data from other Unit of Issues. as shown in the following figure. 4.1.8. pivoting the Reject Number data item to the side axis adds another level of data to that axis.1. Use the same drag-and-drop process to move a data item from one axis to another on a cross tab.86.8. From the menu.

easy way to present still more perspectives on the data. Select the item to pivot. or vice versa: 4. pivoting items on a cross tab provides you a powerful means to analyze the data.8. want to duplicate an existing table so that you can use the analytical properties offered by pivoting on a cross tab layout or vice versa. 4–81 . Another Example.1. Chapter 4 The example below shows a Cross-tab Worksheet and its Cross tab Layout arrangement.5. Cross Tab Worksheet & Layout.1. In the example below.1.1. top axis.8.4. Example Cross Tab Worksheet & Layout.1. 4. and side axis.8. represented by a black bar. for example.4.8. Open the worksheet that you want to duplicate.89.8. 4.1.8. As you can see. and release the mouse button. Duplicating Tables and Cross Tabs. 4.3.3. You can then make more direct comparisons between types of Rejects for each Function as they appear on the same axis. Drag the item to its new location.1. 4. You can pivot among the page axis.3.3.1.88. You might. Figure 4.4. To duplicate a cross tab as a table.4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Duplicating tables and cross tabs provides a quick. 4.1. Figure 4. Click OK. the Reject Number Item has been pivoted to the left-hand axis.

The drill icons are the small arrowheads next to the column headings. drill into data to analyze it at a finer level of detail.1.8. suppose you're analyzing data showing activity at a quarterly (3 months) level.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click the drill icon in the column or row with the data that you want to drill.2. Show Page Items--show/hide the page items box on the table or cross tab. such as yearly.4. 4. Drilling out of data consolidates the data for a broader overview. A drop-down menu appears for the item.4. Indicate which items you want to display in the new table or cross tab.3. If page items already exist for the worksheet.2. You can use drill icons to drill through data in several ways. For example. Arrange the columns and page items so the duplicated table or cross tab appears as you want it.1. you easily locate related information in a worksheet.1.1. The dialog box appears with the Table Layout tab or Cross Tab Layout tab selected depending on the duplication you're doing. the drop-down menu shows that you can drill down to the Store Names within the city or up to the Region in which the city is located. Chapter 4 4. 4.1.2.8.1. choose the level of data to which you want to drill up or down. if you want to analyze the data at a monthly level. 4–82 .8. To drill into or out of data.8.1.1. Discoverer disables this option and shows the page items portion of the worksheet.4.2. Drilling Into and Out of Data. and then Duplicate a Table or Sheet. For example. To see the data at a higher level.1. So. To drill into or out of data from the table or cross tab: 4. if you click the drill icon for City. you can drill into that level. Discoverer provides drill icons to quickly and easily drill up or down in a table or cross tab. and then Duplicate as Cross tab. Drilling into data shows more details about the data. Click OK. and drill out to get the larger picture.1.8.4.8. Any data item that permits drilling has a drill icon on the worksheet.1. From the drop-down menu. You can use the drill icon to drill up or down through the data structure.8.2.5. Similarly. 4. 4. From the menu choose Sheet. The dialog box for duplicating the table or cross tab appears. you can drill out of that information.1. 4.4.8. Drilling helps.2. 4.

To sort a single column of data on a table: 4.2. If you're drilling up. for example. However. For example. NOTE: Data on a worksheet is often organized in the hierarchical sequence. Discoverer finds the more detailed data specified by the drill and displays it on the worksheet. you would drill. or High to Low--Z to A or 10 to 1. simply select the level you want from the dropdown menu.8.1.2. In the example.8. sorting inventory data from most accurate to least accurate shows potential problem areas within an account. 4. UJC is sorted Lo to Hi. 4.1.1. Use the Sort dialog to select the data to sort and the sort order. Open the table with the data you want to sort. Chapter 4 To drill down. in some instances.3. you can sort the data from Low to High--which is A to Z or 1 to 10. 4–83 . Creating an ordered list of stock numbers. you might want drill into the data from Region directly to Store Name while skipping the drill to City.3.2.3.8.8. Typically. Collapsing drilled items. That is. you can collapse the levels back to their previous state. In the following example.2.8.2. select one of the levels below the current level. 4. you might want to drill to data out of that sequence.1. or product part numbers are typical uses of sorting. To collapse drilled data: 4. Select a value above the current value from the drop-down menu.90. This can also be thought of as skipping a hierarchical level. exception coded items. In either case. However. the primary sorted data is Urgency of Justification Code (UJC). which for text data is alphabetical from A to Z. which is sorted alphabetically.1. If you select a data item to which you have already drilled down. Figure 4. Example of Simple Table Sort. Discoverer consolidates the data into a more concise worksheet. In the example you would select Store Name. Sorting Data. you would select Region.8. To drill to another level out of sequence. Sorting arranges text data in alphabetical order and numeric data in numerical order. To drill back up. sorting is also helpful for analyzing data. 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Simple table sorting. from Region to City and then from City to Store Name.1.2. If you're drilling down. select one of the levels above the current level.

8. Lo to Hi--A to Z for text. Hi to Lo--Z to A for text.91.3. 4.8. choose Tools. Click the Group drop-down list and select an option for group sorting.7. and then Sort or click the sort icon on the tool bar.3. 1 to 10).8. 4. but not show the UJC column.1.1. but is not group sorted. the table on the top is group sorted by budget code (BC) so the BC only appears at the first stock number where the BC changes.3. For example..1. you could designate a sort order by UJC.g. Group sorting displays each data value at the top row of a group.1. See the section. The item is added to the column. increasing for numbers (e.1.g.5. “Group Sorting” for details. The table on the bottom is also sorted by BC.3.. decreasing for numbers (e.3. 4–84 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. It shows the sorting options currently selected for the table.4.1.6. 4. the BC appears next to each row of data.2. Sort Dialog Box. The data is sorted on the table.8. 4.3. Sort Table dialog box appears.3. Group Sorting.3.8. Click OK. 4. Click the Hidden box to hide the data item being used for sorting. Click the Directions drop-down list and select the sort order. 10 to 1).8.8. 4. From the menu. In the following figure. In this case. Click the Add button and choose the data item from the drop-down list that you want to use for sorting the data. Chapter 4 4.2. Figure 4.

From the menu. The item is added to the column.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3.3. the ERRCDs) so the percentages can be displayed properly. choose Tools.1. 4.8. Sort Table dialog box appears.2.3. If you do not want to sort by that data item. the percentage of stock numbers in each account with a particular ERRCD). Group sorting is also pertinent when finding percentages.1. In the following example. To sort data by groups: 4.3. click its column handle and click Delete.g. One key reason to sort data by groups is to find subtotals for groups of numerical data. See section “Creating a New Total” for steps to add subtotals and totals to data sorted by groups.3.8.2. See the section “Creating a New Percentage” for more information. 4. When you specify percentages for numbers (for example. You can also sort data within the groups. but not on cross tab worksheets. and the routing identifier is the data item to be sorted with each BC..1. 4.1. click the Add button again and add another data item. Example of Group Sorting.1.2. the budget code (BC) is the group. 4–85 .92. It shows the sorting options currently selected for the table. Chapter 4 Figure 4.3.1. Open the table with the data you want to sort. and then Sort or click the sort icon on the tool bar.2. NOTE: Data can be group sorted on table worksheets.2.2.8.4. Click the Add button and choose the data item from the drop-down list that you want to use for sorting the data. To add a data item to be sorted within the Group. 4. the data is automatically group sorted for that section of data (e.8.8.

click the column's Handle (just to the right of the column number) to select it.1. sorting cross tab data is somewhat different from sorting tabular data. you normally want to maintain those data relationships while rearranging the data. Page Break--data is sorted within each group. sort data on the top axis relative to a specific row on the left axis. Similarly. Usually the last data item in a group sorting has the None option selected.8.93. The group name appears once at the beginning of the grouped data. If you move a column without group sorting above a column with group sorting. In particular.8. if you move a column with group sorting below a column without group sorting. Sort Dialog Box. the column on top is automatically set to group sort. None--data in the column is not grouped and is all sorted as a unit. Or.3. and so on. 4. To move a column up or down on the list.2.7.8. From the drop-down list in the Group column select a group sorting option.5. Columns with Group Sort selected always precede those with no group sorting (Group="None") to assure that the sorting is done correctly on the table. 4. 4. The data is sorted on the table. The way to maintain the data relationships is to sort data on the left axis relative to a specific column on the top axis. Because the location of data on a cross tab determines the relationship of one data item to another.1. 4. Select the Direction options for each column. Order of the columns on the Sort dialog is important because it affects how you can compare the data quickly based on the sorting.3.6.1.3.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. third. second.3. Group Sort--data is sorted within each group.4.8. Chapter 4 Figure 4. You can move the columns up and down to put them in the order that you want on the dialog box.2.3.2. The sort direction does not have to be the same for each column. Sorting Data on Cross Tabs. The 4–86 . the column you're moving is automatically set to group sort. Click OK. The group name appears once at the beginning of each new page.8. About the sort order. The order of the columns determines which data is sorted first. The pointer becomes an up/down arrow indicating you can move the selected column up or down in the order. 4.

1.95. NOTES: Data on a cross tab layout is already sorted by default.5.8.3. The following example illustrates a cross tab sorted by Function Number (Z-A order) within TRIC Code (A-Z order). but you can reverse the sort order.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–87 . Text items are automatically sorted alphabetically from A-Z and numbers are sorted from lowest to highest. Chapter 4 Sort Cross tab dialog automatically sorts the data in that manner and maintains the data relationships. and then Sort.8. Open the cross tab with the data you want to sort.5. Figure 4. 4.8. 4. To sort data on a cross tab: 4. 4. choose Tools.3. The Sort Cross Tab dialog offers a full range of options for sorting Cross Tab worksheets. Figure 4.94. The Sort Cross tab dialog appears.3.5.8.3.2. From the menu. Example of Cross Tab Sort. Select the location on the cross tab of the items you want to use to sort the data.3. Cross Tab Sort Dialog Box.5. Sorting cross tabs on the Sort Cross Tab dialog box.

4.4. it makes sense to sort the City item by the Profit data point because each City has a Profit amount associated with it. if two cities had exactly the same amount of profit.3." which doesn't make logical sense. If you want to change the sort order. however.9. Added data points must always be the first item for sorting.8.3.8. Click the Direction drop-down list and select the sort direction. The list includes the items for either the top axis or side axis depending on the selected sort location (above the data or along the left side). Calculating Data. In the example.8.3. it does not make sense to sort Profit by City because each profit value has only one city associated with it.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.8. 4. select one of the data items and click Move Up or Move Down. Repeat the process to add other sorting to the data. Along left side of data--shows the data items on the left axis. Adding a data point. the data on the top axis or left axis is reordered relative to the column or row you used for sorting.3. 4.5. It would be like trying to sort the profit amounts by "New York" or "Phoenix.7.8.6.8.5. but sorting data points by items does not. 4. 4. This is because sorting items by data points makes logical sense. Calculations can play an important part when analyzing data. This is useful with duplicate data points. Click the Column/Row drop-down list and select the specific column or row in the cross tab to use for sorting. Chapter 4 Above the data--shows the data items on the top axis.6.8. Discoverer has a full range of common mathematical functions and operators to calculate results on your worksheets.5. Click the drop-down list of Item to sort and select the data item. Click OK. or the calculations can be part of other calculations.5. The data is sorted on the cross tab.4. Adding a data point to a cross tab sorting enables you to sort the data in some other arrangement. To illustrate this concept. 4.3. 4. NOTE: After sorting a cross tab.3.8.5. Discoverer displays the results of calculations as new columns on a worksheet. The Row drop-down list identifies the row that contains the data for sorting when sorting is based on data from the top of the cross tab. 4–88 . You can add the data point two or more times.3. Column drop-down list identifies the column that contains the data for sorting when sorting is based on data from the left side of the cross tab.8. This type of "sorting within sorting" on a cross tab is helpful for text or other data likely to have duplicate values.5. 4. For financial data or other variable numeric items. you could specify how to sort those two duplicated pieces of data (low to high or high to low). sorting within sorting is usually not necessary. However.5.

You can type a formula directly into the Calculation box.97. Not all calculations need to use Items or Functions as part of the calculation formula.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The answer appears in a new column with a name you type on the New Calculation dialog.4.8. Example: Calculate the extended price of a requisition. Display of Calculated Item. Quantity Due-In to produce the Extended Price. Creating and Editing Calculations.1. Figure 4.96. Following figure shows the results of applying the calculation. Figure 4. 4. Chapter 4 Below is an example of a simple calculation. This example uses the Item Table Unit Price item and multiplies it by the Due-In Table. In this example. it is Extended Price. Example of Edit Calculation Dialog Box. You use the Calculations dialog to create calcula- 4–89 .

4. 4.8.4. 4.4.1. functions.1.1. To create or edit a calculation: 4. Figure 4.8.1.1. Available Items--Lists all the items available for the worksheet even if the items are not currently used on the worksheet.4.3.8. The New or Edit Calculation dialog appears.1.1.4. 4. open to the Calculations tab.1. operators.98.6. 4.1. Chapter 4 tions. Continue to add items. Choose Tools. 4. Selected Items--Lists the items in the worksheet.5.8. This dialog shows calculations already created for the worksheet. + or -) button to add mathematical operations to the Calculation text box.4.1. Type a name for the calculation in the box at the top of the dialog.1.4. and then Calculations.1.4. Click the Show drop-down list to see the different expressions. Open the worksheet on which you want to apply the calculation.1. Parameters--Lists the parameters defined for the worksheet. The item or function moves to the Calculation text box.1.8. 4. Click each part of the expression that you want to add to the calculation and click Paste. 4–90 .8.7.1.8. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears.1.8. Calculations--Lists the calculations defined for the worksheet in case you want to use an existing calculation as part of your new calculation.4. 4.8. 4. Click the operator (for example.8.2. This name appears on the worksheet as the column header of the calculation results column.1. and so forth until you complete your calculation expression.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. this is helpful because you don't have to remember the name of an item in order to include it in a formula.4. Check marked calculations are active and apply to the worksheet.1.1. Edit Worksheet Dialog Box. You can also drag from the box on the left to the Calculation text box. Functions--Lists a wide range of mathematical functions that you can apply to the formula. Click New or Edit.

1. you often need to see various summations of the data.8.1.11. and so on.5.1.1. From the menu.8. In the example below.5. Displaying existing totals.8.8. compute subtotals and grand totals. Totals can sum rows and columns of numbers.1.1. make sure it has a checkmark in the box next to its name.4. When working with numeric information.99. Open the worksheet to which you want to add a total. 4. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears with the Totals tab selected.10. The list of totals shows all currently defined totals. 4–91 .4.8.9.2. choose Tools. find averages and standard deviation.1. 4. and then Totals. 4. Click OK. Click OK to save the expression. Example of Totaled Data. You can define totals for a worksheet and then display them on the worksheet or not. When you add a Total to a worksheet. Discoverer automatically adds a column or row to the worksheet for the totals data. 4.1. Totaling Numeric Data. To apply the calculation to your worksheet. Chapter 4 4. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears and displays the name of the calculation you just created or edited.4.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. the Worksheet contains a sub-total for each DIFM Status Code and a grand total for all DIFM items.5.8. 4. Figure 4. To display totals or sub-totals on a table or cross tab: 4.1.8.

Open the worksheet to which you want to add a total definition.4. 4–92 . Totals Tab. From the menu. choose Tools. Click OK.1.5.5.3. 4.3. 4.1.5. Click the checkmark box (es) to remove the checkmark.5. From the menu.2.5.8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.8. The New Total dialog appears. The Totals dialog appears. Discoverer now computes the totals and displays them in the table or cross tab.3.5.1. 4.5.6.2. 4. To remove totals from the data: 4.2.5.5. Creating a New Total.2.8.8.5.8.1. Chapter 4 Figure 4. 4. 4. and then Totals.1.5. choose Tools.5.2. and then Totals. Click the New button.2. To create a new totals definition: 4.2.4.100.8.4. 4.8.1. Edit Worksheet.8. 4.8.8. Click the box in front of the Total definition so that a checkmark appears. Create a label for the totals column or row.8.5. Select the totals to calculate. 4.2.5.8. The Edit Sheet dialog appears with the Totals tab selected. Creating a new totals definition has three steps: 4.7. Discoverer removes the totals from the table or cross tab.4. Select the type of total and where to place it in the table or cross tab.2.1.8.2. 4.4. Click OK.

8.2. You can also create totals for all the data points on the worksheet by selecting All Data Points from the drop-down list.4.8. Average Distinct--Adds all the unique values and divides by that number of values. Due In From Maintenance Location. Click the data point drop-down list and select the data point to use for totaling data. Average--Adds all the values and divides by the number of values.5. 5. and 4–93 . if a set of values includes 3. Click the drop-down list for the kind of total you want and select the calculation to use for totaling data. For example. 4.4. Duplicated values are not included.101.4.5.5. 4.2. New Total Dialog Box. Chapter 4 Figure 4. 3. for example. 4. The options are: Sum--Adds all the values.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 6. 5.

For example. For example. in the example)--displays totals for the selected set of data points. Variance Distinct--Calculates the variance. if you sort the data by DIFM Status Code. and then finds the percentage of the current column or row of the Grand Total. Grand total at bottom--Calculates the Grand Total for a column and places it after the last row of the table or cross tab.2. Grand total on right (cross tab only)--Calculates the Grand Total for a row and displays it in a column on the right side of the cross tab. A specific numeric data point (such as Price. unduplicated values. For example. 3. Chapter 4 7. if you select 4–94 . Region is a set of data points but summing Region by its data points doesn't make sense--it would be like trying to add "Central" to "East". The duplicate values of 3 and 5 are not included. Percentage of Grand--Calculates the Grand Total of the row or column. Minimum--Finds the lowest value. Then. unduplicated values. but only using unique.4. Maximum--Finds the highest value. 4. but only using unique. unduplicated values.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. A non-numeric data point (such as DIFM Status Code. Percentage of Grand Distinct--Calculates the percentage of the Grand Total of the row or column. if the table contains two columns of numeric data set to be group sorted. select DIFM Status Code as the data item.8. Sum Distinct--Adds the values. Subtotal at each change in--click the drop-down arrow to select the data item to use for the totals. Count--Counts the total number of values.6. the calculation of the distinct average is 3+4+5+6+7 divided by 5. Standard Deviation Distinct--Calculates the standard deviation. the sum distinct of 3. Variance is the sum of the squares of the differences between each value and the arithmetic mean.5. all divided by the number of values. Variance--Calculates the variance. the options for the totals in the first drop-down list are limited to only those options that apply to non-numeric data points. but only using unique. Standard Deviation--Calculates the standard deviation. and want to see number of details by DIFM Status Code. Discoverer automatically displays the total count for each status code on a separate line. The duplicate value of 3 is not included. unduplicated values. In this case. For example. Count Distinct--Counts the number of unique values. but only using unique. Standard deviation is the square root of the variance of the values. in the example)--when you select a non-numeric set of data points. 5 is 3+4+5=12. Select where you want the total to be shown. All Group Sorted Items--displays totals for items set to be group sorted. Regions are not summed even if it is a group-sorted item. 4. subtotals are displayed for both columns. Inappropriate data points for the type of total are not displayed. For example.

5. The Edit Sheet dialog appears with the Totals tab selected. For example.4. 4. 4.5.10. In the actual labels in the table or cross tab. labels for both item names appear in the data or cross tab.5.5.5. click in the label text in the dialog and edit it as you would regular text. Click OK.1.2. 4. do not display a subtotal for it (the row's data value and subtotal are the same).2. The only totals that make sense for non-numeric data points are Count. and appropriate names from the table or cross tab will be inserted in place of the words "Item" or "Value.3.2. 4. sum of a status code does not make sense. You can click the drop-down list for labels and choose additional options for the title from it. Click the Edit button. 4.5. Make the changes you want.4.5.1. 4. Don't display subtotal for a single row--If the group of data consists of a single row.1.8. 4.4.3.8.8.8. Examples.3. 4. Select the definition you want to edit in the Totals dialog.3.11.1.3.9.4. the ampersand (&) will not appear.5.2.1.8.5. To remove options from the labels. Chapter 4 DIFM Status Code. Click one of the options for the current page or all the pages of the worksheet.4.8.2. 4. Click the option to generate the label automatically if you want Discoverer to generate a label based on the data items being totaled.8.6.4.5.1. Count Distinct. and you select Insert Item Name (&Name). This table shows some examples. To edit a totals definition: 4.2. when totaling two items. Open the worksheet with the Total you want to edit.4. choose Tools.3.3. Table 4.4.8.7. The totals definition is now edited.4.8.5.3. 4.2. the labels can appear for each appropriate name. From the menu. OPTION EXAMPLE Insert Item Name Total Count of &Item SAMPLE LABEL Total Count of Stock Number Total Float Price Insert Data Point Total Float &Data Name Insert Value Number of DIFM Items Number of DIFM Items with Status Code with Status Code AWPl &Value 4.2.10. 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–95 ." 4.10. If the total calculates for all data points (as selected at the top of the dialog).5.2.5.8. The options from the drop-down list produce labels that can change as the data changes by adding text codes (such as "&Item" and "&Value") to the label. The Total dialog appears.1.8. and then Totals.3.5.8.8.8. Click OK when you're finished creating the Total. Editing a totals definition.8.1.5. Maximum. 4.1.5. and Minimum.8.

1.1. Figure 4.6. and so on).8. It shows the percentages already defined for the worksheet. you specify the data to use to calculate a percentage as well as the value to use to represent the percentage (Grand Total. Due to rounding of data. From the menu.6.8. percentages might not add exactly to 100.1. In the following example.8. Chapter 4 4. Finding Percentages. Displaying existing percentages.102. Example of Using Percentages. To display percentages on a worksheet: 4.1. 2. 4. choose Tools.1. and then Percentages.6.1. Many percentage definitions may be defined and then displayed on the worksheet.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.8. Subtotal. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears with the Percentages tab selected.6. 4–96 . 4. NOTES: 1. Using the Percentages feature. Line Item Percent shows the percentage of line items at each base (SRAN) for each SRAN as a percentage of total line items in the Air Force inventory. You can also display percentages of subtotals and grand totals. Calculating percentages of numbers is a typical data analysis task.

The dialog for a new definition appears.1. 4. Edit Worksheet.6.1.8. Chapter 4 Figure 4.6.6. and then Percentages. 4.8. The dialog for a table worksheet is similar.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.8.6. The Percentages dialog appears. From the menu.8.2. Click the New button. 4. Create a label for the percentage column.5. From the menu.6.2. Creating a new percentage. choose Tools. 4.1.1.2. 4. Discoverer now computes the percentages and displays them on the worksheet. choose Tools.1.1.1.8.6.3. 4.2. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears with the Percentages tab selected.1.2. Choose to calculate the percentage of a total or of subtotals. Click the checkmark box (es) to remove the checkmark.103. To remove the percentages from the worksheet: 4.8.1. Click the box in front of a percentage definition so a checkmark appears.6.6. To create a new percentage definition: 4. 4–97 . Creating a new percentage definition has three basic steps: Select the data item for calculating the percentage.1.8. The following example is for creating a new percentage for a cross tab worksheet.4. Click OK.6.1. and then Percentages. Click OK to remove the percentages from the worksheet.8. Percentages Dialog Box.

2. 4.6.6.5.8. Options.8.3. 4. 4. if you select to calculate percentages for subtotals at 4–98 . Select one of the options to calculate a percentage.1.6.2.5. Calculates the percentage and places it at each new value for the selected item.6. 4. On the right side of the dialog. Calculates the percentage of the Grand Total for each column. Select to display the percentages for all page items. Click in the box for the name of the percentage definition and type a name for it. or only for the current page items. The following table lists your choices: Table 4.2. For example.2. This option is usually used for data sorted as groups and you want to see the percentage amount for each group rather than for each individual item.6.8.6.6.2. OPTION Grand total of all values Grand total for each column (cross tab only) Grand total for each row (cross tab only) Subtotal at each change in DESCRIPTION Calculates the percentage of the Grand Total for all the columns and rows. 4.8.2.104.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Select the item from the drop-down menu where you want the percentage to be displayed when the value changes.6. Select the data item from the list.2. Edit Percentage Dialog Box. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Click the drop-down list to see the list of data points to use to calculate percentages. 4. The illustration on the right side of the dialog shows a representative worksheet containing percentage columns based on your selections.8. select whether to display the total amount as well as the percentage.4.6. Calculates the percentage of the Grand Total for each row.8.

Click OK to display the new percentage to the worksheet. 4. and then Percentages.2.105.6. and appropriate names from the table or cross tab will be inserted in place of the words "Item" or" Value.2. Click the Edit button.8.6.6.8. choose Tools. 4.8.3.6. Table 4.6. and subtotals as a percentage of the Grand Total 4. Percentage Label Dialog. The Edit Percentage dialog appears. Editing an existing percentage.6.3. In the actual labels in the table or cross tab. Select the definition you want to edit.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. OPTION Insert Item Name SAMPLE LABEL(S) Percent of MICAP conditions with Cause Code Number of &Data Number of Cause Code Count Total Occurrences for Cause Total Occurrences for Code &Value Cause Code A EXAMPLE Percent of MICAP conditions with &Item Insert Data Point Name Insert Value To remove options from the labels. 4.8.8. From the menu. The Edit Worksheet dialog appears with the Percentages tab selected. Type labels for the percentages. To edit a percentage definition: 4. you can also select to display the subtotals and their percentages." The table below shows some examples.3.3. Options from the drop-down menu produce labels that can change as the data changes by adding text codes such as "&Item" and "&Value" where you insert them in the label text.3.1. Chapter 4 each change in the ERRCD data item. click in the label text in the dialog and edit it as you would regular text. Examples. 4–99 . or click the drop-down lists for labels and choose additional options. Click OK to return to the Percentages dialog with the new definition. Figure 4.6.3. the ampersand (&) will not appear.

9. Click OK. Open the worksheet that you want to print.4. Sharing Results With Others.3. Make sure it contains the combination of Page Items that you want. Make the changes you want. Select which worksheets you want to print: 4–100 . note that you can print exactly what you see on screen. graph titles and legends.9. exporting data to another format (such as an Excel spreadsheet). With the help of the Print Wizard. If what you see on screen is too large to fit onto a single sheet of paper. Discoverer provides the Print Wizard to help you print your worksheets and graphs. and all graphs associated with any worksheet.9. including worksheet titles. You can print the graph the same size that you see on screen or scale the graph to fill the entire sheet of paper or any smaller size. The percentage definition is now edited.2. Before printing. verify that your graph contains the data that you want to print. Worksheets and their graphs print sequentially so that each graph prints in order immediately after its worksheet.9.9. To print other combinations of Page Items. 4. Make sure it contains the combination of Page Items that you want. Open the worksheet that you want to print.1.8.1. 4.1. You can print a single worksheet. Step 1. the Print Wizard automatically scales the graph to the correct size.6.106. Select Objects. 4. and then Print. all worksheets in a workbook. Figure 4. The Print Wizard dialog appears. or specifically sharing workbooks with other people who also have access to Oracle Reports database. choose File. You can share results with others by printing your worksheets and graphs. 4. To print worksheets and their graphs: 4.8. and page items. Print Wizard.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 4. first pivot the Page Items.1. Also note that pivoting Page Items changes the content of your graph.3. what you see on screen prints out the same way on paper. Graphs always print on a single sheet of paper.3. within the boundaries of that sheet of paper you can choose to print the graph at different sizes.5. then print your modified worksheet. From the menu.6. If your worksheet contains Page Items. 4. However. Printing Worksheets and Graphs.

this checkbox scales the graph smaller without distorting the graph. e. If you do not want to restrict your printout. "SRAN = 2823. the Print Wizard takes you to the final dialog. Chapter 4 Current worksheet--prints the currently open worksheet.9. 4.9. Select the other graph elements that you want to print: Print worksheet title with the graph--A graph and its worksheet can have different titles. 2823.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–101 .1.4. this page may ask you to enter a SRAN or choose from a list of SRANs. Print Wizard. All worksheets--prints all worksheets in the workbook. Step 2. Preserve the actual font size--If the graph must be scaled to fit a piece of paper. 2804. Click Next. Otherwise.g. Select whether you want to print the graph and its worksheet.6. this checkbox prints the Page Item values onto the paper. only the worksheet. Select the size that you want to print your graph: Preserve the ratio of height and width--If what you see on screen is larger than a piece of paper. Skip to step 6. close the Print Wizard.9. choose Tools\Parameters. 4.1. For example.1. If you have defined parameters for the worksheet. this checkbox prevents the fonts from also becoming smaller.1. Print page item values with the graph--If your worksheet contains Page Items. if a parameter is created on SRAN. for example. If you choose to print only the worksheet. or 3300. Click Next. the second Print Wizard dialog appears. Define Graph Details. This checkbox prints the worksheet's title onto the paper.7. Figure 4. and turn off any parameters by de-selecting the Parameter check boxes. the optional Print Parameter Page allows you to restrict your printout to certain Items. without any graphs. 4." 4.107.9.5. or only the graph.

you can choose a printer. The Print dialog belonging to your computer's operating system appears. Then.108.109. and the number of copies that you want.1.8. choose File. Step 2. Select whether or not you want to supervise the printing process. 4. Supervise. paper size. In the Print dialog.1. Figure 4. NOTE: To print other combinations of Page Items on the worksheet.9. Step 3. You can print the slower worksheets later. Click OK to print your worksheets and graphs. and then Print again. Unsupervised--select this option to ignore any alert message while printing.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. first pivot the Page Items. Supervised--select this option if you want to see these alert messages while printing. Edit Parameter Values. from the menu. Print Wizard. Discoverer may occasionally give you alert messages to let you know that queries take a long time or that the database returns more data than the maximum set in the Options dialog's Query Governor tab. NOTE: If any worksheets contain parameters. Click Finish. Chapter 4 Figure 4.click this checkbox if you expect that some of the worksheets will take a long time to print and you don't want to wait. Discoverer will still ask you to choose values for the parameters whether you choose Supervised or Unsupervised. 4.9. Repeat the printing process for each combination of 4–102 . The Print Wizard prints the rest of the worksheets.9. Skip sheets with long running queries-. Print Wizard.

Step 1.9.9. but depending on the type of format you choose.1. such as calculations and conditions. Also. 4. what you see on screen appears as similar as possible in other applications. and all graphs associated with any worksheets. note that pivoting Page Items changes the content of your graph. To export other combinations of Page Items.9. Before printing.2. Discoverer also provides shortcuts from the Toolbar and File menu to quickly export to Excel and HTML. Open the worksheet that you want to export. exporting does not export Discoverer features. because these two formats are so popular in the business world.2. one file for each worksheet in a workbook.2. first pivot the Page Items and then export your modified worksheet. Export Wizard. Before exporting. note that you can export exactly what you see on screen.110. If your worksheet contains Page Items. and one file for each graph. Exporting Data to Other Application Formats.1. 4. Worksheets and their graphs export as separate files. In fact. With the help of the Export Wizard. From the menu. To export to other applications: 4. an image file format that is common on the Web and supported by many applications. Chapter 4 Page Items.1. Select which worksheets you want to export: 4–103 . You can also choose to export graphs at different sizes. However. choose File. 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. Pivoting Page Items changes the content of your graph so that your worksheet and your graph match. Figure 4. the exported worksheet may also contain its formatting and layout.1. all worksheets in a workbook.9.2. Exporting a worksheet exports its data. look at your graph to verify that it contains the data that you want to export. You can view the exported data in another application. and then Export to start the Export Wizard. verify your graph contains the data that you want to print. Select Objects.3. 4. You can export the graph the same size that you see on screen or scale the graph larger or smaller. You can export a single worksheet. Discoverer provides the Export Wizard to help you share your worksheets and graphs with other people by exporting them to popular application formats.2. Note that the Export Wizard always exports graphs as GIF files.9. but you cannot apply Discoverer features to it in that application.1. such as Microsoft Excel or HTML.

click the Browse button to browse to the location that you want.7.2. You can choose from many popular data formats. Click Next to move to page two of the Export Wizard. Tab Delimited Text (*. Table/Cross tab only--exports the data. Export Wizard.1.txt).5.9. Select the size that you want to export your graph and font: 4–104 .1.2. Both Graph and Table/Cross tab--exports the data and the graph. Hyper-Text Markup Language (*. Export Wizard. 4.111. 4. Step 3. 4.1. Type the path to the location on your hard drive (or network drive) where you want to save this exported file. All worksheets--exports all worksheets in the workbook. Select an export format from the pull down list.9.1.9.1.2. Figure 4. such as Microsoft Excel Spreadsheet (*. 4.2.2. Click Next to move to page three of the Export Wizard. 4.9. Step 2. Graph only--exports the graph. Define File Details. Chapter 4 Current worksheet--exports the currently open worksheet. 4.1.9.htm).112. and others.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.xls).2. If you are unsure of the correct path.4. Figure 4.9. Choose what you want to export.6.9.8. Define Graph Details.

for example. OR if you specify the width for your graph. If the worksheet defined parameters for the worksheet. Supervised--select this option if you want to see these alert messages while exporting. 4.10. automatically set the width. this checkbox prevents the fonts from changing size. the optional Choose Parameter Page allows you to restrict the data in the worksheet according to values that you enter. Click the drop-down menus and select the values for the worksheet's parameters. Click Finish on the Export Wizard dialog box. 4. If you are exporting the whole workbook. Chapter 4 Current on-screen size--exports the graph the same size that you see on screen. Discoverer may occasionally give you alert messages to let you know that queries take a long time or that the database returns more data than the maximum set in the Options dialog's Query Governor tab.1. If the worksheet has parameters defined for it. Export Wizard. The Export Wizard exports the rest of the worksheets.13. 4.9. Preserve the onscreen font size. Height 400 pixels and Width 600 pixels.2.12.11. If you resize the graph on screen first. Type exact pixel dimensions for height and width. If you specify the exact height and width in pixels for your graph. this dialog appears for each worksheet. NOTE: If the worksheets contain parameters. this selection exports the current onscreen size. the following dialog box appears.1.2.2.9. automatically set the height.1. You can also add a checkmark to the checkbox Skip sheets with long running queries if you expect that some of the worksheets will take a long time to export and you don't want to wait. Step 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4.2. Click Next to move to the next page of the Export Wizard. Unsupervised--select this option to ignore any alert messages while exporting. Discoverer will still ask you to choose values for the parameters whether you choose Supervised or Unsupervised. Click Finish.113. Specify--exports the graph larger or smaller than what you see on screen. Parameter Values. Figure 4. Preserve the ratio of height and width--if you specify the height for your graph. 4–105 .1.9. You can export the slower worksheets later. Select whether or not you want to supervise the export process.9.

9. (or click the icon on the toolbar). 4. in Microsoft Excel or in your Web browser). choose File. 4. Progress messages appear to let you know how the export process is proceeding. Click OK. 4–106 . Chapter 4 Worksheets are saved in the new format in the directory you specified.9. first pivot the Page Items.9.2. Before exporting. Then from the menu. choose File.3.3. Excel and HTML tools on the tool bar help you quickly export Discoverer worksheets to Microsoft Excel format and HTML format. Open the worksheet that you want to export to Microsoft Excel.1. click the checkbox.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. and then Export again.1. look at your graph to verify that it contains the data that you want.2. Exporting to Microsoft Excel and HTML Formats.1.2. Make sure that it contains the combination of Page Items that you want.9. Do one of the following: To view the newly exported worksheets in their new format (for example.14. Export Log. Repeat the export process for each combination of Page Items. Figure 4.114. NOTE: To export other combinations of Page Items on a worksheet. Open the first exported sheet.15. From the menu. The Export Log then appears so you can check that all worksheets were exported successfully. 4. and then Export to Excel. 4. 4. Also note that pivoting Page Items changes the content of your graph.9.3.

Your worksheet is saved to your default file location (for example.4. Select one of the options: Open this file from its current location. You can share workbooks with other people two ways: 4–107 . 4.5. Sharing a workbook allows other people to view. 4. To quickly save as HTML: 4. From the menu.9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. You can save the worksheet on your local hard disk as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (*.9. choose File. Click OK.9. Save this file to disk.xls).3. analyze. 4. (or click the icon on the toolbar). Chapter 4 Depending on the browser you are using.9.3. Figure 4. If you deselect the option Always ask before opening this type of file. the Download dialog does not appear when you export a worksheet to Excel.6. the default file location on your hard disk) and is displayed in your browser. File Download Dialog Box. Make sure that it contains the combination of Page Items that you want. the Download dialog appears. If you selected the option to open the file from its current location. Sharing Workbooks.3.9. and print the workbook. The worksheet is saved in Microsoft Excel spreadsheet format.3.3.xls).4. The worksheet opens from the database as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (*. Excel launches to display the new Excel spreadsheet.115. Open the worksheet that you want to export to HTML format. 4. and then Export to HTML.

Sharing workbooks lets others use and analyze the same data.4. Click Add.4. and then Sharing. To share one workbook with several other people: 4.9.9. Share multiple workbooks with one other user. 4.1.4. The Share Workbooks dialog appears. From the menu. Click OK.1.116.1.1. In the list of Available Users. a Global Logistics Support Center (GLSC) may want everyone in the Major Command (MAJCOM) to share a workbook that includes Stockage Effectiveness. To share workbooks. Figure 4.7. Workbook to User dialog Box. 4. Similarly.4. The Share Workbooks dialog appears.4. 4.1.9.1. 4. and then Manage Workbooks. and then Sharing.4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The two tabs at the top of the dialog are for assigning workbooks to users or users to workbooks. The person's name appears in the Shared list. you may want a Chief of Supply (COS) to have access to all the workbooks created for their base account.4. Click the Workbook -> User tab. choose File. 4. click the name of a person with whom you want to share the workbook.9.9.1. Share Workbooks.6.9. and then Manage Workbooks.1. 4.4. Repeat for all the people with whom you want to share the workbook. For example.5. you use the Shared Workbooks dialog. The names in the Shared list are the people who can have access to the workbook. Chapter 4 Share one workbook with multiple users.4. From the main Discoverer menu.1.9.3.2.9. choose File. 4–108 . To share several workbooks with another person: 4.

Click OK.118. Chapter 4 Figure 4. Repeat for all the workbooks that you want to share with the other person.1. The workbook's name appears in the Shared list.117.4. 4. Choose the name of the person with whom you want to share the workbook from the User drop-down list. a LOV for a type account code item might contain the values.9.9.1. B and E (see figure below).11. How to select multiple values from long LOVs. Click the User -> Workbook tab. 4.10.1.4.4.1.1. 4.9.9.1. In the list of Available Workbooks.9. Share Workbooks. LOVs are used in: 4–109 . and includes the following topics: What are LOVs? LOV examples. How to select single values from long LOVs.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.9. For example.13.1. 4.8. User to Workbook Dialog Box.9. 4.4.10. Using Lists of Values (LOVs).10. 4.4. 4. About using LOVs. 4. Click Add.4. What are LOVs? LOVs contain a list of valid values for an item.1.12.10. This section describes how to improve productivity using Lists of Values (LOVs) in Discoverer. click the name of a workbook that you want to share with the other person.1. Example of LOV. Figure 4. The names in the Shared list are the workbooks you have shared with others. 4.

For example.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 Parameters Conditions Discoverer Item Navigator Export Wizard 4.2.10.10.1. For example. The figure below shows the value ‘5’ being selected from a LOV in a parameter dialog.1. 4. containing the AFRAMPS Codes ‘blank.1. which would result in an empty worksheet because the database does not contain this AFRAMPS Code.2. With parameters.1.2. 4. a LOV has been created on the Air Force Recoverable Assembly Management Process System Report Code (AFRAMPS) item. when setting a parameter.10.10. and export.3.3.1. LOV Examples.10. conditions. & 7. When used in parameters. A LOV used to specify worksheet parameters.1. you might enter '8' here. With conditions.2.1. LOVs enable you to select predefined values rather than enter arbitrary values in a text field.” 4. When used in the Discoverer item navigator.2.10.2.2. If a LOV was not defined on AFRAMPS Code.10. In the figure below. a user might choose 1999 and 2000 from a LOV. LOVs enable you to apply conditions to worksheets without defining conditions criteria.2. 4.2. LOVs work differently with parameters and conditions: 4.1.3. the condition type determines whether you can select single or multiple values. 6. creator of the Discoverer workbook specifies whether single or multiple values are allowed. choosing type account code “B” from a LOV in the Discoverer Item Navigator filters a worksheet to display only data for Type Account Code “B.1.2. This sub-section contains examples of using LOVs.10. Only the following condition types allow multiple values: Like Not like In Not in Is null Is not null Between 4. 4–110 . 5. LOVs are used in the following way: 4.

the LOV values for Excess Exception Code of 2 & 5 are selected for display on a worksheet. Using LOVs in a Condition Statement. the LOV values are used to filter the worksheet. A LOV used in the Discoverer Item Navigator. A LOV used in a condition. In other words. LOVs are also used in the Discoverer item navigator.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. The figure below shows the values 2 & 5 being selected in the Discoverer item navigator.2. 4–111 .2.e. LOVs are also used when you create conditions.3. Edit Parameters Values Dialog Box. in the figure below.119.10. 4. The figure below shows the value Feb (i. For example. February) being selected from a LOV in a condition dialog Figure 4. the LOV containing months is used to choose values against which to match worksheet data. 4.10. Chapter 4 Figure 4. in the figure below. For example.120.

the following rules apply: 4. Chapter 4 Figure 4.1. if a LOV contains hundreds of values.1. you select single LOV values using the “Select Value” dialog 4. To select single values from long LOVs: 4. 4. Discoverer displays a dialog that enables you to search LOV values and select the values that you want.3. 4. About using long LOVs.10. When LOVs are used with parameters.121. Display the “Select Value” dialog.1. you can select only values that begin with the letter 'A'.10. 4. When LOVs contain a large number of values.10.1.1. How to select single values from long LOVs.10. For example. Using LOVs in Item Navigator.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. you can use the Select values option to display a dialog that enables you to search and select LOV values.3. When using long LOVs. When LOVs contain a large number of values. 4–112 .10.4.10.1.4. you can use the Select Multiple Values option to display a dialog that enables you to search and select LOV values. or select only values that contain 'CPM'.4.10.3. When LOVs are used with conditions. 4.1.3.

10. Select the Case-sensitive check box to match upper and lower case letters exactly. if you choose 'Starts with'. Click OK to choose the selected LOV value and close the dialog.2. groups of 50 or groups of 100.4. select the Case-sensitive check box. For example.5. as follows: Use the Search by drop down list to specify how you want to match LOV values.1.10.1.10. then choose Select values.10. do one of the following: Use the scroll bar to navigate up and down the values in the current group. Select the value that you want from the Selected values list.4.4. 4.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–113 .4. For example. Values that match the search criteria are displayed in the Displayed values list. 4. when selected the value 'CPM' would not find details containing 'Cpm' or 'cpm'. 4. click the down arrow next to the What default value do you want to give this parameter? field. For example. type A to find LOV values that begins with A. Click Go to start the search.1. select the value from the Displayed values list. From the “Edit Condition” dialog.122. Values are displayed in groups. If the Displayed values list contains the value that you want. Figure 4.3. For example. If you cannot see the value that you want in the Displayed values list. Limit the values in the Displayed values list using the Search by and Search for fields. or “New Condition” dialog choose Select values from the Values drop down list. Use the Next and Previous buttons to display the next or previous group of values in the LOV (more than 100). NOTES: For quicker searches.4. Enter a search term in the Search for field. Chapter 4 From the “Edit Parameter” dialog or “New Parameter” dialog. Starts with or Equals. Select Value Dislog for Single Item Selection. 4.

5.10.10.2.5.5.10. 4. When LOVs contain a large number of values. Chapter 4 LOV value that you specify is selected. Use the Next and Previous buttons to display the next or previous group of values in the LOV (more than 100). If you cannot see the value that you want in the Displayed values list. Figure 4. you select single LOV values using the “Select Value” dialog 4. 4.1. From the “Edit Condition” dialog. as follows: 4–114 . 4. If the Displayed values list contains the value that you want. Limit the values in the Displayed values list using the Search by and Search for fields.10.1.5.1.1.123.5.10.1. To select single values from long LOVs: 4. 4. click the down arrow next to the What default value do you want to give this parameter? field. select the value from the Displayed values list. From the “Edit Parameter” dialog or “New Parameter” dialog. Display the “Select Value” dialog.3. Select Values Dialog for Multiple Selection Items.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. then choose Select values.10.4. or “New Condition” dialog choose Select values from the Values drop down list. do one of the following: Use the scroll bar to navigate up and down the values in the current group.1. How to select multiple values from long LOVs.5.

The Options dialog appears.11. you can also open it by clicking the Options button if available in other dialogs. Click the General tab if it isn't already selected. For example. For example.1. you can change the default options to suit your preferences and requirements. The Options dialog appears.2.1.11. 4.2.10. Select the Case-sensitive check box to match upper and lower case letters exactly. Select the value(s) that you want from the Selected values list. and then Options.2. In that case.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.11. the options may apply only to the features offered in that dialog.1. 4.2. Changes to defaults do not affect previous work. if you use the Options dialog to change the formats for new worksheets. Chapter 4 Use the Search by drop down list to specify how you want to match LOV values. Starts with or Equals. The tabs across the top of the dialog list the different option categories. Values that match the search criteria are displayed in the Displayed values list. if you choose 'Starts with'. To change default settings: 4.11.11. For example. Click a tab to see its options. the formatting on previous worksheets is not affected. 4. For example. select the Case-sensitive check box.1.11. From the menu. 4. Using the Discoverer Options dialog.1.1. 4–115 . Discoverer's default Graphical User Interface settings determine how Discoverer works. Click Go to start the search. Click OK to choose the selected LOV value and close the dialog. groups of 50 or groups of 100. For example. 4. To set general options: 4. and then Options. The tabs across the top of the dialog list the different option categories.1. choose Tools. Changing Default Settings. NOTE: In addition to opening the Options dialog from the menus. General options are for opening workbooks and displaying wizard graphics. Default options apply when you start working with Discoverer.1.5. Setting General Options. LOV value(s) that you specify is selected. Choose Tools. looks.' NOTES: For quicker searches.1. when selected the value 'CPM' would not find details containing 'Cpm' or 'cpm. Enter a search term in the Search for field. type A to find LOV values that begins with A.11. 4.2.11.2. 4. and feels. Values are displayed in groups.

2. A typical reason for selecting this option is to see a different worksheet than the one that opens by default without waiting for the query results.4. you do most often. Query Governor options help reduce the amount of time it takes to display data. Ask for confirmation. a dialog asks if you want to run the query for the first worksheet. Query Governor options help you set limits on the amount of time a query should take to complete. 4. Setting Query Governor Options. Discoverer Administrator at HQ Operations and Sustainment Systems Group (HQ 754 ELS/ILSS) determines the upper limits for the Query Governor options. Summary Tables should be updated periodically to incorporate new data. Option Dialog.1.11.3. Discoverer then redirects the request to the detail data.2. When you request data for a worksheet. 4. For example.11. After the workbook opens. Select the defaults for opening a workbook and running a query to load the data.124. Discoverer automatically retrieves the data specified by the worksheet in the workbook. You can set defaults for Summary Data and for Queries. HQ 754 ELSG/ILSS may 4–116 .3. Deselect this option if you don't want to see the graphics in the dialogs. Several Discoverer dialogs include artistic graphics (bitmaps).11. if it does. Show wizard graphics. If the Summary Tables' data does not satisfy your request. This is the default selection. Don't run query (leave sheet empty). Chapter 4 Figure 4. loads the appropriate data quickly. Select this option to retrieve data for the worksheet as soon as you open a workbook or click on the tab of a worksheet. That is. Opens the workbook and worksheet.1. Use these options to limit the time you wait for Discoverer to run a query.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Click OK. the worksheet opens but does not contain any data. but does not retrieve any data from the database. Discoverer first checks Summary Tables set up by the Discoverer Administrator to see if their saved data satisfies your request and. 4. The saved data in the Summary Tables remains constant until updated with new data. Using Summary Data loads data more quickly for the work. General Tab. The options set time and size limits on data as it is being retrieved from the database. NOTES: Do not use Summary Tables if you normally work with the most current data in the database. Run query automatically.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 determine that queries cannot run longer than 30 minutes. If you set the limit for 60 minutes, the numbers will change back to 30 automatically. 4.11.3.1. To set query governor options: 4.11.3.1.1. From the menu, choose Tools, and then Options. The Options dialog appears. The tabs across the top of the dialog list the different option categories. 4.11.3.1.2. Click the Query Governor tab. Figure 4.125. Option Dialog Box, Query Governor Tab.

4.11.3.1.3. Select the options for Summary Data. Always, when available. Select this option if time-sensitive data is not important to data analysis. Discoverer retrieves and displays saved data from the Summary Tables regardless of whether the data is current. When summary data is more recent than. Select this option when time-sensitive data is necessary for worksheets. Click the up and down arrows to specify the number of days from the last data update. For example, if you're analyzing monthly data using Summary Tables, you want to make sure the data is less than thirty days old. If the Summary Tables' data has not been updated within the specified time, Discoverer does not use the Summary Tables to fulfill your query request. Instead Discoverer redirects your query request to the detail data and uses the latest data for the worksheet. 4.11.3.1.4. Select the options for Query Governor Data. Warn me if predicted query time exceeds. When requesting data for a worksheet, Discoverer estimates the time required to complete the query. Select this option if you want a message to warn that the query will take a long time to complete. The message appears only if the estimated completion time exceeds the period you specify, in MM:SS format, for this option. Prevent queries from running longer than. Select this option to limit the time a query runs before it is cancelled. A warning message informs you if the query exceeds the set time, then

4–117

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Discoverer cancels the query. Normally, this option is selected if server performance is an issue because long running queries might affect server performance. Limit retrieved query data to. This option sets the maximum number of rows to retrieve for a query. If the query returns more rows than the value you set here, a message informs you that not all data is retrieved and, consequently, the displayed data might not be complete. Retrieve data incrementally in groups of. Set this option when the database contains large tables with many rows that might take a long time to retrieve. With this option selected, Discoverer retrieves rows of data in increments rather than all at the same time. The initial retrieval is faster if the number of rows to retrieve is smaller. The default size of the data group is 250 rows, which equates to the first 10 pages of data at 25 rows per page. You can set the number of rows per page using the Rows per Page option on the Sheet Format tab. Cancel list-of-values retrieval after. Some dialogs have a convenient drop-down list from which you can select a value for an option instead of manually typing the value. This is called a list of values. For example, when creating a condition for analyzing inventories data by budget code (BC), you could either choose the value “8” from a list of budget codes or manually type the BC "8" as part of the condition statement. However, some large lists of values take a long time to retrieve from the database, such as a list of 20,000 part numbers. If you don't want to wait for Discoverer to retrieve these larger lists of values, click the up and down arrows to set the maximum amount of time you would wait for this list to appear. This option does not cancel Discoverer's retrieval of the actual data for a query. In the case of the part numbers, for example, all the data about the parts in stock, price per part, demand data and so on, is displayed in the appropriate tables. Only the drop-down list of part numbers in various dialogs would not be available. 4.11.3.1.5. Click OK. 4.11.4. Setting Sheet Format Options. This tab in the Options dialog is for setting the display format of the table or cross tab. NOTE: Changes to these settings affect the current sheet as well as any new sheets created later. 4.11.4.1. To set sheet format options: 4.11.4.1.1. From the menu, choose Tools, and then Options. The Options dialog appears. 4.11.4.1.2. Click the Sheet Format tab.

4–118

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.126. Options Dialog Box, Sheet Format Tab.

4.11.4.1.3. Select the options for the table or cross tab. Title. Displays a title if one was created earlier. Horizontal and Vertical Gridlines. Lines that separate rows and columns. The display example on the dialog shows a representation of your choices. Null values as. A cell that contains a null value does not contain any data. Select the text to use to designate a null value from the drop-down list or type a value in the box. NOTES: If you select the 0 (zero) symbol as the null value, it may appear to the person looking at the table or cross tab that zero is the actual data. For example, in a cell specifying requisition exception code (REX), zero means REX code is ‘0,’ whereas a null value in the same cell means the item table does not contain a REX code. Therefore, using the zero symbol to indicate null values might be misleading to others unless you explicitly state that 0 is equivalent to no data. Values that cannot be aggregated as. Numbers that cannot be aggregated are formatted as one of the values in the pull down list. Row Numbers (Table only). Sequential numbers of each row in the table, shown on the left side of the table. Inline/Outline (Cross tabs only). Arrangement of the side-axis data items. As you select one of the options, the example icon represents the arrangement. Rows per screen page. The number of data rows on each page of the worksheet. Click the up and down arrow buttons to select the number. 4.11.4.1.4. Click OK. 4.11.5. Setting Default Format Options. Default Format options are for setting the font style, text color, and background color of a worksheet's data, column headings, and totals. To set format options: 4.11.5.1. From the menu, choose Tools, and then Options. The Options dialog appears. The tabs across the top of the dialog list the different option categories. 4.11.5.1.1. Click the Default Formats tab.

4–119

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.127. Options Dialog Box, Defaults Formats Tab. To see a default format, select it in the list. Example box shows an example of the format.

4.11.5.1.2. To change a default format, select from the list of formats. 4.11.5.1.3. Click the Change button. The Data Format dialog appears.

4–120

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Figure 4.128. Data Format Dialog Box.

4.11.5.1.4. Select options on the Data Format dialog to set the default font style, alignment, text color, and background color for the selected format. Size. Choose a size for the font from the drop-down list. Style. Click a button to display the text in a boldface, italic, underline, or strikethrough. Click the appropriate button to remove the style if it is already in effect. Color. Click the button to apply a color to either the text or the background. A palette of colors appears. Click the one you want. Alignment. Click an alignment option. The options display the data in the top, middle, or bottom of the appropriate cell on the table or cross tab. Actual font size. Select this option to display the data in the sample in the font size that you choose from the size drop-down list. 4.11.5.1.5. Click OK. 4.11.5.2. Resetting default formats. Sometimes, after changing several aspects of a format you want to change it back to the original Discoverer default settings. Instead of changing each format setting individually, you can click the Reset button. 4.11.5.2.1. In the Format Options dialog, select the default format to reset. Resetting applies only to the selected format. Thus, you can reset one format but keep your changes made to the others. 4.11.5.2.2. Click OK. 4.11.6. Setting Advanced Options. Advanced options are for turning on/off automatic querying and for catching join errors that relate to database relationships.

4–121

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 NOTE: Do not change these options without assistance from the HQ 754 ELSG/ILSS Discoverer Administration Team. 4.11.6.1. To set advanced options: 4.11.6.1.1. From the menu, choose Tools, and then Options. The Options dialog appears. The tabs across the top of the dialog list the different option categories. 4.11.6.1.2. Click the Advanced tab. Figure 4.129. Options Dialog Box, Advanced Tab.

4.11.6.1.3. Select the options. Automatic Querying. When you make a change to a worksheet that affects the data results (as opposed to formatting changes), Discoverer automatically re-queries the database to display the appropriate results based on your changes. However, you can use this option to disable the automatic query feature in case you want to make changes to the worksheet but not have Discoverer update the data. Fan-Trap Detection. When this check box is NOT selected, Discoverer automatically detects and resolves fan trap and chasm trap queries into multiple SQL statements to obtain normal expected results. If you disable Fan Trap detection, this may result in these queries generating Cartesian products, with potentially misleading results. Select this check box if you want to prevent Discoverer from checking for fan traps. Multiple Join Detection. Check this option to turn off Discoverer's automatic detection and prevention of worksheet arrangements that have potential multiple join paths. 4.11.6.1.4. Click OK. 4.11.6.2. About automatic querying. While working with a worksheet, you can make changes that affect the data being displayed. For example, if you add a new data item or change a calculation that produces a data column, the displayed data may not reflect the change until Discoverer re-queries the database. With automatic querying, Discoverer automatically re-queries the database to get the updated data to display. In some cases, however, you may not want Discoverer to automatically re-query the database. For example, if you intend to make several changes that affect the data, then you don't want Discoverer to re-query the database until you're finished with the changes.

4–122

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 Using the Advanced Options dialog, you can turn on and off the automatic re-querying feature. If it is turned off and you want Discoverer to re-query the database, choose Sheet, and then Refresh Sheet from the menu. 4.11.6.3. About Fan Traps. A fan-trap occurs when the data items in two folders are not directly related (such as items in the Adjusted Level Detail folder and the Supply Point Detail folder), but do have a relationship based on the data items in a third folder (through the Item Table folder) see example below. Figure 4.130. Example of Fan Trap.

As you're creating a new worksheet, Discoverer automatically detects fan trap situations, unless the Disable fan-trap Detection option is deselected in the Options dialog. If the option is not selected, Discoverer will prevent queries from being built with a fan trap condition. The following Error Notice will be given. Figure 4.131. Fan Trap Error Notice.

NOTE: If the Disable Fan Trap Detection option is selected, the query could return ambiguous results based on the relationships or non-relationships between tables. 4.11.6.4. About Multiple Join Paths. When you create new worksheets, the data items in the worksheets are often stored in multiple folders in the database. Discoverer checks to make sure

4–123

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 that these multiple folders have a clear, unambiguous relationship between them, and therefore, that the relationships among the data items is also clear and unambiguous. For example, suppose a database contains two folders--one for information about sales orders and another for information about customers. Both folders contain the data item "Customer ID" because each sales order is for a customer specified by the Customer ID, and an ID number identifies each customer in the Customer folder. In this case, if you run a query about sales order details and also want to see customer details, such as first and last name, Discoverer can clearly determine which customers are associated with each sale by relating the Customer ID to the sales details and customer details. However, some databases organize information so the relationship between items in different folders is ambiguous. This means that data items can be associated with each other in multiple ways, which is a situation known as a "multiple join path." As you are creating new worksheets, Discoverer can automatically detect and warn you if the potential for multiple join paths exist because, if it does, Discoverer might associate the items in a way you did not expect or intend. Thus, when you query the database, the results might not be what you intend either. The warning that a multiple join path situation exists is not an error message; the warning merely advises you that the database contains relationships among data items that you might not know exist. If Discoverer detects and warns you of a multiple join path situation, please contact your Discoverer Administrator who can determine if the database's organization needs to be modified. Discoverer automatically detects multiple join paths only if the Disable Multiple Join Path Detection option is deselected on the Options dialog. If that option is not selected, Discoverer builds your new worksheets without checking for or warning you about multiple join paths. 4.11.6.5. Using SQL. If you are familiar with SQL, you can analyze the SQL statements that Discoverer executes against the database. 4.11.6.5.1. Looking at the SQL Statements for Worksheets. 4.11.6.5.1.1. To see a worksheet's SQL statements: 4.11.6.5.1.1.1. Choose Sheet, and then Show SQL.

4–124

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 The SQL Inspector dialog box appears. It shows the SQL statements used to create your current worksheet. Figure 4.132. SQL Inspector, SQL Tab.

4.11.6.5.1.1.2. Click Copy to copy the statements and paste them to another SQL program. The SQL statements Discoverer uses to open a workbook or worksheet involve complex programming. Therefore, you cannot simply copy a worksheet's SQL and use it to open another workbook or worksheet. 4.11.6.5.1.1.3. Click OK to close the SQL Inspector dialog box. 4.11.6.5.2. Looking at an SQL Execution Plan. 4.11.6.5.2.1. To see a worksheet's Execution Plan: 4.11.6.5.2.1.1. Choose Sheet, and then Show SQL. 4.11.6.5.2.1.2. The SQL Inspector dialog appears. 4.11.6.5.2.1.3. Click the Plan tab. Figure 4.133. SQL Inspector, Plan Tab.

4.11.6.5.2.1.4. Using the Discoverer Execution Plan. Plan tab displays the Execution Plan chosen by the Oracle Server for the query request. The Execution Plan defines the sequence of operations that the Oracle Server performs to execute the SQL statement. You can look at an Execution Plan to see how a SQL statement is being exe-

4–125

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 cuted. For example, when using Summaries, you may wish to check that a query is using a Summary or Materialized View created by your Discoverer Administrator. Section 4B—DISCOVERER PLUS DAILY REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.12. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4C—DISCOVERER PLUS MONTHLY REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.13. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4D—DISCOVERER PLUS QUARTERLY REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.14. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4E—DISCOVERER PLUS SEMIANNUAL REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.15. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4F—DISCOVERER PLUS ANNUAL REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.16. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4G—DISCOVERER PLUS AS-REQUIRED REPORTS AND LISTINGS. 4.17. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4H—DISCOVERER PLUS REPORTS THAT WERE NOT PREVIOUSLY SBSS REPORTS. 4.18. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4I—RESERVED. 4.19. Reserved for Future Use. Section 4J—DISCOVERER PLUS REPORTS THAT WERE PREVIOUSLY MAJCOM REPORTS. 4.20. Reserved for Future Use.

4–126

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4A-1 RESERVED 4A1.1. Reserved for Future Use.

4–127

1. 4–128 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-1 RESERVED 4B1.

Reserved For Future Use. 4–129 .1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-2 RESERVED 4B2.

ISG_STOCK_NBR_RELATIONSHIP. ‘M’. Program Logic. 4B3.6.1. ‘R’. To provide a listing for base civil engineering (BCE) personnel to assist in the review and validation of work order requirements. The heading ‘RDD/EDD’ on the listing will display the due-in cancellation code (if it exists). ‘K’. estimated delivery date (STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL). estimated delivery date. ‘N’)) and have activity code equal to (‘X’. or estimated date shipped has passed the due-out is automatically assigned to Part ‘B’. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-3 BCE DUE-OUT STATUS LISTING (D03/M09) 4B3. and SRAN_REF_TABLE. 4B3. STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4B3. provides the opportunity to analyze supply status to determine if satisfactory actions are being taken by the Logistics Readiness Squadron and Global Logistics Support Center.2.2.3.2. For due-outs with a due-in but no status detail.6.7. Secondary tables include the ORG_COST_CENTER. For each due-out selected. paragraph 4B3. 4B3. The dueout is assigned to Part ‘B’ (unsatisfactory) or Part ‘C’ (satisfactory) based on still meeting the O&ST standard (discussed in more detail in Special Instructions.6. and to begin timely cancellation actions if the materiel due-out is no longer required.5. Due-out detail records must be for BCE accounts (Force Activity Designator (FAD) code equal to (‘J’.2. STATUS_SHIP_DTL and ITEM_TABLE.2.2. 4–130 .3).2.1. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_BCE_DUE_OUT table and build several listings based on user input parameters.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. This listing also allows BCE personnel to ensure that requisitioning and follow-up actions are done quickly. Additional business rules for determining what part the due-out should be assigned to are as follows: 4B3. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.2. All cancellation (ZC/ZD) and follow-up (99 and less) status details are ignored and the due-out is automatically assigned to Part ‘B’. ‘L’. or estimated date shipped (STATUS_SHIP_DTL) and the days difference is compared against established order and shipping time (O&ST) standard. 4B3. DUE_IN_DTL. 4B3. ‘K’.2). If the requisition date is greater than the current date the due-out is assigned to Part ‘C’ (satisfactory). The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_OUT_DTL. the program compares the current date against the estimated ship date (STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL). the days difference is computed (current date – requisition date) and the due-out is assigned to Part ‘B’ (unsatisfactory) or Part ‘C’ (satisfactory) based on priority group standards (discussed in more detail in Special Instructions. ‘E’).7. Purpose. If no due-in is found the due-out is assigned to Part ‘A’ (no due-in) and stock replenishment due-in/ status information (if it exists) is retrieved. 4B3. If the estimated ship date. the program compares the current date against the requisition date.2. ‘P’. BASE_CONSTANTS_1. 4B3. For due-outs with a due-in and status detail.2. STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL. Otherwise. paragraph 4B3. ROUTING_IDENTIFIER.2. SPECIAL_CONTROL.4. the program looks for a corresponding due-in and status detail.

Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B3. 4B3. Tab 7 (M09 Cover Letter). 4B3. 4B3. and due-out document number. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. WO.3.3.6. Tab 2 (D03-M09 . Tab 4 (D03-M09 . Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). and due-out document number. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.Summary). Sort(s): Sort by column headings. 4B3. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.SD. PT. WO.SD. 4B3.3. SRAN. Stock Nbr). Tab 5 (D03-M09 . DUO).3. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B3. WO. SRAN. 4B3. Tab 1 (Glossary). work order (due-out supplementary address). and due-out document number. None. Condition(s): None. DUO). part. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B3.SD.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.7. work order.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Parameters. location code.5. stock record account number (SRAN).) 4B3. Sort(s): None. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B3.3.3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Computed Fields. Chapter 4 4B3. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.4. and stock number.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 3 (D03-M09 . PT. Mandatory: 4–131 . 4B3. Tab 6 (D03-M09 . and part. Condition(s): None. work order (due-out supplementary address).2. 4B3. DUO).3.4. Installation. work order (due-out supplementary address). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B3. 4B3.1.3.3. SRAN.SD.5.5.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. system designator. part.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.

2. ‘A’.3.3.5. 4B3.5.2. None.1. If this field is left blank it will select all. As a result.7. ‘1C’ = 8 days 4B3.1.2.5. The tabs in this report required a non-traditional design.1. 4B3. the PG designation (identified in para 4B3.1.1.C.1. UND(s). If this field is left blank it will select all.2.3. due-outs are assigned to priority groups (PG) 1-3 based on the UND of the due-out and the FAD code of the organization (unless a FAD override was used on the due-out). 4B3. the data is not returned in table format. This Discoverer report uses business rules to determine if status detail records meet established O&ST standards before populating the enterprise table. The standard is 3 days for PG ‘1’ and 9 days for PG ‘2’ and ‘3’. ORG CODE(s). SRAN. Due-outs considered having satisfactory status.3. Due-outs that do not have a due-in.3. This Discoverer report uses business rules to determine if due-in detail records without status details meet established timelines before populating the enterprise table.7. Detailed business rules for assigning due-outs to a part are listed in paragraphs 4B3.7. 4B3. 4B3.7. Optional: 4B3. However. and PG 3 is assigned to all others.7. 4B3. general rules are as follows: 4B3.2. PG 1 is assigned to UND ‘A’ and FAD 13. The user may input one or many organization codes.2. Special Instructions.2.2. A constant value of ‘1’ was used to provide the required crosstab value. ‘B’.6. 4B3.7.7. 4B3. 4B3. Chapter 4 4B3.5. A "Crosstab" design was implemented where the groupings/headings were derived and formatted in such a way to render the report data similar to that of the legacy report. Due-outs considered having unsatisfactory status due to exceeding established standards for due-ins with no status or due-ins with status where the estimated ship date. O&ST standards for the two-position designation are as follows: 4B3. ‘3C’ = 31 days 4–132 . Multiple parts (if used) must be separated by commas. 4B3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.3.5. or estimated date shipped has exceeded the established O&ST standard.2.7. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.3.1. but the report data is actually rendered in the crosstab headings. The user may input one or many urgency of need designator (UND) codes ranging from A . The user may input one or many parts ranging from A – C. Multiple organization codes (if used) must be separated by commas. If this field is left blank it will select all.5. Subsequently. As a result. ‘C’.1. Crosstab data does not necessarily exist. Data File Formats.2 and 4B3.1.2) was assigned a second character based on the BASE_CONSTANTS_1 table identifying a unit as a CONUS (‘C’ character) or Overseas (‘O’ character) account.5. PART(s).5. PG 2 is assigned to UND ‘A’ and FAD 4-5 or UND ‘B’ and FAD 1-3. estimated delivery date. ‘2C’ = 12 days 4B3. The query must have at least one SRAN entry.2.7.2.

10. 2. Sample Report.5. A TELEPHONE NUMBER AND NAME OF THE INDIVIDUAL REQUESTING THE 4–133 . See AFMAN 23-110. During testing there was only one budget code ‘Z’ due-out in the entire AFSCDB that met the criteria for this report. due-in. each tab can be downloaded to give a reasonable replacement for the download file.pdf’ format.7. However.3. Reserved for future use. and status information) is now reflected on a single line. The legacy 212 (STATUS-BCZ-INVEST-UOO-DETAIL) records did not migrate to the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB). Reference. ‘2O’ = 17 days 4B3.g.5. CONTACT THE BASE SUPPLY REQUISITIONING UNIT BY LETTER OR RETURN OF THIS LISTING WITH THE ANNOTATED CHANGES. Chapter 4 4B3.7. 4B3. we substituted a generic phrase to query the SBSS for the most current status on these items. VALIDATION OF DUE-OUTS BY YOUR ORGANIZATION SHOULD INCLUDE ACTUAL CONTACT WITH THE INDIVIDUAL REQUIRING THE BACKORDERED ITEM TO INSURE THERE IS A VALID NEED. If the user doubleclicks in the text window.6.A DUE-OUT VALIDATION LISTING WILL BE FURNISHED TO EACH ORGANIZATION. As a workaround. this should have minimum impact to the user. that is beyond the capability of Discoverer.7. due-out. PART TWO. As requested. 4B3. Whether ‘. a generic cover letter is included.9. Sample Letter: <SYSTEM DATE> FROM: LGSMS DUE-OUT VALIDATION LISTING SUBJECT: TO: 1. the output is tab-delimited and will need a clean-up routine developed. 4B3. Sample Report/Letter. However. The data file download option (that is available in the legacy report) cannot be accomplished due to the format of the enterprise table.10.4. 4B3. IN ACCORDANCE WITH AFM 23-110.6.7. IF DUE-OUTS ARE TO BE CANCELLED OR CHANGED. ONCE EACH MONTH FOR SUPPLIES AND AT LEAST ONCE EACH QUARTER FOR URGENCY OF NEED DESIGNATOR C SUPPLIES/EQUIPMENT.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4B3. CHAPTER 11. VOLUME II. Volume II. ‘1O’ = 13 days 4B3.10.2. The legacy M09 program contained a dynamic cover letter.1. However. Chapters 11 and 31. Part Two. 4B3. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT EACH INDIVIDUAL ENTRY ON THE LISTING BE VALIDATED AND THOSE NO LONGER REQUIRED BE CANCELLED.4. Therefore.pdf’ or text.7. Distribution. This Discoverer report will not provide status details for budget code ‘Z’ due-outs.3. they can alter it to fit their needs before they export the letter.3. Data that appears in the legacy report as three lines (e. those details (as applicable) are not available in this report.8. 4B3. The “cleanest” download seems to come from the text file output versus the ‘. ‘3O’ = 84 days 4B3. As a workaround.7.

WHEN A DUE-OUT FOR A REPAIR CYCLE ITEM (ERRC XD/XF) IS CANCELLED. TELEPHONE NUMBER: BUILDING NUMBER: LRS CC/CHIEF OF SUPPLY 4–134 . 3. 4. Chapter 4 ACTION WILL BE INCLUDED AS A POINT OF CONTACT IN CASE MORE INFORMATION IS REQUIRED. QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE LISTING OR ACTION REQUIRED SHOULD BE ADDRESSED TO THE REQUISITIONING UNIT. THE APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE ACTION TAKEN CODE MUST BE PROVIDED.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-4 RESERVED 4B4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–135 .

4–136 .1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-5 RESERVED 4B5. Reserved For Future Use.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-6 RESERVED 4B6.1. 4–137 . Reserved For Future Use.

4–138 .1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-7 RESERVED 4B7.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-8 RESERVED 4B8.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–139 .

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-9 RESERVED 4B9. 4–140 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–141 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-10 RESERVED 4B10.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–142 .1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-11 RESERVED 4B11.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-12 RESERVED 4B12. Reserved For Future Use. 4–143 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-13 RESERVED 4B13.1. Reserved For Future Use. 4–144 .

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–145 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-14 RESERVED 4B14.1.

1. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–146 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-15 RESERVED 4B15.

Reserved For Future Use.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-16 RESERVED 4B16. 4–147 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

4–148 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-17 RESERVED 4B17. Reserved For Future Use.

Tab 2 (D18-Org. ‘K’. 4–149 . Shop.2. STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL.2. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-18 PRIORITY MONITOR REPORT (D18) 4B18.2. The phrase ‘NO DUE-IN’ will appear under the heading ‘REQN NBR’ when the due-out detail is not linked to a due-in. Purpose. Tab 3 (D18-Duo Org.2.2. Secondary tables include the PART_NBR_DTL. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. ‘/’. 4B18. Base Civil Engineer (Force Activity Designator (FAD) code equal to ‘J’.3. Program Logic .4. 4B18.2. Date. Unlinked due-ins will be furnished for all due-outs without due-ins.3.2.2.3. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18.4. Interchangeable and Substitute Group (ISG) data will be fully considered for this portion. ROUTING_IDENTIFIER.3. 4B18. Awaiting Parts (Urgency Justification Code (UJC) equal to ‘AR’ or ‘BR’). 4B18.2. and SRAN_REF_TABLE. 4B18. Due-outs with activity code equal to ‘F’. STATUS_SHIP_DTL and ITEM_TABLE. 4B18. 4B18.2. DUE_IN_DTL. Shop. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.3. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4B18. Condition(s): None. SRD.2. and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for. ‘L’. The phrase ‘STK REPLENISH’ will appear under the heading ‘D/I MARKED FOR’ for all due-in records that meet these types of conditions. SPECIAL_CONTROL.2. standard reporting designator (SRD). as well as due-outs where the due-out quantity is greater than the due-in quantity (if they exist). MF Ser Nbr). Routine due-outs (UND <> ‘A’. ‘B’.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.2. 4B18.2.1. ‘M’. 4B18. organization code.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). Due-out detail records that are excluded from this report are: 4B18.3. ‘J’ or ‘1’). This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_PRIORITY_MONITOR table and build several listings based on user input parameters. ORG_COST_CENTER. Sort(s): Sort by column headings.2. To provide a listing for review of current priority due-out requirements that contains urgency of need designator (UND) ‘A’ and ‘B’. or ‘N’). STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL.3. shop code. 4B18.1. 4B18. ISG_STOCK_NBR_RELATIONSHIP.2. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_OUT_DTL.1. Ser Nbr). stock record account number (SRAN). meaning unlinked due-ins for other stock numbers can be supplied if they are in the same ISG. Tab 1 (Glossary).1.

2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. No part number data is included. MF Ser Nbr).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.3. SRD.8. SRD. MF Ser Nbr. SRD. 4B18. shop code. SRAN. due-out document number (less activity code). organization code.7. Tab 9 (D18-Org. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. organization code. SRD and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for.10. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. Tab 4 (D18-Org. 4B18. SRD.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.3. 4B18.9. Tab 10 (D18-SRD.3. 4–150 . Shop. No part number data is included. SRAN. SRD. MF Ser Nbr-No PN). Tab 8 (D18-Duo Org. SRAN. and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for. SRAN.3. Shop. 4B18. and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for.4. positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for.3. 4B18. and due-out document number. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Duo Doc). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. due-out document number (less activity code).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. MF Ser Nbr-No PN). SRAN. Tab 6 (D18-SRD. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Date.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. SRAN. SRD.3. Ser Nbr-No PN). Tab 5 (D18-SRD.6. Tab 7 (D18–Org. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. MF Ser Nbr). No part number data is included. organization code. and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for. SRAN. SRD. MF Ser Nbr-No PN). 4B18.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4B18.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.5.3.

) 4B18.1.5.2.1. 4B18.2.2. 4–151 .2. Contingency Processing System due-outs (identified by a ‘D’ in the dueout deployed flag).3.5. 4B18. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. 4B18. ‘6’. Serial number due-outs that meet the criteria for parts 1 through 4. SRD.1. Condition(s): Selects items based on due-out activity code equal to (‘U’. ‘W’) and the due-in from maintenance (DIFM) detail mark for not loaded.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. SRAN. Multiple parts (if used) must be separated by commas.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 12 (D18-DIT for Bad Mark For). ‘1’. Computed Fields. ‘R’. and due-out document number. ‘3’. ‘3’. Optional: 4B18. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. 4B18. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.1. No part number data is included. position 1 cannot be a space. 4B18. SRD. SRAN. Tab 11 (D18-SRD. No part number data is included. None. 4B18. positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for. Parameters.5.3. ‘5’. and positions 1-7 (serial number) of the due-out mark for. and the dueout AWP_SRD field cannot have a NULL value.1.1. Due-outs where the due-out FAD = ‘1’. Mandatory: 4B18.5.5.12. ‘4’. Time Compliance Technical Order due-outs (UJC AU or BU) with a transaction exception code not equal to ‘E’.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. The query must have at least one SRAN entry.5. and due-out mark for.2. the SRD (positions 8-10 of mark for) must not be equal to ‘ZZZ’ or all spaces. Additionally. MF Ser Nbr. Precision Measurement Equipment Laboratories due-outs (UJC AO or BO).5.5. ‘2’. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.1. PART. the due-out activity code must be equal to (‘X’.3.4. 4B18. ‘J’).11. ‘2’. and any additional user-defined parameters. 4B18. due-out document number.4.1. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Duo Doc-No PN).5. ‘4’.2. SRAN. SRAN. Parts are further defined as: 4B18. If this field is left blank it will select all.1. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18.5. The user may input one or many parts ranging from 1 – 7. Due-outs that do not meet the selection criteria for parts 2 through 4.1.2.6. 4B18. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.5. or ‘5’. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4B18.1. 4B18.5.2.

5. The user may select ‘D’ to retrieve only due-outs with a deployed flag equal to ‘D’ (and the associated records). ACTIVITY CODE(s) TO INCLUDE. If this field is left blank it will select all. the data is not returned in table format. If this field is left blank it will select all. Multiple FAD codes (if used) must be separated by commas.7. TYPE MAINT CODE. 4B18.2. that record was never migrated to the Air Force Supply Central Database 4–152 . Multiple UJCs (if used) must be separated by commas.8. and ‘N’ = Non-Maintenance. 4B18.2. The tabs in this report required a non-traditional design.7. 4B18. 4B18. 4B18. The legacy report uses the 108-record to determine serial number records for Part 5.6. However.2.2. but the report data is actually rendered in the crosstab headings. 4B18. ACTIVITY CODE(s) TO EXCLUDE.2. FAD CODE(s). If this field is left blank it will return all records. 4B18. Core Automated Maintenance System and Air Mobility Command Maintenance Management Information System due-outs (identified for both as having a ‘J’ activity code). A constant value of ‘1’ was used to provide the required crosstab value. If this field is left blank it will select all.6. Chapter 4 4B18. Data File Formats. Tab 12 (D18-DIT for Bad Mark For): NO POS 3 2 14 1 POS 1-3 18-19 44-57 67 FIELD DESIGNATION TRIC System Designator Due-Out Document Number Character to blank Mark For REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘DIT’ Constant ‘*’ 4B18.7. ‘M’ = CAMS.5. ‘D’ FOR CPS DUE-OUTS ONLY.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6. Multiple activity codes (if used) must be separated by commas. 4B18. The user may input ‘A’ or ‘B’. 4B18. The user may input one or many type maintenance codes. The user may input one or many FAD codes.1.2. The user may input one or many activity codes for inclusion. If this field is left blank it will select all.2.5. Multiple activity codes (if used) must be separated by commas. ‘7’.5.2. ‘G’ = G081.5. UJC(s).4. A "Crosstab" design was implemented where the groupings/headings were derived and formatted in such a way to render the report data similar to that of the legacy report.5.7.5.3.2. If this field is left blank no activity codes will be excluded.7. This Discoverer report uses business rules that closely mirror the legacy software but there are slight differences. If this field is left blank it will select all. Multiple type maintenance codes (if used) must be separated by commas. 4B18.1. The user may input one or many UJCs. Crosstab data does not necessarily exist. The user may input one or many activity codes for exclusion.5. UND(s). 4B18. Subsequently. ‘T’ = TICARRS. Special Instructions.5.1.2.

this should have minimum impact to the user. 4B18. The “cleanest” download seems to come from the text file output versus the ‘. the legacy report listed associated due-in/status details after the linked due-in/status details. The DIT file (Tab 12) that is created needs to be verified and then processed.4. 4–153 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. the Discoverer Part 5 report will contain slightly different results than the legacy report. 4B18.5. the same data exists but not in the same sequence as the legacy report. Chapter 4 (AFSCDB). 4B18. Whether ‘. 4B18. Therefore. However. Reference.9.7.8. The legacy system previously sent this file automatically to the routine pseudo reader for processing. Therefore.6. This Discoverer report lists everything in document number sequence. However. This Discoverer report will not provide status details for budget code ‘Z’ due-outs. During testing there were no due-outs in the entire AFSCDB that met the criteria for this report. Additionally. Therefore. Chapter 11. However.pdf’ format. Therefore. As requested.7. The data file download option (that is available in the legacy report) cannot be accomplished due to the format of the enterprise table.pdf’ or text. the cross-tabular report can be downloaded and the tabs removed to give a reasonable replacement for the download file. See AFMAN 23-110.7. this may require coordination with a computer operations database manager to complete the required action. Part Two. 4B18. The legacy 209 (STATUS-BNR-DETAIL) and 212 (STATUS-BCZ-INVEST-UOO-DETAIL) records did not migrate to the AFSCDB. 4B18. Sample Report/Letter.10. testing showed the legacy 108-record didn’t always contain the correct information. Distribution. those details (as applicable) are not available in this report. 4B18. Volume II. the output is tab-delimited and will need a clean-up routine developed to remove tabs and the crosstab value (‘1’). Reserved for future use.3.7.

1. 4B19. DUE_IN_DTL. Program Logic.2. 4B19.2.2. To provide a listing of awaiting parts (AWP) due-out detail records with applicable due-in and status details for AWP end items.2.4.2.8.1. STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL.2.7.10.2.2. PA RT _ N B R _ D T L . 4B19.2.2.13. 4B19. 4–154 .2.2.2.2. The ENTERPRISE_AWP_VALIDATION table data is derived from 16 separate queries and then combined. 4B19. 4B19.3. RCD 3B – status FLP MILSTRIP status phrase (if it exists).6.2.2.2. RCD 2A – due-in data (if it exists). RCD 1B – due in from maintenance (DIFM) data. RCD 8B – org/shop financial summary data.2. A portion of the sort key uses a combination of a number and an alpha character to denote a particular “record type”.2.15. 4B19.2. DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE_DTL.11. RCD 7B – end item financial summary data. AWP due-out detail records have an urgency justification code (UJC) of ‘AR’ or ‘BR’. RCD 3A – status FLP MILSTRIP data (if it exists). 4B19. RCD 5A – shipment status data (if it exists). 4B19. STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL. 4B19.2. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4B19.2. Purpose. 4B19. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_AWP_VALIDATION table and build several listings based on user input parameters. RCD 1C – spacer.9.5. RCD 6A – part number record setup (if it exists). 4B19. RCD 6B – part number data (if it exists).2.2.3. M I C A P _ AW P _ TA B L E .2. SPECIAL_CONTROL. It will also provide financial data to allow maintenance managers to consider the economic impact of repairing versus replacing the end item. and SRAN_REF_VW.2.2. STATUS_SHIP_DTL. RCD 4B – local purchase status phrase (if it exists). BASE_CONSTANTS_1.2.2.16.2.12. A unique sort key was built to sort the data into the proper order and display the records accordingly.2. 4B19.2.2. RCD 1A – due-out data. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_OUT_DTL. Secondary t a b l e s i n c l u d e t h e C O S T _ TA B L E .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4B19. RCD 4A – local purchase status data (if it exists).2. 4B19.2. RCD 7C – spacer. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. 4B19. 4B19. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-19 AWP VALIDATION LISTING (D19) 4B19.2. 4B19. and ITEM_TABLE. RCD 7A – end item financial summary setup.2. RCD 8A – org/shop financial summary setup.1.14.2. The record (RCD) types are defined as follows: 4B19.

When the listing is produced in DIFM document number/due-out mark-for sequence. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.7. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.6. ‘6B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. This information will allow resource managers to decide whether it is economically feasible to repair the end item. Tab 4 (DO Seq With PN). Condition(s): None. 4B19. 4–155 . Tab 1 (Glossary).1. 4B19. For each end item.00. 4B19. ‘2A’.2.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘3A’. and document number (less activity code).2. the listing will include financial information for each end item. Tab 5 (Data File-DO Seq With PN).3. The due-in and status detail records for each due-out are printed following the AWP data. 4B19. ‘3B’. ‘4A’. The listing will also show the total dollar value of all bits/pieces on order against the end item.3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4B19. system designator. Tab 2 (DO Seq No PN). The due-out and DIFM information are printed on the same line. 4B19. AWP data from the map-rec record will be printed below the due-out and DIFM print line if a maprec record exists. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).3. the listing will reflect a percentage comparison of the exchange price to the total dollar value of bits and pieces (total dollar value of bits/pieces divided by the exchange price).2. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. ‘4B’.4.5. 4B19. system designator. 4B19. Paging item is the stock record account number (SRAN). Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.3.3. Paging item is the SRAN. In addition. This figure will be computed using the exchange price for budget code ‘8’ items and the standard price for all other items. the extended cost for these items will appear as $0. ‘1C’. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = ‘1A’ based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. Since there is no valid mark-for/end item for TEX code ‘E’ due-outs.4.2. Chapter 4 4B19.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.5.2. the listing will show the extended cost. system designator. Paging item is the SRAN.3. Activity code ‘E’ (markfor due-out document number) and transaction exception code (TEX) ‘E’ contain only due-out data. ‘5A’. Sort(s): Sort by column headings. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = ‘1A’ based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. 4B19. When the org/shop changes. The DIFM document number/due-out mark-for sequence will also provide financial totals for each organization/shop code. The part number linked to the due-out stock number will be printed after the due-in and status details. ‘1B’.3. the listing will print the total extended cost for all end items and the total dollar value of all bits/pieces for that org/shop. ‘6A’. Tab 3 (Data File-DO Seq No PN). and document number (less activity code). and document number (less activity code).

(Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report. this is computed by adding (SUM) the AWP cost per due-out for all applicable document numbers. 4B19. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. Paging item is the SRAN.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.4. this is computed by adding (SUM) the AWP cost per due-out. (Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report.4. 4B19. REPAIR COST. ‘3B’. ‘7B’. Upon change of the end item document number in the mark for field. ‘7B’. 4B19. ‘8B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. ‘5A’. ‘1C’.7. 4B19. ‘4A’.6. ‘6A’. and end item stock number. Paging item is the stock record account number (SRAN).5. ‘6B’.4.) 4–156 .2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘1B’. 4B19. and end item stock number. ‘4A’. ORG/SHOP TOTAL $ AWP.2. ‘6B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. ‘3B’. and document number (less activity code). ‘1C’. ‘2A’.3. ‘4B’. ‘8B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. Upon change of organization/shop code. ‘3A’. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’. Tab 9 (Data File-End Item Seq With PN). and end item stock number. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4B19. ‘4B’. ‘1B’. Computed Fields. ‘1C’. ‘4B’.3. 4B19. Tab 7 (Data File-End Item Seq No PN).) 4B19. ‘2A’.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. This value is computed by taking the AWP cost (per due-out) and dividing it by the DIFM extended cost. END ITEM / $ VALUE AWP. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’. ‘5A’. ‘1C’. ‘8B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19.4.4. organization/shop code. AWP COST (PER DUE-OUT). ‘1C’. ‘2A’. Paging item is the SRAN. ‘7B’. ‘4A’. ‘6A’. ‘3B’. ‘6B’. ‘3A’.3.3. DIFM EXTENDED COST. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.4. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. ‘3A’. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. ‘7B’. 4B19. ‘4A’. ‘2A’. ‘4A’. ‘8B’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B19. This value is the exchange cost (if it exists) for each end item stock number or due-out. This value is computed (per due-out) as the due-out quantity * unit price. Tab 8 (End Item Seq With PN). ‘4B’. organization/shop code.4. ‘5A’. and end item stock number. system designator. ‘1B’.3. ‘4B’.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. organization/shop code. ‘1B’. organization/shop code. ‘6A’. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’.8. Tab 6 (End Item Seq No PN).9. ‘5A’. ‘5A’. ‘1B’. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘1A’. Paging item is the SRAN. Paging item is the SRAN. ‘3B’. ‘3A’. 4B19.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘2A’. ‘3B’. ‘3A’.

Parameters. 4B19.8.5.4. Upon change of the organization/shop code. The query must have at least one SRAN entry.6. Tab 3 (Data File-DO Seq No PN): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION REMARKS/NOTES DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD A) FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘1’ 1 Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘A’ 15 Stock Number 2 Unit of Issue 6 Nomenclature 1 Transaction Exception Code 5 Quantity 1 Type Detail Constant ‘O’ 14 Document Number POS 1 2 3-17 18-19 20-25 26 27-31 32 33-46 4–157 . (Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report.) 4B19.1. this is computed by adding (SUM) the DIFM extended cost for all applicable document numbers. Chapter 4 4B19.1. this is computed by adding (SUM) the DIFM extended cost.4.1. (Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report. Mandatory: 4B19.2. (Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report.) 4B19. The total value for this field is zero if the DIFM extended cost = 0.) 4B19.4. ORG/SHOP TOTAL EXT COST. 4B19. Optional: None.6. ORG/SHOP (%). this is computed by adding (SUM) the AWP cost per due-out (for applicable document numbers) and dividing that total by the sum (SUM) of the DIFM extended cost (for applicable document numbers). This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.6.1.) 4B19. Data File Formats. Upon change of the end item document number in the mark for field.5.5.7.4. this is computed by adding (SUM) the AWP cost per due-out (for applicable document numbers) and dividing that total by the sum (SUM) of the DIFM extended cost (for applicable document numbers). Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Upon change of organization/shop code.9. The total value for this field is zero if the DIFM extended cost = 0. Upon change of the end item document number in the mark for field. END ITEM (%). (Note: This field was created to provide totals like the legacy report.5. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. END ITEM / EXTENDED COST. SRAN.) 4B19. 4B19.

Chapter 4 47-49 50-51 52-65 66-68 69-73 74-78 79-81 82-84 85-87 88-90 91-105 106-108 109-111 1 2 3-5 6 7-25 26-28 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-40 41-42 43-44 45-47 1 3-17 18-22 23 ERRCD Cancellation Code Mark For AWP Day Date of Issue Date of Change Delivery Destination Maintenance Priority SRD DIFM Location Stock Number AWP ERRCD of AWP Due-out Project Code DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD B) FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘1’ 1 Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘B’ 3 Routing Identifier 1 RAMPS Report Code 19 Nomenclature 3 AWP Status DUE-IN DETAIL RECORD FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘2’ 15 Stock Number 5 Quantity 1 Type Detail Constant ‘I’ 6 Supplementary Address 8 Requisition Number 3 Project Code 2 Priority 2 Advice Code 3 Routing Identifier STATUS DETAIL RECORD FORMAT 1 15 5 1 Record Number Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘3’ 3 2 14 3 5 5 3 3 3 3 15 3 3 Constant ‘S’ 4–158 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

2.6. Chapter 4 24-29 30-37 38-39 40-41 42-46 47 48-52 53-55 56 57 6 8 2 2 5 1 5 3 1 1 Supplementary Address Requisition Number Current Status Code Previous Status Code Estimated Delivery Date Reconciliation Code Date of Change Routing Identifier Code AWP Action Flag AFC Action Flag Constant six (6) spaces 4B19.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Tab 5 (Data File-DO Seq With PN): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 1 15 2 6 1 5 1 14 3 2 14 3 5 5 3 3 3 3 15 3 POS 1 2 3-17 18-19 20-25 26 27-31 32 33-46 47-49 50-51 52-65 66-68 69-73 74-78 79-81 82-84 85-87 88-90 91-105 106-108 REMARKS/NOTES DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD A) FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘1’ Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘A’ Stock Number Unit of Issue Nomenclature Transaction Exception Code Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘O’ Document Number ERRCD Cancellation Code Mark For AWP Day Date of Issue Date of Change Delivery Destination Maintenance Priority SRD DIFM Location Stock Number AWP ERRCD of AWP 4–159 .

Chapter 4 109-111 1 2 3-5 6 7-25 26-28 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-40 41-42 43-44 45-47 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-39 40-41 42-46 47 48-52 53-55 56 57 1 3 1 1 3 1 19 3 1 15 5 1 6 8 3 2 2 3 1 15 5 1 6 8 2 2 5 1 5 3 1 1 1 Due-out Project Code DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD B) FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘1’ Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘B’ Routing Identifier RAMPS Report Code Nomenclature AWP Status DUE-IN DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘2’ Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘I’ Supplementary Address Requisition Number Project Code Priority Advice Code Routing Identifier STATUS DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘3’ Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘S’ Supplementary Address Constant six (6) spaces Requisition Number Current Status Code Previous Status Code Estimated Delivery Date Reconciliation Code Date of Change Routing Identifier Code AWP Action Flag AFC Action Flag PART NUMBER RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘4’ 4–160 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 3-17 18-22 23 24-55 56-74 15 5 1 32 19 Stock Number Manufacturer’s Code Type Detail Part Number End Item Application Constant single (1) space 4B19.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6. Tab 7 (Data File-End Item Seq No PN): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION REMARKS/NOTES DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD A) FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘1’ 1 Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘A’ 15 Stock Number 2 Unit of Issue 6 Nomenclature 1 Transaction Exception Code 5 Quantity 1 Type Detail Constant ‘O’ 14 Document Number 3 ERRCD 2 Cancellation Code 14 Mark For 3 AWP Day 5 Date of Issue 5 Date of Change 3 Delivery Destination 3 Maintenance Priority 3 SRD 3 DIFM Location 15 Stock Number AWP 3 ERRCD of AWP 3 1 1 3 Due-out Project Code DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD B) FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘1’ Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘B’ Routing Identifier POS 1 2 3-17 18-19 20-25 26 27-31 32 33-46 47-49 50-51 52-65 66-68 69-73 74-78 79-81 82-84 85-87 88-90 91-105 106-108 109-111 1 2 3-5 4–161 .3.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4. Chapter 4 6 7-25 26-28 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-40 41-42 43-44 45-47 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-39 40-41 42-46 47 48-52 53-55 56 57 1 3-12 13-15 16-25 1 19 3 1 15 5 1 6 8 3 2 2 3 1 15 5 1 6 8 2 2 5 1 5 3 1 1 1 10 3 10 RAMPS Report Code Nomenclature AWP Status DUE-IN DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘2’ Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘I’ Supplementary Address Requisition Number Project Code Priority Advice Code Routing Identifier STATUS DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘3’ Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘S’ Supplementary Address Constant six (6) spaces Requisition Number Current Status Code Previous Status Code Estimated Delivery Date Reconciliation Code Date of Change Routing Identifier Code AWP Action Flag AFC Action Flag END ITEM FINANCIAL DATA Record Number Constant ‘5’ Total Dollar Value AWP(s) Percentage (Total Dollar Value AWP(s) / Extended Cost) Extended Cost 4B19. Tab 9 (Data File-End Item Seq With PN): 4–162 .6.

Chapter 4 POS 1 2 3-17 18-19 20-25 26 27-31 32 33-46 47-49 50-51 52-65 66-68 69-73 74-78 79-81 82-84 85-87 88-90 91-105 106-108 109-111 1 2 3-5 6 7-25 26-28 1 3-17 NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION REMARKS/NOTES DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD A) FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘1’ 1 Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘A’ 15 Stock Number 2 Unit of Issue 6 Nomenclature 1 Transaction Exception Code 5 Quantity 1 Type Detail Constant ‘O’ 14 Document Number 3 ERRCD 2 Cancellation Code 14 Mark For 3 AWP Day 5 Date of Issue 5 Date of Change 3 Delivery Destination 3 Maintenance Priority 3 SRD 3 DIFM Location 15 Stock Number AWP 3 ERRCD of AWP 3 Due-out Project Code DUE-OUT DETAIL RECORD (SUB-RECORD B) FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘1’ 1 Sub-Record Designator Constant ‘B’ 3 Routing Identifier 1 RAMPS Report Code 19 Nomenclature 3 AWP Status DUE-IN DETAIL RECORD FORMAT 1 Record Number Constant ‘2’ 15 Stock Number 4–163 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-40 41-42 43-44 45-47 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-29 30-37 38-39 40-41 42-46 47 48-52 53-55 56 57 1 3-17 18-22 23 24-55 56-74 1 3-12 13-15 16-25 5 1 6 8 3 2 2 3 1 15 5 1 6 8 2 2 5 1 5 3 1 1 1 15 5 1 32 19 1 10 3 10 Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘I’ Supplementary Address Requisition Number Project Code Priority Advice Code Routing Identifier STATUS DETAIL RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘3’ Stock Number Quantity Type Detail Constant ‘S’ Supplementary Address Constant six (6) spaces Requisition Number Current Status Code Previous Status Code Estimated Delivery Date Reconciliation Code Date of Change Routing Identifier Code AWP Action Flag AFC Action Flag PART NUMBER RECORD FORMAT Record Number Constant ‘4’ Stock Number Manufacturer’s Code Type Detail Constant single (1) space Part Number End Item Application END ITEM FINANCIAL DATA Record Number Constant ‘5’ Total Dollar Value AWP(s) Percentage (Total Dollar Value AWP(s) / Extended Cost) Extended Cost 4–164 .

7. repair cost) were created to track the costs and percentages. three new columns of data (AWP cost (per due-out). This is more information than the legacy report displays. Reserved for future use.1. 4B19.7. and DIFM cost was included for every due-out to allow programmatic sums (within software limitations) at the user’s discretion. percentage. Reference. Special Instructions.7. Distribution. 4B19.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. As requested. 4B19. DIFM extended cost. However.10. 11. Chapter 4 4B19. the due-out cost. 4–165 . The due-out cost and the DIFM cost had to be listed per due-out to allow totals by ORG/ SHOP and/or MARK FOR changes. Sample Report/Letter. and 13. Volume 2. Furthermore. 4B19.2. Chapters 10. Part 2. The summary financial data cannot be put in the data files as it won’t allow separate totals unless it is a regular interval.9.8. 4B19. See AFMAN 23-110.

Reserved for Future Use.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-20 RESERVED 4B20.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–166 .

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-21 RESERVED 4B21.1. Reserved For Future Use. 4–167 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-22 RESERVED 4B22. 4–168 .1. Reserved For Future Use.

4B23. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4B-23 REPAIR CYCLE ASSET MANAGEMENT LIST (D23) 4B23.7. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4B23.three sets of ten asterisks serving as a separator for the A2/A3 record data. 4B23. SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL. RCD 03 . AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL.2. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE_DTL. D U E _ O U T _ D T L .first line of header data for base master item. REPAIR_CYCLE_QUARTERLY_DATA.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. I S G _ S TO C K _ N B R _ R E L AT I O N S H I P. When a budget code 8 (DLR) asset reaches 60 “ISU” days. REPAIR_CYCLE.1. HPMSK_DTL.header data for the DIFM data. PA RT _ N B R _ D T L . Program Logic. and provides the user with an option to build a data file of print images for download to a microcomputer system. the organization is charged the carcass price for the asset. 4B23.2.2.2.6. RCD 06 . SPECIAL_CONTROL.2. Maintenance activities must pay close attention to the number of “ISU” and “STA” (Status) days on DIFM details. It aids maintenance activities in controlling reparable processing and DIFM control. RCD 00 .2. 4B23.4. E X C E S S _ R E P O RT _ D T L .8. Secondary tables include the ADJUSTED_LEVEL_DTL. RCD 01 . UNSERVICEABLE_DTL.2. It includes overall stockage and asset position visibility for each of the assets in the repair cycle.2.9. The ENTERPRISE_RC_ASSET_MGT table data is derived from 27 different types of “records” created and then combined. BASE_CONSTANTS_1.2.first line of data for the base master item and Interchangeable and Substitute Group (I&SG) data.report identification image (D23). 4B23.1.2.2. The record (RCD) types are defined as follows: 4B23.2.2. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_RC_ASSET_MGT table and build several listings based on user input parameters. Purpose. STATUS_SHIP_DTL. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. DUE_IN_DTL. WRM_IRSP_SPARES_DTL. SUPPLY_POINT_DTL.header data for the due-out data. S TAT U S _ F L P _ M I L S T R I P _ D T L .2.5. and SRAN_REF_VW. 4B23. Rep Shop/ NSN Seq). WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL.2. 4B23.header data for the due-in data. RCD A1 .2. RCD 02 .second line of header data for base master item.2.2. COST_TABLE. and ITEM_TABLE.1. RCD 04 .2. 4–169 . 4B23.2. This report is also used by Maintenance to determine work load scheduling and setting repair priorities. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.report sub-identification image and sort (Stock Position Listing. RCD 05 .2. 4B23. MSK_DTL. STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL. These records were necessary to produce the report in a similar display as the legacy Standard Base Supply System (SBSS). To provide a tool for Logistics Readiness Squadron/Supply Activity personnel to monitor status and maintain visibility of issued assets controlled by maintenance activities within the repair cycle using the due-in from maintenance (DIFM) process.2. 4B23.2. RCD A2 .

21.2.2.first line of header data for multiple detail record counts. 4B23.2.10. RCD UI .2. 4B23. shop code.second line of header data for multiple detail record counts.2. ‘AE’.DIFM items only for the DIFM List option.20.19.3. and the A1-A3 data is displayed with the repair org/shop of the DIFM item. Tab 2 (Stock Position List).2. ‘AK’. 4–170 .24.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. ‘02’.2. RCD AI .2. RCD UA .1.second line of I&SG records other than the base master item.Unserviceable DIFM items for type account “B”. 4B23. ‘AC’.18.Unserviceable DIFM items for type account “E”.2.record contains the sum of the UJC Jx data by repair cycle organization code of the repair activity. RCD AJ .27.2. ‘A2’.due-out data for each DIFM record.23. ‘03’. 4B23. RCD AM . 4B23. ‘01’. RCD AD .2.2. ‘AA’. Chapter 4 4B23.due-in data for each DIFM/due-out record. RCD A4 .2.15.3.3. ‘AI’. ‘06’. Sort(s): Sort by column headings.16. ‘AJ’. ‘AG’. 4B23. RCD AF . ‘A1’.first line of I&SG records other than the base master item.22.2. RCD AL .2.2. There is an optional sort by stock number.2. 4B23.14. 4B23.2. 4B23.12. 4B23. and stock number.second line of data for the base master item and part number data. 4B23.11. RCD AB . Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).13. 4B23.2. 4B23.2.2.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘AL’. RCD AC . 4B23.2. ‘AF’.2.2. 4B23.2.17. ‘AM’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B23. 4B23. RCD A3 . 4B23. Tab 1 (Glossary). RCD AE . RCD AH .2.2.2. 4B23. Condition(s): None. 4B23.multiple detail record counts for the master item or bachelor item.2.2.I&SG stock numbers and data (if it exists).three sets of ten asterisks serving as a separator for the AJ/AK record data. 4B23. ‘AD’.2.26. ‘AB’.spacer for those items in an I&SG.multiple detail record counts for the non-master items in an I&SG (if they exist).2.DIFM data.25. ‘AH’.2. 4B23. Sort(s): Sort by repair organization.2.3. ‘04’.2. ‘A3’. RCD AA .3. the primary data is displayed with the master item. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘00’. RCD B4 .record contains sum of UJC 1x data by repair cycle organization code of the repair activity.2.2. RCD AG . Tab 3 (DIFM List). RCD AK . ‘A4’. ‘05’.

4. DIFM NWKBLE. ‘AXC’. The DIFM Status Flag is equal to a ‘2’ (CREDIT). 4B23. The first position of the Current DIFM Status Code is not equal to an ‘F’.4.4. This field is the sum of all DIFM detail due-in quantities which meet any of the following conditions. 4B23.2.3. shop code. ‘AG’.4. Sort(s): Sort by stock number. If the DOFD <> ‘0’ this value is computed using the formula ((Ordinal Date minus DOFD) plus . This excludes unserviceable DIFM details. Tab 5 (Data File). 4–171 .4. Condition(s): Selects specific columns of data for every unserviceable DIFM detail found in the ENTERPRISE_RC_ASSET_MGT table and any additional user-defined parameters.3. ‘RFS’). Sort(s): Sort by repair organization. This field is the sum of the quantity due-in for all due-in details. stock number. If the Date of First Demand (DOFD) = ‘0’ this value is computed using the formula ((Cumulative recurring demands divided by 180) plus . ‘AD’.4. 4B23.1.0005).) 4B23. ‘B4’. Tab 4 (Unserviceable List). This field is the sum of all DIFM detail due-in quantities that do not fall under DIFM NWKBLE as explained below. 4B23. ‘AH’. One is by stock number.4. ‘UI’) based on program logic in paragraph 4B23. Sort(s): Sort by document number (less activity code). /RCQ.4. ‘AC’. 4B23. document number (less activity code) and the other is DIFM location. 4B23.5. All other DIFM details not meeting one of these conditions are considered DIFM WKBLE. There are two optional sorts. ‘CTR’. DIFM WKBLE.3. Paging items are stock record account number (SRAN) and Data Date (ordinal date). There is an optional sort by stock number. document number (less activity code).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. One is by warehouse location.4.6. D/I. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects specific columns of data for every DIFM detail found in the ENTERPRISE_RC_ASSET_MGT table and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘AA’. and stock number. 4B23. This field is the sum of the quantity due-out for all due-out details.6.4. ‘A3’. 4B23.6. (Note: See below for definitions on computations of NET REPAIR CYCLE DAYS and TOTAL RTS. The Current DIFM Status Code equals (‘CTE’. document number and the other is by document number. There are two optional sorts.3. Paging items are the type account code and Material Deficiency Report (MDR) indicator (allows user to switch between MDR and non-MDR reports. 4B23. Condition(s): Selects items with record type = (‘A2’.6. DAILY DEMAND RATE (DDR).5. ‘AB’.1. and the last position of the Current DIFM Status Code is equal to ‘P’.0005). This field is computed using the formula (NET REPAIR CYCLE DAYS divided by the TOTAL RTS). 4B23. ‘UA’. D/O. 4B23.4. Computed Fields.2. Commonly referred to as repair cycle time.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4.

9. If a maximum adjusted stock level is loaded. and WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL.15.2.4.4. 4B23. 4B23. IRSP AUTH.4. IRSP BAL. it is compared to the computed demand level with the smaller level used as the RO. The RO is normally zero.15. 11 . NET REPAIR CYCLE DAYS. This field is the sum of the ITEM_TABLE serviceable balance. ERRCD NDx and NFx Items: 4B23.4.4.15. If the Stock Record Account Number (SRAN) = ‘3101’ then this value is computed using the formula (Demand Level plus MSK/HPMSK Quantities On-hand plus MSK/HPMSK Deployed Quantities). 4B23.1. This field is the sum of all authorized quantities for the AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL.4. it is compared to the computed demand level with the greater level used as the RO. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. 4B23. 4B23.4.4.1. 4B23.7. REQUISITIONING OBJECTIVE (RO). 4B23.4. 4B23.3.15. M R S P B A L .16. MSK BAL.1.4.4.15.15.14. If a minimum adjusted stock level is loaded. T h i s f i e l d i s t h e s u m o f a l l o n . and WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL.2. whichever is greater.4.h a n d q u a n t i t i e s f o r t h e AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL.2. This field is the sum of all authorized quantities for the WRM_IRSP_SPARES_DTL. ERRCD XD2 and XF3 Items: 4B23.8. If a fixed stock level is loaded.15.12. Chapter 4 4B23. 4B23. It is computed by taking the sum of the net repair cycle days from the REPAIR_CYCLE_QUARTERLY_DATA record where the age code <> ‘5PQ’. This field is the sum of all on-hand and deployed quantities for the WRM_IRSP_SPARES_DTL.4.10. 4 . if a minimum adjusted stock level is loaded. 4B23. 4 B 2 3 . SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL.4.1.13.4. In simple terms this sums the first four quarters of data. This field is computed using the formula (Ordinal Date minus Issue Due-out Release (DOR) Date on the DIFM detail). If a “pushed” adjusted stock level (RBL/COLT) is loaded.1.1. For all other SRANs this value is computed using the following formulas: 4B23. it is compared to zero with the greater value used as the RO. However.4. MRSP AUTH. it is compared to the computed demand level with the greater level used as the RO. the RO is set at one less than the fixed level detail quantity or zero. ISU DAY. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL.1. 4B23.15. MRSP DEPL. 4B23. This field is the sum of all deployed quantities for the AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. and WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL.4. 4–172 . This field is used to compute the ‘/RCQ’ field. SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. since equipment items are not normally authorized for stock. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL. This field is the sum of all on-hand and deployed quantities for the MSK_DTL and HPMSK_DTL. SERV BAL.

Tab 5 (Data File): (Note: All data lengths are space or zero filled to provide a standard data length per record type. 4B23.4. Chapter 4 4B23. 4B23. 4B23. 4B23. This field is the sum of the quantity due-out for all due-outs with UJC J* (where ‘*’ equals any alpha character). NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. This field is computed using the formula (Ordinal Date minus Date of Last Change (DOLC) on the DIFM detail).5. SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL. 4B23.) 4B23. If this field is left blank it will select all. Data File Formats. This field is the sum of the quantity due-out for all due-outs with UJC 1* (where ‘*’ equals any alpha character).19.4. Mobility Readiness Spares Package (MRSP) Organization Code(s).17. Optional: (Only available for Tab 2 (Stock Position List) and Tab 5 (Data File)) 4B23.4.4. 4B23.21. Mandatory: 4B23.2.1.1. Multiple SRAN entries are not allowed. This field is the sum of on-hand quantities for the SUPPLY_POINT_DTL. It is computed by taking the sum of the serviceable repairs (RTS) from the REPAIR_CYCLE_QUARTERLY_DATA record where the age code <> ‘5PQ’. UJC 1*. SRAN.5. 4B23.2.1.5.5. TOTAL RTS.6. and WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL.2.1. DIFM Organization Code(s). UNSUP REQN.22. The user may input one or many DIFM organization codes. In simple terms this sums the first four quarters of data. UNSUP FISC. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. The user may input one or many MRSP organization codes.5. Multiple MRSP organization codes (if used) must be separated by commas.4. 4B23.6. SPECIAL_SPARES_DTL.5. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. and WRM_WCDO_SPARES_DTL. The query must have a SRAN entry. This field is the sum of all authorized unsupportable quantities (where the supportability code = ‘F’) for the AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. UJC J*.18. Parameters. 4B23. If this field is left blank it will select all.1. 4B23.1. Record Number 1 (extracted from the B4 record) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 Record Number 1 Sub Record POS 1 2 REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘1’ 4–173 .4. STA DAY.1.20.) 4B23. SUP PT.23. Multiple DIFM organization codes (if used) must be separated by commas.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6.4. This field is the sum of all authorized unsupportable quantities (where the supportability code = ‘R’) for the AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. This field is used to compute the ‘/RCQ’ field.2. 4B23.

1.2.6. ‘1’ to ‘DUO’. ‘G’) then ‘*’ ELSE Space Zero-filled field 27 28 29-43 44-46 47-60 61-63 64-66 67-69 70-72 73-75 76-78 79 80-82 83-85 86-88 89-90 91-109 1 1 15 3 14 3 3 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 3 2 19 Controlled Item Code Critical Item Indicator or Space Stock Number DIFM Quantity Due-in Document Number ERRCD Current DIFM Status Code Previous DIFM Status Code Status Days (Number of Days Since DOLC) Total AWP Days Delayed Maintenance Days Space DIFM Status Flag DIFM Location DIFM Issue Days Percent Base Repair Nomenclature Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Legacy code used this for AWP Advice Code but it never populated the field Converts ‘0’ to ‘ISU’. ‘4’ to ‘CAR’ Zero-filled field Zero-filled field First 19 positions 4B23. ‘2’ to ‘CRT’. ‘3’ to ‘N/C’. ‘G’) then ‘**’ ELSE Spaces 5-18 19-33 34 35-37 38-56 14 15 1 3 19 Document Number Stock Number Controlled Item Code ERRCD Nomenclature First 19 positions 4–174 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 3-26 24 Spaces Legacy code used this for a management phrase but that is beyond the capability of Discoverer If IEX = ‘O’ or AF RAMPS Report Code = (‘7’. Record Number 2 (extracted from the UA and UI records) NO POS 1 1 2 POS 1 2 3-4 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Critical Item Indicator or Spaces REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘2’ If IEX = ‘O’ or AF RAMPS Report Code = (‘7’.

‘XF’) then MAC Cost) Unserviceable Warehouse Assigned ‘W’ if warehouse location assigned Indicator ELSE Space Unserviceable Detail Warehouse Location AMMO Disposition Request Number or Deficiency Report Number 4B23.6. (Note: First instance is contained in record number 2) 3-5 6-9 10-24 25-26 27-43 44-60 3 4 15 2 17 17 Constant ‘INT’ Blank Stock Number Order of Use Code 2nd Stock Number/Order of Use Code (if they exist) 3rd Stock Number/Order of Use Code (if they exist) 4–175 . or Spaces Unit Price (If ERRCD (positions 1-2) Zero-filled field = (‘XD’. ‘MDR’ when Materiel Condition Code = ‘Q’.3. Record Number 3 (extracted from the AA record) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 Record Number 1 Sub Record POS 1 2 REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘3’ ‘A’ if 2nd through 7th instance of NSN within I&SG. ‘B’ if 8th through 13th.1. Chapter 4 57 58-62 63-67 68-72 73-75 76 77 78-80 1 5 5 5 3 1 1 3 Type Organization Code Detail Quantity Disposition Request Date Excess Report Detail Follow-up Date Routing Identifier (RID) Unserviceable Status Code Materiel Condition Code Unserviceable RID-2 Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 81-90 91 92-102 103-109 10 1 11 7 ‘ XX’ where XX = last two positions of off-base activities RID. and ‘D’ if 20th through 25th.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. ‘C’ if 14th through 19th.

1. Record Number 4.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. Chapter 4 61-77 78-94 95-109 17 17 15 4th Stock Number/Order of Use Code (if they exist) 5th Stock Number/Order of Use Code (if they exist) 6th Stock Number (if it exists) Order of Use Code not included for this instance as legacy code erroneously limits print characters to 109 positions 4B23.6. Record Number 4.1.4. Sub Record A (extracted from the A2 record) NO POS 1 1 15 19 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 3 8 5 1 1 1 POS 1 2 3-17 18-36 37-39 40-42 43 44 45 46 47 48-58 59 60-62 63-70 71-75 76 77 78 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Stock Number Nomenclature ERRCD Routing Identifier Code Maintenance Priority Code Excess Exception Code Issue Exception Code Requisition Exception Code Shipment Exception Code Warehouse Location Problem Item Flag Average Repair Cycle Days Unit Price (Exchange price for ERRCD XD/XF items) Repair Organization/Shop Code Foam-In-Place Flag NRTS-1 Flag Budget Code REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘4’ Constant ‘A’ First 19 positions Taken from Stockage Priority Code field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 4B23. Sub Record B (extracted from the A3 record) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 Record Number POS 1 REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘4’ 4–176 .6.

1.6. Record Number 5 (extracted from the AB record) NO POS 1 1 4 15 5 14 3 3 3 3 3 1 POS 1 2 3-6 7-21 22-26 27-40 41-43 44-46 47-49 50-52 53-55 56 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Filler Stock Number DIFM Quantity Due-in Document Number Current DIFM Status Code Previous DIFM Status Code Status Days (Number of Days Since DOLC) Total AWP Days Delayed Maintenance Days Space REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘5’ Constant ‘DIFM’ Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Legacy code used this for AWP Advice Code but it never populated the field 4–177 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. ‘G’) ELSE Spaces 78 1 Stock Fund Credit Flag 4B23. Chapter 4 2 3-13 14-29 30-33 34 35 36-50 51-56 57 58 59-60 61-63 64-65 66-77 1 11 16 4 1 1 15 6 1 1 2 3 2 12 Sub Record User End Item Application Part Number ISG Number (if it exists) ISG Source Code ISG Parts Preference Code Master Stock Number (if it exists) Daily Demand Rate Controlled Item Code AF RAMPS Report Code Unit of Issue Average Repair Cycle Days Percent Base Repair Critical Item Phrase Constant ‘B’ First 11 positions First 16 positions Space if ISG Relationship Code <> ‘S’ Space if Stock Fund Credit Flag <> ‘1’ Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field ‘CRITICAL ‘ if IEX = ‘O’ or AF RAMPS Report Code = (‘7’.6.

‘DUE-OUT’ if DIFM Status Flag = ‘1’.6.6. Chapter 4 57-63 7 DIFM Status Phrase ‘ISSUED ’ if DIFM Status Flag = ‘0’. Record Number 6 (extracted from the AC record where UJC = xR) NO POS 1 1 5 15 3 2 14 8 2 2 2 5 19 3 POS 1 2 3-7 8-22 23-25 26-27 28-41 42-49 50-51 52-53 54-55 56-60 61-79 80-82 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Constant ‘B & P’ Stock Number Due-out Quantity Unit of Issue Document Number Due-in Date and Serial Number Due-out UJC Current Supply Status or Mode of Shipment Code Previous Supply Status Estimated Delivery Date/Estimated Date Shipped Nomenclature Due-in Routing Identifier Code REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘6’ Zero-filled field First 19 positions 4B23.8. ‘CREDIT ’ if DIFM Status Flag = ‘2’ Zero-filled field 64-66 67-69 3 3 DIFM Location Issue Days 4B23.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.7.1. Record Number 7 (extracted from the AC record where UJC <> xR) NO POS 1 1 7 15 3 14 POS 1 2 3-9 10-24 25-27 28-41 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Constant ‘DUE-OUT’ Stock Number Due-out Quantity Document Number REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘7’ Zero-filled field 4–178 .1.

6. Record Number 9. ‘FIRM’ if Due-out Memo-Firm Flag = ‘0’ 46-48 49-62 63-64 65 66-67 3 14 2 1 2 Due-out AWP SRD Mark For UJC Transaction Exception Code Due-in Cancellation Code (if it exists) 4B23.6.1.REQUIRED_DEL_DATE 4B23.10. Record Number 8 (extracted from the AD record) NO POS 1 1 6 15 3 2 8 14 2 2 5 2 3 POS 1 2 3-8 9-23 24-26 27-28 29-36 37-50 51-52 53-54 55-59 60-61 62-64 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Constant ‘DUE-IN’ Stock Number Due-in Quantity Due-in Priority Due-in Date and Serial Number Mark For Current Supply Status Previous Supply Status Estimated Ship Date UJC Due-in Routing Identifier Code REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘8’ Zero-filled field Legacy code has an error that populates this as Due-in Priority Taken from Positions 2-3 of DUE_IN_DTL.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.9. Sub Record A (extracted from the AG record) NO POS 1 1 6 5 5 POS 1 2 3-8 9-13 14-18 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Constant ‘MAJITM’ Requisitioning Objective Serviceable Balance REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘9’ Constant ‘A’ Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 4–179 . Chapter 4 42-45 4 Due-out Memo-Firm Phrase ‘MEMO’ if Due-out Memo-Firm Flag = ‘1’.1.

Chapter 4 19-22 23-26 27-30 31-33 34-36 37-40 41-44 45-48 49-52 53-57 58-62 63-66 67-70 71-74 75-77 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 4 3 Total MRSP Authorized Total MRSP On-hand Total MRSP Deployed Total Unsupportable MRSP Authorized (Supportability Code ‘R’) Total Unsupportable MRSP Authorized (Supportability Code ‘F’) Total IRSP Authorized Total IRSP On-hand Total MSK/HPMSK On-hand (includes deployed) Total Supply Point On-hand Total DIFM Workable Total DIFM Non-Workable Total Due-in Quantity Total Due-out Quantity Total UJC 1* Due-out Quantity Total UJC J* Due-out Quantity Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 4B23.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Sub Record B (extracted from the AH record) NO POS 1 1 6 5 5 4 4 4 3 3 4 4 POS 1 2 3-8 9-13 14-18 19-22 23-26 27-30 31-33 34-36 37-40 41-44 FIELD DESIGNATION Record Number Sub Record Constant ‘OTHERS’ or Spaces Requisitioning Objective Serviceable Balance Total MRSP Authorized Total MRSP On-hand Total MRSP Deployed Total Unsupportable MRSP Authorized (Supportability Code ‘R’) Total Unsupportable MRSP Zero-filled field Authorized (Supportability Code ‘F’) Total IRSP Authorized Zero-filled field Total IRSP On-hand Zero-filled field REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘9’ Constant ‘B’ Spaces when stock number is not in an I&SG Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 4–180 . Record Number 9.1.11.6.

the user can export the data to Excel and sort based on their needs. Since this is an attempt to highlight base-specific conditions. Since this is an attempt to highlight user-defined. This record is used in numerous computations for the legacy D23 report that include total MRSP balance. The SBSS legacy report allows user-defined flags/phrases with the date parameter.2. Record number 9B (in the data file) is the same format as record number 9A. However. it is currently an obsolete/inactive record in the SBSS and has no impact on this Discoverer report.7. 100-199 to Wing 1 and 200-299 for Wing 2) to accommodate bases that have multiple Wings. Record number 9A contains only the totals for the master stock number within an I&SG. Part Eight. total MRSP authorized.3. the user can assign various organization codes to specific Wings (e. total MRSP deployed. Within the legacy code a user can define a flag and phrase that gets populated when the “ISU” or “STA” days exceed the established criteria. this field never gets populated with data and is always blank. However. Each occurrence of a due-in document number listed with DIFM assets. Chapter 4 45-48 49-52 53-57 58-62 63-66 67-70 71-74 75-77 4 4 5 5 4 4 4 3 Total MSK/HPMSK On-hand (includes deployed) Total Supply Point On-hand Total DIFM Workable Total DIFM Non-Workable Total Due-in Quantity Total Due-out Quantity Total UJC 1* Due-out Quantity Total UJC J* Due-out Quantity Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field Zero-filled field 4B23. For example.7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.7. This then provides Wing-specific listings at the time the legacy D23 report is processed. the user can export the data to Excel and sort based on their needs. high-priority items.7. etc.6. 4B23.4.7.7. 4B23.g.7. Discoverer has very limited options to meet this requirement due to lack of standardization between the bases. 4B23. and no status detail on record resulted in a estimated delivery date of ‘05024’ on the legacy report. Discoverer has limited capabilities to meet all of these requirements. Reference Table 5. The SBSS legacy report allows user-defined Wings. Record 9B contains the totals for all other stock numbers within an I&SG or totals for a stock number not assigned to an I&SG.1. 4–181 . Special Instructions. The legacy report has a column heading of “AD” which is supposed to be populated from the W-ADV field name within the code (AWP Advice Code).285 in Volume Two. If the user identifies a phrase but forgets the flag. User-defined Wings. The legacy SBSS 238-record (Weapons Training Spares Detail) did not migrate to the Air Force Supply Central Database. 4B23. This Discoverer report will reflect ‘00000’ when there is no status detail on record. User-defined Flags/Phrases. Chapter 5 for additional information. Therefore.5. the legacy code populates it with a “<” or “<<” depending on which date parameter has been exceeded. 4B23. 4B23. it was left off the table build and has been replaced with spaces in the Discoverer report.

15. 4B23.9. Distribution. Reference. and 22. Chapters 5.8. Volume 2. Part 2. 10. Chapter 4 4B23. 4–182 . As requested. 13. See AFMAN 23-110.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–183 .1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-1 RESERVED 4C1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-2 RESERVED 4C2. 4–184 .

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–185 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-3 RESERVED 4C3.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use. 4–186 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-4 RESERVED 4C4.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-5 RESERVED 4C5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–187 .1.

3. data file images or 1SQ10 images. Multiple SRANs (separated by commas) may be entered as Edit Parameter Values.1. S c a n s REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL records in system for the selected SRAN parameter and selects details where the detail data type (type detail) is equal to ‘V’. The Vehicle Asset query can also be used to create vehicle asset REM output file images. To provide a current list of all vehicles presently loaded within the system and to produce a registered equipment management (REM) output file and listing that can be used for reconciliation of motor vehicle data between the REM detail and the Vehicle Integrated Management System (VIMS). Purpose. the file name and the status of your export.1. Records are displayed in vehicle registration number sequence within SRAN. 2 . 1 .e. you must download them to a text file. SRAN and System Designator are displayed as page items (drop-down filters). That is.1. then click Finish The export log will give you the sheet exported. A file of FCI images is created. Scans REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL records in system for the selected SRAN parameter and selects details where the detail data type (type detail) is equal to ‘V’. click on File 3) Click Export 4) Click Next (for Current Worksheet) 5) Under “What export format do you want to use?” select “Text (Tab delimited)(*. 4C6. 1) Open desired tab and select a single SRAN when prompted. 4C6. “C:\TEMP\”) 7) Type in the file name if the current one is not desired (i. Vehicle Asset Listing in Stock Number Sequence. 4 C 6 . Records are displayed in stock number then vehicle registration number sequence within SRAN. there is no way to determine what images belong to what SRAN. When downloading any of these three files. Data Date.1. 4C6. 10) Click next 11) Supervised export is advised. because a SRAN data element is not available in these images.1. Multiple SRANs (separated by commas) may be entered as Edit Parameter Values. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-6 VEHICLE ASSET LISTING (M06) 4C6. To download to a text file.1. Scans REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL records in system for the selected SRAN parameter and selects details where the detail data type (type detail) is equal to ‘V’. Records are displayed in stock number sequence 4–188 . then click OK 2) After the tab is populated. Vehicle Asset REM Output File Images.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.txt) 6) Type in the destination desired (i. “M06_REM_26Jan09”) 8) Click Next 9) Select only one SRAN. follow these instructions. Data Date. Program Logic. SRAN and System Designator are displayed as page items (drop-down filters). Ve h i c l e A s s e t L i s t i n g i n R e g i s t r a t i o n N u m b e r S e q u e n c e .e.

4C6.5.1. Records are displayed in stock number sequence.3.2. Vehicle Asset Data File Images. Computed Fields.2. only one SRAN may be entered. 4C6. Distribution.PARTS_PREFERENCE_CODE is not equal to ‘Z’.1. 4C6. For the output image. Parameter: SRAN. 4C6.1. 4C6. 4–189 .2. the Remarks column is not currently used. 4C6. Records are displayed in stock number sequence.3.2. Part 2. Scans REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL records in system for the selected SRAN parameter and selects details where the detail data type (type detail) is equal to ‘V’. When the ITEM_TABLE_PARTS_PREFERENCE_CODE = ‘Z’. Unit Cost. Reference.1.1. 4C6. 4C6.2.5.3.1.4.UNIT_PRICE. Variable Fields. then ITEM_TABLE. The remarks column was intended to identify duplicate vehicle registration numbers. however.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 22. Volume 2.4. Subsequently. AFMAN 23-110. the AFSCDB does not allow duplicates to exist. else blank. Vehicle Asset 1SQ10 Images. Scans REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL records in system for the selected SRAN parameter and selects details where the detail data type (type detail) is equal to ‘V’ and the REM_VEHICLES_ONLY_DTL does not contain the AFMC master unit price and the ITEM_TABLE. Remarks.2. N/A. 4C6.5. For the Vehicle Asset Listing (in stock number or vehicle number sequence) at least one valid SRAN must be typed in or selected from the provided dropdown list.3. 4C6. Multiple SRANs may be typed in (separated by a comma) or selected from the provided dropdown list. As requested.1. Chapter 4 4C6. data file image and the 1SQ10 image files.

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-7 RESERVED 4C7. Reserved For Future Use. 4–190 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Reserved For Future Use. 4–191 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-8 RESERVED 4C8.1.

4–192 . tabs. etc) please refer to Attachment B-3 in this same chapter. General .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. parameters. Within Discoverer.1. For a complete breakdown of this report (including program logic. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-9 BCE DUE-OUT STATUS LISTING (M09/D03) 4C9. the M09 program/report is exactly the same as the D03 (BCE Dueout Status Listing).

1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-10 RESERVED 4C10. 4–193 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Reserved For Future Use.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-11 RESERVED 4C11. 4–194 .

4–195 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-12 RESERVED 4C12. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

4–196 .1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-13 RESERVED 4C13.

1. or K and retrieves selected records. Accepts parameters for SRAN. If multiple entries are typed. 4C14. Any valid type account code is acceptable. SND by Whse Sheet. 6. Item Table data is displayed.3. Item Table data is displayed. 84. Accepts parameters for SRAN. 75.7.7. Item Table data is displayed. a group of SRANs or all SRANs. 4C14.2. 4C14. 4C14.2. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-14 STOCK NUMBER DIRECTORY (SND) (M14) 4C14.3. or 85 and issue exception code = 3. Accepts parameters for SRAN and IEX code. IEX code.2. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. SRAN and type account are displayed as page items. If multiple entries are typed. Scans the Item Table and selects records based on the parameters with federal supply group = 51. type account and federal supply class (FSC). Accepts parameters for SRAN and type account code.7. Scans the Item Table and retrieves selected records that match the parameters entered.2. Any valid SRAN is acceptable. The records are then sorted in stock number sequence within SRAN and type account code. Computed Fields. The SRAN and Warehouse/Stockroom are displayed as page items. The IEX code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. Item table data is displayed. they must be separated by 4–197 . The SRAN.1. The records are sorted in stock number sequence within SRAN.2. Scans the Item Table and selects records based on the parameters. The records are sorted in Stock Number sequence within SRAN and Warehouse/Stockroom. select a single SRAN. If selecting from the dropdown list. Warehouse/Stockroom and IEX code. IEX code.5. 4C14. If selecting from the dropdown list. SRAN. The type account code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. Parameters. The SRAN and IEX code are displayed as page items. Item Table data is displayed. they must be separated by a comma. Accepts parameters for SRAN and Warehouse/Stockroom. The selected items are sorted in stock number sequence within SRAN and type account code. 4C14.4.2.7. group of type account codes or all type account codes. The SRAN and type account code are displayed as page items. 4C14. If multiple entries are typed. E. IEX code and Warehouse/Stockroom are displayed as page items. Scans Item Table and selects records based on the parameters and retrieves selected records. 4C14. Type account code.2. N/A 4C14.2.2.1. To provide a tool for Equipment and Supply managers for determining the items included within their respective accounts. and Warehouse/Stockroom.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. they must be separated by a comma.2. Master SND Sheet. SND by IEX code and Warehouse Sheet. select a single type account code. Individual Equipment (IE) SND Sheet. Any valid IEX code is acceptable. Scans the Item Table and selects records based on the parameters. 4C14.6. 52. The records are sorted in stock number sequence within SRAN and IEX code. 4C14.2.2. Issue Exception (IEX) Code Options SND Sheet.2. Purpose. then retrieves the selected records. then retrieves the selected records. Program Logic.

The FSC may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. a group of Warehouse/Stockrooms or all Warehouse/Stockrooms.2. a group of IEX codes or ALL IEX codes. FSC. If multiple entries are typed. Warehouse/Stockroom (WHSE). they must be separated by a comma.5. select a single FSC. select a single Warehouse/Stockroom. Reference.7. Distribution. See AFMAN 23-110.4. select a single IEX code. Any valid Warehouse/Stockroom is acceptable.7. Chapter 27 and 32. The Warehouse/Stockroom may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If selecting from the dropdown list. 4–198 . a group of FSCs or all FSCs. Any valid FSC is acceptable.2. Part 2. If selecting from the dropdown list. 4C14. As requested. 4C14.3. 4C14.4. Chapter 4 a comma. they must be separated by a comma. Volume 2. If multiple entries are typed. 4C14. If selecting from the dropdown list.

Totals: At each change in stock number the quantities are added together (SUM) and the total amount of document numbers are counted (COUNT). Tab 3 (Part 3 TINs).2. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. ‘S’. organization code. Totals: At each change in stock number the quantities are added together (SUM) and the total amount of document numbers are counted (COUNT). Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to ('ISU'. 'DOR') and IEX equal to '8' or '9'.3. stock number. Activity/Organization code exclusions include ‘S005’ for all TRIC/TTPC combinations. ‘U’.1. Secondary tables include the ITEM_TABLE. TIN/1B. ‘M’. 4C15. Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to ('ISU'.3. 4C15. and SPECIAL_CONTROL. and transaction date. ‘9’.3. Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to 'TIN' and positions 1-3 of the ITEM_ID_NBR equal to 'PHW'. organization code. Activity code exclusions include ‘E’. Also. Tab 2 (Part 2). Program Logic. Tab 1 (Part 1). Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-15 HAZARDOUS MATERIEL REPORT (M15) 4C15. The issue exception code (IEX) must be equal to ‘7’. and shop code. The transaction identification code (TRIC)/type transaction phrase code (TTPC) combinations must be equal to ISU/any. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). 'MSI'.2.4. To provide the base Bioenvironmental Engineer with a consolidated list of all transactions that occurred against items identified as being a health hazard. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4C15. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_HAZMAT_CTH table and build several listings based on user input parameters. 4C15. and document number. and TRM/any.2. ORG_COST_CENTER. and ‘W’ when the TRIC is equal to ISU/MSI/DOR and the IEX is equal to ‘7’ or ‘9’.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2.3. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. ‘8’. 4C15.2.3.5. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the CT_HISTORY and TRANSACTION_HISTORY. MSI/any. 4–199 . 4C15. 4C15. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. 'MSI'. system designator. 'DOR') and IEX equal to '8' or ‘9'. or ‘M’. 4C15. DOR/1A. system designator. shop code. Sort(s): Sort by stock record account number (SRAN). 4C15. Purpose.3. Totals: At each change in organization code the total number of document numbers are counted (COUNT) and the extended cost for each of those document numbers is added together (SUM). 4C15.1. organization code.1.2. stock number.2.2. system designator.

The query must have a TO date. Tab 6 (Part 5). and document number.5. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. 'DOR') and IEX equal to 'M'. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. 4C15. Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to ('ISU'. Condition(s): Selects based on user-defined parameters.1.7. Chapter 4 at each change in system designator the total number of document numbers are counted (COUNT) and the extended cost for each of those document numbers is added together (SUM). The query must have at least one SRAN entry. Computed Fields.3. FROM DATE. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha/numeric character string. system designator. and positions 113-115 (TRIC).) 4C15.5. 'DOR') and IEX equal to '7'.5.2.4.6.5. 4–200 . positions 12-16 (Organization/Shop Code or TAC/ SRAN if TRIC equals ‘TRM’). 'MSI'. The query must have a FROM date. 4C15. system designator and stock number. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. None. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. 4C15. 4C15. TO DATE. system designator and stock number. 4C15. Mandatory.3.3. Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to 'TRM' and positions 1-3 of the ITEM_ID_NBR equal to 'PHW'.3. SRAN. 4C15. 4C15. 4C15. Tab 4 (Part 3 TRMs). Totals: At each change in stock number the total amount of document numbers is counted (COUNT) and the quantities of those document numbers are added together (SUM). This field will be edited as a seven-digit numeric string in YYYYDDD format.3. Tab 5 (Part 4).5.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2.1.1.5. Condition(s): Selects TRIC equal to ('ISU'.1. organization code. Tab 7 (Data File). 4C15. None. Optional. 'MSI'. Totals: At each change in stock number the total amount of document numbers is counted (COUNT) and the quantities of those document numbers are added together (SUM). (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. 4C15. This field will be edited as a seven-digit numeric string in YYYYDDD format. Parameters.1. Sort(s): Sort by position 1 (Report Part Number). Totals: At each change in stock number the total amount of document numbers is counted (COUNT) and the quantities of those document numbers are added together (SUM). Totals: At each change in system designator the total amount of document numbers are counted (COUNT) and the extended cost for each of those document numbers is added together (SUM).4.

However. 4C15.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6. Sample Report/Letter. As requested.9. The legacy M15 listing broke on the change of stock number. 4C15. There are a few spots within this Discoverer report where the org/shop code is ignored and some items are combined.7. Distribution. 'DOR') and IEX = '7' THEN '4' or If TRIC = ('ISU'. 'DOR') and IEX = 'M' THEN '5' 2-6 7-11 12-16 17-38 5 5 5 22 From Date (YYDDD) To Date (YYDDD) Org/Shop (TAC/SRAN for TRM) Org Name If TRIC = 'TRM' THEN Blank or If Org Name not loaded THEN ‘NO ORG TITLE’ 39-53 54-72 73-77 78-79 80-93 94 95-103 104-112 113-115 15 19 5 2 14 1 9 9 3 Stock Number Nomenclature Quantity Unit of Issue Document Number IEX Shelf Life Extended Cost TRIC For TRIC ‘TRM’ ELSE Blank 4C15. M15 Data File: NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 Report Part Number POS 1 REMARKS/NOTES If TRIC = ('ISU'. 'MSI'. 4C15. Reference. 'MSI'.1. 4–201 . organization and shop codes combined. the sums match when the Discoverer summaries are combined like the intermittent legacy summaries.10.6.8. Special Instructions. nomenclature. 4C15. 'MSI'. Chapter 4 4C15. Data File Formats. '9') THEN '1' or If TRIC = ('TIN'. Reserved for future use. 'TRM') THEN '3' or If TRIC = ('ISU'. N/A. 'DOR') and IEX = ('8'.

1. 4–202 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-16 RESERVED 4C16.

1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-17 RESERVED 4C17. 4–203 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-18 RESERVED 4C18. 4–204 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–205 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-19 RESERVED 4C19.

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-20 RESERVED 4C20. Reserved For Future Use. 4–206 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

To provide a tool for equipment and supply managers to function under post-post conditions with a minimum of research time. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-21 PART NUMBER DIRECTORY (M21) 4C21. The SRAN may be typed in. N/A. 4C21.1. Records are sorted in stock number sequence within SRAN. 4C21. Parameters. Computed Fields. Part Number Directory by Stock Number.3.2. SRAN and system designator are displayed as page items. As requested. 4C21. Reference.1. Records are sorted in part number sequence within SRAN. AFMAN 23-110. a comma must separate them. Accepts parameters for a single SRAN or multiple SRANs.1.1. Distribution. SRAN and system designator are displayed as page items. 4C21. Purpose. if multiple entries are typed. 4C21. Volume 2. Scans part number details and retrieves all part number records and corresponding item record data for each SRAN selected by the user.4. Program Logic. Chapter 32. Part 2.1. Accepts parameters for a single SRAN or multiple SRANs.1.3. 4–207 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Scans part number details and retrieves all part number records and corresponding item record data for each SRAN selected by the user. 4C21. SRAN – This will accept any valid SRAN.2. Part Number Directory by Part Number.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-22 RESERVED 4C22.1. 4–208 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use.

1. T R I C i s e q u a l t o I A D a n d t h e C T. F. To provide a consolidated listing of year-to-date inventory adjustments which will make it possible to determine if accuracy fluctuations call for increased research and analysis. then 'AUTO-SAMPLE' When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'B'. then 'SHOP STANDARD' When the IEX = 'T'. then 'STAND ALONE' When the IEX = 'B'.1.1.2.1. 4C23. then 'AUTO-COMPL' When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = '9'.TYPE_ACCT_CODE does not equal P. or 9 and the SRAN_TABLE. ADJUSTMENT TYPE (Inventory Accuracy Trends Totals tab): 4–209 . TYPE ADJUSTMENT (Inventory Accuracy Trends tab): When the first position of the DOCUMENT NUMBER = 'D' then: When the IEX = 'A'. then 'IDENT CHNG' Otherwise TYPE ADJUSTMENT = TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE 4C23. then 'TEST SPARES' When the IEX = 'D'.SRAN is equal to the input SRAN. 4C23.O. then 'COMPLETE' When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'D'. Computed Fields. Purpose. C./AME' When the IEX = 'F'. then 'TRAINING' When the IEX = 'Z'.2.1.2. D. Program Logic. then 'SAMPLE' When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'C'. then 'ALL OTHERS' Otherwise TYPE ADJUSTMENT = NULL (Blank) When the first position of the DOCUMENT NUMBER does not = 'D' then: When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'A'. then '-21 T. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-23 INVENTORY ACCURACY TRENDS (M23) 4C23. Scans the consolidated transaction history (CTH) area and selects all transact i o n h i s t o r i e s w h e r e t h e C T _ H I S T O RY. B. then 'FAULT ISO' When the IEX = 'S'. 4C23. and the third position of the CT_HISTORY. H I S TORY. then 'SPECIAL' When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'F'.STATUS OR ADVICE_CODE is equal to A.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2.2.

8. then 'DIFM ORG/SHOP' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'E'. When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'C'. WHSE/ORG/SHOP (Inventory Analysis Summary tab): When the first position of the MARK FOR is blank or between '0' and '9'. then 'MSK ORG/KIT' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'U'. 4C23. 'P'. 4C23.1.2. 'D'. then 'SAMPLE'.1. 'J'. then '9' Otherwise BC GROUP = 'ALPHA' 4C23. LINE ITEMS/UNITS – OVER/SHORT (Inventory Analysis Summary tab): 4–210 . 4C23. then WHSE/ORG/ SHOP is the first 3 positions of the MARK FOR.1. Otherwise. then 'WRM ORG/SHOP' Otherwise MARK FOR GROUP = 'WAREHOUSE' 4C23. OVER/SHORT (Inventory Accuracy Trends Totals tab): When the second position of the TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE is 'B'. or 'N'. then 'SPECIAL'. then 'SPECIAL'. then '8' When BUDGET CODE = '9'. Chapter 4 When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'A'. otherwise OVER/SHORT = 'SHORT'. 'H'. ADJ TYPE = TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. then 'SAMPLE'.2. then 'WRSK ORG/KIT' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'W'.2. When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'D'.1. When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = '9'.2. 4C23.5.1. then 'SUPPLY POINT' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'K'.3. BUDGET CODE (BC) GROUP (Inventory Analysis Summary tab): When BUDGET CODE = '8'. MARK FOR GROUP (Inventory Analysis Summary tab): When the first position of the MARK FOR is blank or between '0' and '9'. When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'B'.6.2. then 'COMPLETE'.then 'WAREHOUSE' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'R'.2. WHSE/ORG/SHOP (Inventory Accuracy Trends Totals tab): When the first position of the MARK FOR is blank or between '0' and '9'. otherwise WHSE/ORG/SHOP is the first 6 positions of the MARK FOR. then 'IN-USE ORG/SHOP' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'S'. 'L'. When TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'F'.4. then 'COMPLETE'. then 'UNSERVICEABLE' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'D'.7. then 'SPRAM ORG/SHOP' When the first position of the MARK FOR = 'M'.1. otherwise it's the first 6 positions of the MARK FOR. then OVER/SHORT = 'OVER'. then WHSE/ORG/KIT is the first 3 positions of the MARK FOR.

SAMPLE LINE ITEMS OVER = The count of transactions where the TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'B' or '9' and second position of TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE = 'B'. 'H'. 'P'. Parameters. Volume 2. or summing ACTION QUANTITY to determine units.4. 'H'. 'P'. Reference. Chapter 4 Totals on the Inventory Analysis Summary tab are calculated by filtering on ADJUSTMENT TYPE to determine Complete.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–211 . or Special and TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE to determine Over or Short. Chapter 10. 'J'. 'J'.3. Distribution. 'D'. SAMPLE LINE ITEMS UNDER = The count of transactions where the TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'B' or '9' and second position of TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE does not = 'B'.2. 'L'. or 'N' For example.2. 4C23. Then counting transactions to determine line items. 'H'. 'J'. Sample. 'P'. A valid SRAN is a mandatory entry and a Start Date is an optional entry. Multiple SRAN entries are not allowed. 4C23. 'D'. or 'N' 4C23. 'H'. or ‘N' SHORT: Second position of TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE does not = 'B'. 'D'. As requested. 'J'. or 'N' For example. AFMAN 23-110. 'D'. Specific filters are provided below: COMPLETE: TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'A' or 'C' SAMPLE: TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'B' or '9' SPECIAL: TYPE ADJUSTMENT CODE = 'D' or 'F' OVER: Second position of TYPE TRANSACTION PHRASE CODE = 'B'. 'L'. 'L'. 'L'. Part 2. 'P'.

4–212 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-24 RESERVED 4C24.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-25 RESERVED 4C25.1. 4–213 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. 4–214 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-26 RESERVED 4C26.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. 4–215 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-27 RESERVED 4C27. Reserved For Future Use.

Reserved For Future Use. 4–216 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-28 RESERVED 4C28.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

4–217 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-29 RESERVED 4C29.1. Reserved For Future Use.

shop code.3. bench stock. 4C30. Tab 2 (B & E Acct). ORG_COST_CENTER_100_999.4. Tab 5 (IEE). 4C30.5. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4C30.1. and SRAN_REF_TABLE. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_DUE_OUT_VALIDATION table and build several listings based on user input parameters. The type organization code must be equal to ‘A’ or ‘B’.3. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_OUT_DTL and I T E M _ TA B L E . 4C30.3. 4C30. organization code.4. Secondary tables include the ORG_COST_CENTER. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. 4C30. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. Tab 3 (Munitions). Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4C-30 DUE-OUT VALIDATION (M30) 4C30.2. ‘E’ or ‘K’.2. SRAN.2. and Civil Engineering requirements are excluded from this Due-Out Validation listing. Sort(s): Sort by column headings. 4C30. 4C30.3. shop code. SPECIAL_CONTROL. Program Logic. 4C30. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number.1. 4C30. organization code. Condition(s): Selects items with TAC ‘B’ or ‘E’ and any additional user-defined parameters.2. Tab 1 (Glossary).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. ‘S’. SRAN. Due-outs for supply point. ‘U’ and ‘W’. 4C30. organization code. Condition(s): None.1. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.2. Tab 4 (CPS). and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number. Activity code exclusions include ‘B’. Condition(s): Selects items with the due-out delivery destination equal to ‘SAM’ and any additional user-defined parameters.3. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number.2.3. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).3. shop code. 4–218 . stock record account number (SRAN). TAC. Supplies/equipment with UND C are validated at least once each quarter prior to materiel obligation validation processing. Condition(s): Selects items with TAC ‘K’ and any additional user-defined parameters. To provide a management tool for validating all supplies/equipment due-outs with UND A and B.2. The type account code (TAC) must be equal to ‘B’. ‘F’.3. Purpose.

4C30. This is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .01. and the dueout is memo. When the budget code is NOT between ‘0’ and ‘9’.4. SRAN. Tab 7 (CAMS – G081 Validation). shop code. organization code.3. INVESTMENT-MEMO. TOTAL $ VALUE. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.3.4.01. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number. Computed Fields. INVESTMENT – FIRM. 4C30. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .4. Tab 9 (Cover Letter). this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4. 4C30. ‘RN’) and any additional user-defined parameters. INVESTMENT – TOTAL. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. and the dueout is firm. 4C30. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * . This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs. 4–219 .6. 4C30.4. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.4. Condition(s): Selects items with type maintenance code equal to ‘G’ (G081) or ‘M’ (CAMS) and any additional user-defined parameters. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number.8. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. SRAN. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * . and due-out mark-for. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs.01. 4C30. Sort(s): None. Tab 6 (Chem Warfare). When the budget code is NOT between ‘0’ and ‘9’.3.1. shop code. organization code. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items with issue exception code (IEX) equal to ‘E’ and shop code equal to (’IE’.2. ‘CW’. 4C30. and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 8 (Data File). and the due-out is memo.9. organization code. 4C30. 4C30.7. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon the user-defined inputs. When the budget code is NOT between ‘0’ and ‘9’.5. and due-out mark-for.3. organization code.4. IEX unequal to ‘E’.3. SRAN. EXPENSE – MEMO. SRAN. When the budget code is between ‘0’ and ‘9’. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs. due-out type maintenance code equal to ‘N’. 4C30.01. Condition(s): Selects items based on user-defined parameters. Condition(s): Selects items with shop code equal to ‘CW’. ‘MK’. Condition(s): None.01.

5.1.5.7. If this field is left blank it will select all.4.1.2.5.5.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs. 4C30. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .2. 4–220 . EXPENSE – TOTAL – When the budget code is between ‘0’ and ‘9’. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) or ‘NO’ (to exclude) UND ‘C’ items.5.1. When the due-out is memo.5. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) or ‘NO’ (to exclude) NONEAID items. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon userdefined inputs.1. 4C30. MEMO – TOTAL. 4C30.5.01. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. S OPTION.01. This is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * . 4C30. ORG. UND ‘C’. and the due-out is firm.4.5. Optional: 4C30. 4C30. NON-EAID. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * . EAID. When the budget code is between ‘0’ and ‘9’. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Multiple type maintenance codes (if used) must be separated by commas.5.4. Multiple organization codes (if used) must be separated by commas.2. If this field is left blank it will select all.3. EXPENSE – FIRM.9. TYPE MAINT CODE.4. Mandatory: 4C30. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs. The user may input one or many type maintenance codes. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) or ‘NO’ (to exclude) type account ‘B’ items with a UND of ‘A’ or ‘B’. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.01. 4C30. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon userdefined inputs. The user may input one or many organization codes. Chapter 4 4C30.) 4C30. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .4. 4C30. TOTAL – TOTAL.01. 4C30. 4C30.1.01.10. SRAN.2. this is the computed value of the unit price * the due-out quantity * .6. FIRM – TOTAL. When the due-out is firm. 4C30. Parameters.1.2. 4C30. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) or ‘NO’ (to exclude) EAID items.1.4. This line will also be totaled at the change of parameter values (organization code if selected) and there will be a summary value at the bottom of the page based upon user-defined inputs.1.5.8.

01) 85 1 TEX Code 4–221 .6.1.01) ELSE (Item Table Unit Price * Quantity * . Tab 7 (CAMS – G081 Validation): NO POS 1 1 3 2 8 15 14 5 2 1 3 12 POS 1 2 3-5 6-7 8-15 16-30 31-44 45-49 50-51 52 53-55 56-67 FIELD DESIGNATION REMARKS/NOTES Maintenance Unit Identification Code Activity Code Organization Code Shop Code Due-out Date Serial Number Stock Number Mark For Quantity Urgency Justification Code CAMS Gang Number Project Code JOCAS Number 4C30. Data File Formats.2.6. Tab 8 (Data File): NO POS 18 10 3 2 3 14 3 5 1 1 13 POS 1-18 20-29 31-33 35-36 38-40 42-55 57-59 61-65 67 69 71-83 FIELD DESIGNATION Stock Number Nomenclature ERRCD Unit of Issue Routing Identifier Mark For Delivery Destination Date of Last Transaction REX Code Budget Code Total Dollar Value REMARKS/NOTES If Budget Code = ‘8’ THEN (Due-out Unit Price * Quantity * . Chapter 4 4C30.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4C30.6.

Chapter 4 87 89-94 96-109 111-112 114 116-119 1 6 14 2 1 4 Demand Code Quantity Due-out Document Number Urgency Justification Code Type Maintenance Code Firm/Memo Indicator IF DUE_OUT_DTL.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The legacy M30 program included fields for totals (Investment. If the user doubleclicks in the text window. Part Two. 2. 4C30. 4C30. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT EACH INDIVIDUAL ENTRY ON 4–222 . As requested. See AFMAN 23-110.10. As a workaround. Volume II. a generic cover letter is included. 4C30. Distribution. PART TWO. VALIDATION OF DUE-OUTS BY YOUR ORGANIZATION SHOULD INCLUDE ACTUAL CONTACT WITH THE INDIVIDUAL REQUIRING THE BACKORDERED ITEM TO INSURE THERE IS A VALID NEED. Those totals are still reflected in the report tabs though and will download if that option is taken. ONCE EACH MONTH FOR SUPPLIES AND AT LEAST ONCE EACH QUARTER FOR URGENCY OF NEED DESIGNATOR C SUPPLIES/EQUIPMENT.1. Expense.9. 4C30. Special Instructions. that is beyond the capability of Discoverer. 4C30. A DUE-OUT VALIDATION LISTING WILL BE FURNISHED TO EACH ORGANIZATION. Reference. However. The legacy M30 program contained a dynamic cover letter. Sample Report/Letter.10. they can alter it to fit their needs before they export the letter.MEMO_FIRM_FLAG = ‘1’ THEN ‘MEMO’ 121 123 1 1 Type Account Code Due-out Fiscal Year Obligation 4C30. Sample Report. VOLUME II. Chapter 11. However.7.7. that is beyond the capability of Discoverer. CHAPTER 11.1. IN ACCORDANCE WITH AFM 23-110.7.MEMO_FIRM_FLAG = ‘0’ THEN ‘FIRM’ or IF DUE_OUT_DTL. Reserved for future use.8. Sample Letter: <SYSTEM DATE> FROM: LGSMS DUE-OUT VALIDATION LISTING SUBJECT: TO: 1. Total) in the data file.10. 4C30.2. 4C30.2.

A TELEPHONE NUMBER AND NAME OF THE INDIVIDUAL REQUESTING THE ACTION WILL BE INCLUDED AS A POINT OF CONTACT IN CASE MORE INFORMATION IS REQUIRED. 3. CONTACT THE BASE SUPPLY REQUISITIONING UNIT BY LETTER OR RETURN OF THIS LISTING WITH THE ANNOTATED CHANGES. QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE LISTING OR ACTION REQUIRED SHOULD BE ADDRESSED TO THE REQUISITIONING UNIT.TELEPHONE NUMBER: BUILDING NUMBER: LRS CC/CHIEF OF SUPPLY 4–223 . THE APPLICABLE MAINTENANCE ACTION TAKEN CODE MUST BE PROVIDED.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. WHEN A DUE-OUT FOR A REPAIR CYCLE ITEM (ERRC XD/XF) IS CANCELLED. IF DUE-OUTS ARE TO BE CANCELLED OR CHANGED. Chapter 4 THE LISTING BE VALIDATED AND THOSE NO LONGER REQUIRED BE CANCELLED. 4.

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4D-1 RESERVED 4D1.1. 4–224 .

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4E-1 RESERVED 4E1. Reserved For Future Use. 4–225 .

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–226 .1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4E-2 RESERVED 4E2.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–227 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4E-3 RESERVED 4E3.1. Reserved For Future Use.

O R G _ C O S T _ C E N T E R _ 1 0 0 _ 9 9 9 . Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Org. 4E4.3. shop code. 4E4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4. control the assignment of bench stock document numbers.5. 4E4. organization code. Sort(s): Sort by stock record account number (SRAN). shop code. Tabs (Also known as sheets or worksheets). The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.4. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4E-4 ORGANIZATION BENCH STOCK LISTING (S04) 4E4. and budget code group.3. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4E4. a n d SRAN_REF_TABLE. Shop Seq). Tab 3 (Stk Nbr Seq). Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. organization code.3. 4E4.3.1. S P E C I A L _ C O N T R O L . Program Logic. Condition(s): None.2. To provide listings of items authorized on bench stock for applicable activities. 4E4.2. organization code.3. Sort(s): Sort by column headings. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the MASTER_BENCH_STOCK_DTL and ITEM_TABLE. 4E4.3. organization code. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_ORG_BENCH_STOCK table and build several listings based on user input parameters. 4E4. and stock number. Includes line item (LI) totals and dollar value totals. Tab 1 (Glossary).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.1. Shop Seq). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4.3.6. 4–228 . and shop code. Tab 5 (Totals-Org.3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Purpose.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. Tab 4 (Stk Nbr. Tab 6 (Prt Nbr Cross-Ref). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4. and item number. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4. Tab 2 (Itm Nbr Seq). stock number. 4E4. and assist shop personnel in the location of bench stock items. shop code.1. Secondary tables include the PA RT _ N B R _ D T L . Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.

Computed Fields. B/C $ VALUE. 4E4. ‘3’.5. the bench stock stockage days will be used from the organization record. part number. 3. The user may input one or many organization codes.1. If this field is left blank it will select all. SRAN) where the MRA_MAQ_FLAG = ‘1’. 4E4. ORGSH. Org. and stock number. organization/shop code. The addition (SUM) of all extended authorized dollar values (authorized quantity * unit price) for each category defined (BC-GROUP. 4E4. 4E4.7. The computed value is the authorized quantity * unit price * . COMP.1.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.4.5.3.5.01. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.DOFD)) times the day requirement (based on the MRA_MAQ_FLAG). If the bench stock stockage days is zero.6.2.4. B/C $ VALUE MRA 1. ‘A’ (Tab 5 only).5. ‘B’. B-C GROUP. ORG. The grouping of the budget codes as follows: budget code ‘1’ = ‘1’. AND A.4.2. 4–229 . The computed value is the daily demand rate (CUM DMD / (current date . ORG. ‘3’. Multiple SRAN(s) (if used) must be separated by commas. Shop Cross-Ref).3.1. 4E4.01) for each category defined (BC-GROUP.1. MRA_MAQ_FLAG ‘1’.4. ‘C’ = 60 days. and ‘A’. Parameters.1. A count (COUNT) of all line items for each category defined (BCGROUP. 4E4. SRAN. part number.4. ORG.4. LI MRA 1.) 4E4. Within the daily demand rate formula. 4E4. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.5.4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. ORG. ‘2’ = 30 days. The addition (SUM) of all extended authorized dollar values (authorized quantity * unit price * .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.4. ‘E’. 30 days will be used. Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4. A count (COUNT) of all line items for each category defined (BC-GROUP. ‘A’ (Tab 5 only). LI. SRAN) where the MRA_MAQ_FLAG = ‘1’. SRAN)…(Tab 5 only). ORGSH. Tab 7 (Prt Nbr. AND A. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4E4. 3. budget code ‘9’ = ‘9’. Mandatory: 4E4. SRAN)… (Tab 5 only). ORGSH. and stock number.5.2. ORG CODE. ‘4’ = 45 days. When the MRA_MAQ_FLAG is blank or ‘D’. 4E4. 4E4. 4E4. Optional: 4E4. Multiple organization codes (if used) must be separated by commas. ‘3’. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. if the (current date – DOFD) is less than 90 days then 90 days will be used.4. ORGSH. EXTENDED AUTH $ VALUE.7. and all other budget codes = ‘OTHER’ (Tab 5 only). Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. Chapter 4 Condition(s). 4E4.

6. If this field is left blank it will select all. To prevent the Discoverer report from generating an error. 4E4.1. Examples include dates in the future. 4E4. Multiple organization/shop codes (if used) must be separated by commas. 4E4. 4E4. Suspect MRA_MAQ_QTY data is also stored at times on the legacy system. The user may input one or many shelf life codes. Part 2. 4E4. the value of ‘0’ is assigned whenever those situations are encountered. As requested. To prevent the Discoverer report from generating an error.9. 4E4.3. 4E4. julian dates greater than 366 day.5.2. The legacy system stores invalid Date of First Demand (DOFD) values at times.7. Sample Report/Letter. Multiple shelf life codes (if used) must be separated by commas. if comparing this field between the legacy and Discoverer reports there may be a slight difference in the final value. The user may input one or many organization/shop codes.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The legacy COBOL program and Discoverer Oracle software use different date difference and rounding functions for the ‘COMP’ field. SHELF LIFE CODE. Chapter 11.10. See AFMAN 23-110. If this field is left blank it will select all.8. 4E4. the current date is used whenever those situations are encountered. The shelf-life code option is not available on Tab 5. Reserved for future use. Special Instructions.2. Chapter 4 4E4. ORGSHOP CODE. 4–230 . Therefore.2. 4E4. Data File Formats. Reference.7.7.7. None. Distribution. In most cases Discoverer rounded the number up by a total of one. and leap days (366 day) in non-leap years.3.5. Volume 2.2.

4–231 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4F-1 RESERVED 4F1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved for Future Use.

1. After applying all of the business rules stated above.2. ‘SMS’.2. Secondary tables include the ISG_STOCK_NBR_RELATIONSHIP. Assigned to due-outs with UND ‘A’ or ‘B’ (except TAC ‘E’ due-outs with blank TEX code) that have a due-in over 4 days old and no supply/ship status.2.6.3. 4G1.1. the program looks for linked due-in and status (STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL. Due-out detail records will be excluded if both the UND is equal to ‘C’ and the stock number (including any stock number within the Interchangeable and Substitute Group (ISG) if it exists) has a requirements computation flag equal to ‘R’. or the supply status is (‘BA’.2. Urgency of need designator (UND) must be equal to (‘A’. Program Logic. ‘BV’) and the estimated delivery date has passed.6. the phrase ‘UNLINKED DUE IN’ will be populated in the ‘NOMENCLATURE’ column. For each due-out selected. ‘3’. SPECIAL_CONTROL. ‘B’.2. or the status indicates follow-up action (99 or less).2. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_OUT_DTL. ‘1’. To provide a program which provides the stock control activity a listing to selectively monitor priority requirements and suspect problem due-outs. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4G1.4. Due-out detail records selected must meet the following criteria: 4G1.2. 4G1. including unlinked ISG information. Purpose.2.2.1. 4G1. or the follow-up date is past due.1. STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL ) details. The ISG data is provided.2. ‘C’).3. Transaction exception (TEX) code must be unequal to ‘H’. 4G1. and SRAN_REF_TABLE. and ITEM_TABLE. 4G1. 4G1. For ease of printing this report. 4G1. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.2. Assigned to due-outs with UND ‘A’ or ‘B’ (except TAC ‘E’ due-outs with blank TEX code). ‘E’).3. ‘2’. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-1 PRIORITY REQUIREMENTS ACTION LIST (R01) 4G1. Due-outs linked to a valid due-in are excluded from this part.2.2.2. ‘BH’.2. requisition date exceeds the age selected in 4–232 . STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. If the row of data (in the listing) contains a due-in that is not linked.4.6. no cancellation code in the due-in field. 4G1. ‘Gxx’) are also excluded as they are assigned to Part ‘4’ under the right conditions.2. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_PRIORITY_RQMTS table and build several listings based on user input parameters. DUE_IN_DTL.2. 4G1. Due-outs with UND ‘B’ and routing identifier equal to (‘S9T’.2. each due-out is assigned a ‘PART’ value in the enterprise table ranging from 1-4.2. Assigned to due-outs with UND ‘A’ or ‘B’ and not linked to a valid due-in for the same stock number. the following additional conditions are used to determine the specific part that the due-out is assigned: 4G1.2. 4G1. The alpha check field in the ITEM_TABLE must be unequal to ‘X’. Type account code (TAC) must be equal to (‘B’.6. Due-out detail records will be excluded if both the TEX code is equal to ‘8’ and TAC is equal to ‘E’. STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL.2.5. 4G1.

Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G1. or any due-out that has been cancelled. 4G1. master stock number (from the ISG).4. organization code. 4G1. Tab 3 (Part 2). or any due-out that has been unlinked. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. shop code. ‘PART’ from the enterprise table equal to ‘4’. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. and any additional user-defined parameters. ‘PART’ from the enterprise table equal to '1'. Assigned to due-outs with UND ‘C’ with no due-ins for the due-out stock number. master stock number (from the ISG). stock number. ‘PART’ from the enterprise table equal to ‘2’.2 (including sub-paragraphs).3. system designator.3. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G1.3. ‘Gxx’) and no dueins for the due-out stock number.2 (including sub-paragraphs). 4G1. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number.2 (including sub-paragraphs). shop code.3. and positions 7-14 (date serial number) of the due-out document number.5. Tab 2 (Part 1). Tab 6 (Data File). 4–233 . Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G1.3. stock number. or any due-out with no due-ins for any stock number in ISG (master and interchangeable relationships only) and item record (single item or group item) is not flagged for releveling.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4G1. and stock number. Tab 4 (Part 3).2. 4G1.1. and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 1 (Glossary). ‘BC’.2 (including sub-paragraphs). system designator. master stock number (from the ISG). and positions 5-8 (requisition serial number) of the due-in document number. or due-outs with UND ‘B’ and routing identifier equal to (‘S9T’. Chapter 4 the parameter (‘PARAMETER DAYS’). Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). ‘SMS’. and the due-out has an unsatisfactory status of (‘BB’. 4G1. ‘BD’. 4G1. ‘PART’ from the enterprise table equal to ‘3’. stock number. positions 714 (date serial number) of the due-out document number. 4G1. Condition(s): None. Tab 5 (Part 4). organization code. and any additional user-defined parameters.3.6. system designator. organization code. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G1.4. ‘BP’). and any additional user-defined parameters. shop code. Sort(s): Sort by column headings. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.3. ‘4’. Sort(s): Sort by stock record account number (SRAN).3.2. system designator.6.

1. 4G1. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. ‘X’).2. 4G1. ‘W’.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. Mandatory: 4G1.1. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. ‘R’.1. ‘J’. ‘S’. 4G1.1. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Authorized values are (‘30’. PARAMETER DAYS.1.) 4G1.5. None. ‘U’. ‘M’. ‘60’.1. ‘120’. 4G1.1.5. The default value is ‘YES’. Data File Formats.5. DUE-OUT ACTIVITY CODE(s). Indicates which part of the listing the image belongs to 40-42 43-44 45-46 3 2 2 4–234 . This parameter is only mandatory for Tab 4 (Part 3). The user must input ONLY one parameter days entry. This parameter is only mandatory for Tab 5 (Part 4).4. ‘180’). ‘P’. Sort(s): None. The default is all activity codes that can be populated in the R01 report (‘B’. Parameters.3. The query must have at least one due-out activity code entry.2. Computed Fields.4.6. Multiple activity codes (if used) must be separated by commas. Tab 6 (Data File): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1 Listing Part 15 14 9 Stock Number Due-out Document Number (TAC concatenated to Requisition Number) or (Space (1) concatenated to Cancellation Date concatenated to Cancellation Code concatenated to Space (1)) Routing Identifier Current Status Previous Status POS 1 2-16 17-30 31-39 REMARKS/NOTES Values are 1-4. ‘90’. 4G1.) 4G1.5. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) or ‘NO’ (to exclude) UND ‘C’ items. UND ‘C’. 4G1.6. Chapter 4 Condition(s): None. 4G1. ‘150’.5. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Optional: None. SRAN. ‘E’.5. (Note: The legacy report only includes activity codes ‘M’ and ‘S’ by exception since they are satisfied by the requisitioning objective.

4–235 . Two columns of data (ISG MASTER NSN and ISG NBR) have been created to take the place of this statement. 4G1.8. 4G1.2. The ISG MASTER NSN will list the AFMC master stock number for any item with an ISG number. Part Two. Chapter 9. Special Instructions. Reference. or Status Quantity Unit of Issue Requisition Exception Code Transaction Exception Code Cancellation Code (From Due-out) ERRCD Nomenclature Budget Code Suffix Code Freeze Code Due-in Parts Preference Code (PPC) Will be Due-out PPC if Due-out has cancellation code in last two positions of requisition number field Due-out Indicator Reconciliation Indicator Depot Reconciliation Indicator AWP Reconciliation Indicator AFC Serviceable Balance Releveling Date Due-out Project Code 93 94 95 96 97-103 104-108 109-111 1 1 1 1 7 5 3 4G1.1. Sample Report/Letter. 4G1.9. 4G1.7. 4G1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The row(s) in the legacy report that includes the phrase ‘IS THE MASTER ITEM FOR ISG #### FOR THE FOLLOWING STOCK NUMBER GROUP:’ could not be duplicated in Discoverer. Reserved for future use.7. Chapter 4 47-48 49-50 51-55 56-60 61-62 63 64 65-66 67-69 70-88 89 90 91 92 2 2 5 5 2 1 1 2 3 19 1 1 1 1 Urgency Justification Code Due-in Priority Estimated Delivery Date Due-out. The ISG NBR will list the ISG number. See AFMAN 23-110. Distribution.7. The ‘REQN NMBR’ column in the Discoverer listing will contain the depot cancellation date and code (as applicable) and be populated as (a single space (1) concatenated to the cancellation date concatenated to the depot cancellation code concatenated to a single space (1)).10. Due-in. As requested. Volume II.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-2 RESERVED 4G2. 4–236 .

Scans the Shp_Exception_Override table and retrieves all Shipment Exception Phrases. This will accept any valid Exception Type.2. EXCEPTION TYPE. If single or multiple entries are needed. This will accept any valid SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN. 4G3. Accepts parameters for SRAN. 4G3. 4G3.3. As requested.3. Reference. N/A 4G3. 4G3. 4–237 . SRAN. The records are sorted by exception code and have SRAN as a page item.2. The records are sorted by exception code and have the SRAN as a page item.2.2. Part 2.5. Requisition Modifier Listing.2. Purpose. Shipment Exception Override Listing. Parameters. If single or multiple entries are needed.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.4.1. To provide a list of exception phrases used to facilitate the addition and/or deletion of exception codes. Exception Phrase Listing. Accepts parameters for SRAN and Exception Type.2.4. Distribution. The records are sorted by exception code and have page items that include the SRAN and Exception Type. Scans the Rqn_ Exception_Override table and retrieves all Requisition Modifiers. Scans the Exception_Phrases table and retrieves all phrases that are not null. Program Logic.1. 4G3. 4G3. 4G3.2.5. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-3 EXCEPTION PHRASE LIST (R03) 4G3. select using dropdown list provided or by manually typing in the SRAN. Computed Fields.2. 4G3. AFMAN 23-110.2. Chapter 27.5. select using dropdown list provided or by manually typing in the Exception Type.2. 4G3. Volume 2.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-4 RESERVED 4G4. 4–238 .1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-5 RESERVED 4G5. 4–239 . Reserved For Future Use.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-6 RESERVED 4G6. 4–240 .

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-7 RESERVED 4G7. 4–241 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-8 RESERVED 4G8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–242 .1.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-9 RESERVED 4G9.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–243 .

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-10 RESERVED 4G10. 4–244 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

Reserved For Future Use.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-11 RESERVED 4G11. 4–245 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-12 RESERVED 4G12.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–246 .

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-13 RESERVED 4G13.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–247 .

4–248 .1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-14 RESERVED 4G14.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-15 RESERVED 4G15. Reserved For Future Use.1. 4–249 .

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-16 RESERVED 4G16. 4–250 .

1. 4–251 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-17 RESERVED 4G17. Reserved For Future Use.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–252 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-18 RESERVED 4G18.

1. 4–253 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-19 RESERVED 4G19.

1. 4–254 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-20 RESERVED 4G20.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Reserved For Future Use.1. 4–255 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-21 RESERVED 4G21.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-22 RESERVED 4G22.1. 4–256 . Reserved For Future Use.

4–257 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-23 RESERVED 4G23. Reserved For Future Use.1.

4G24. 4G24. Scans and selects applicable special level details that match the parameters. a group of type account codes or all type account codes. Computed Fields. This will accept any valid excess exception code. Scans and selects applicable special level details that match the parameters.1.1.0. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-24 SPECIAL LEVEL ANALYSIS (R24) 4G24. select a single excess exception code.5.5. 4G24.5. Program Logic. B.1.4. type account code and excess exception code. Accepts parameters for SRAN and type account code.1.AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEMAND LEVEL) 4G24. To provide SMAG managers with data to review and determine the impact of assigned special levels of inventory investment and the dollar value of minimum levels.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. E. 4G24. SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN.1.1. 4G24. If multiple entries are typed. or F. Special Level Analysis by Application Code Sheet.1.0.1. Item record and special level detail data are displayed.2.1. budget code and application code are displayed as page items.1. Special Level Analysis (ALL) Sheet. type account code and application code. 4G24.4.1. SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Application code. $ VALUE MIN > DMD = "MIN LVL > DMD LVL"*UNIT PRICE 4G24. The excess exception code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided.1. they must be separated by a comma.5. The type account code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided.1. 4G24. they 4–258 . $ VALUE DMD LVL = UNIT PRICE*DEMAND LEVEL 4G24. The program selects item records from the item/detail record area which have a type level code of A.3. Parameters.3. If multiple entries are typed. If multiple entries are typed.4. they must be separated by a comma.4. 4G24. budget code and excess exception code are displayed as page items.4.0). select a single SRAN. SRAN and budget code are displayed as page items. This will accept any valid application code.1. select a single type account code. 4G24. Purpose. SRAN. Item record and special level detail data are displayed.2. If selecting from the dropdown list.3. Type account code. If multiple entries are typed. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs.5. The application code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. Scans and selects applicable special level details.2. Excess exception code.4. Special Level Analysis by EEX Code Sheet. MIN LVL > DMD LVL = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEMAND LEVEL. This will accept any valid SRAN. group of excess exception codes or all excess exception codes from the dropdown list provided.4. If selecting from the dropdown list. If selecting from the dropdown list. $ VALUE MIN LVL = UNIT PRICE*AUTHORIZED QUANTITY 4G24. This will accept any valid type account code.1.1. C.1. they must be separated by a comma.

N/A. As requested. 4–259 . select a single application code. Distribution. a group of application codes or all application codes. If selecting from the dropdown list. Reference . Chapter 4 must be separated by a comma.2. 4G24.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4G24.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–260 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-25 RESERVED 4G25.

4–261 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-26 RESERVED 4G26.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-27 RESERVED 4G27. Reserved For Future Use.1. 4–262 .

Program Logic. Due-out detail records in memo status are also included if they are related to a due-in detail and the PROGRAM_DECISION_FLAG = ‘$’ (project code 440). 'JS' and position 3 = 'B'. Purpose.3.2. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the DUE_IN_DTL and ITEM _ TA B L E . Tab 1 (Glossary). 4G28. 4G28.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. TAC (B and E added together. 4G28. 'P'). Tab 3 (Due-In Receipt List). Sort(s): Sort by column headings. the phrase ‘NO LP STATUS’ will be printed.2. 'JG'. and 1620.3. 4G28. Paging item is the stock record account number (SRAN). Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_DUE_IN_RECEIPT table and build several listings based on user input parameters.1. and positions 1-8 (date serial number) of the due-in document number. Due-in summaries and totals are produced by priority groups 01-03. Tab 4 (Due-In Receipt List).2. The program creates all other totals from due-out details. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-28 DUE-IN RECEIPT LISTING (R28) 4G28. Condition(s): None.3.5. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).2. 4G28. S e c o n d a r y t a b l e s i n c l u d e t h e D U E _ O U T _ D T L . STATUS_LOCAL_PURCHASE_DTL.3. and STATUS_SHIP_DTL.3. 'L'.2. When there is no valid status for a due-in detail with a local purchase routing identifier code (positions 1-2 = 'JB'. 'S'. 'K'.2. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4G28. 'F'.2. 4–263 . 'H'. 04-08. 4G28. S P E C I A L _ C O N T R O L . 4G28. 'G'.4. 4G28. TAC and positions 1-8 (date serial number) of the due-in document number. 4G28. All due-in and associated status details (except TAC ‘P’ for both) are included in this report.3. 4G28. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G28. The listing will also contain the due-out document number for which the requisition was submitted. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G28. 'JD'. 'C'. Tab 2 (Due-In Receipt List).2. Paging item is the SRAN.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.4. Sort (s): Sort by SRAN.1.1.3. then sorted as B). To provide a listing containing all due-in details (excluding type account code (TAC) ‘P’) to support post-post processing.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 09-15. STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL.

4G28. The computed value is a count (SUM) of the number of requisitions that have a priority of ‘01’-‘03’.5.2.5.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4G28.4.4.5.2. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. system designator. Mandatory: 4G28. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) only EAID items or leave blank to include both EAID and NON-EAID items. Optional: 4G28. 4G28.4. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. The computed value is a count (SUM) of the number of requisitions that have a priority of ‘16’–‘20’.5. The user must input ‘YES’ (to include) only NON-EAID items or leave blank to include both NON-EAID and EAID items.3. 4G28.1.5. Parameters. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. The computed value is a count (SUM) of the number of requisitions that have a priority outside normal parameters (less than ‘01’ and greater than ’20’).2.4. 4G28. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. TYPE ACCOUNT CODE.2. SRAN. EAID DOCUMENTS ONLY. PRIORITY 4-8. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4G28. and positions 1-8 (date serial number) of the due-in document number. 4G28. PRIORITY 9-15.) 4G28. TOTAL DUE-IN. The user may input one or many TACs.1.4.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Multiple TAC(s) (if used) must be separated by commas. Sort (s): Sort by SRAN. 4G28. 4G28.1.2.2. PRIORITY OTHER. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. 4G28.4. If this field is left blank it will select all.4. 4G28. Computed Fields. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. The computed value is a count (SUM) of the number of requisitions that have a priority of ‘09’–‘15’. then sorted as B).5. The computed value is a count (COUNT) of the number of requisitions that have a priority within normal parameters (‘01’-‘20’). 4G28. PRIORITY 16-20. The computed value is a count (SUM) of the number of requisitions that have a priority of ‘04’–’08’. TAC (B and E added together.5. PRIORITY 1-3.5.6. NON-EAID DOCUMENTS ONLY. 4–264 .1.4.3. This column of data is totaled at the bottom of the report based upon user-defined inputs. Paging item is the SRAN.

Therefore. As requested. Data File Formats. Special Instructions. Volume 2. Sample Report/Letter. Chapter 10. Part 2. 4–265 . None. Distribution. 4G28. The legacy 209 (STATUS-BNR-DETAIL) and 212 (STATUS-BCZINVEST-UOO-DETAIL) records did not migrate to the Air Force Supply Central Database.6. those details (as applicable) are not available in this report. Chapter 4 4G28. Reference.8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.7.9.10. 4G28. 4G28. See AFMAN 23-110. 4G28. Reserved for future use.

4–266 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-29 RESERVED 4G29.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-30 RESERVED 4G30.1. 4–267 .

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-31 RESERVED 4G31. 4–268 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

4–269 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-32 RESERVED 4G32. Reserved For Future Use.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. 4–270 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-33 RESERVED 4G33.

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–271 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-34 RESERVED 4G34.1.

4–272 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-35 RESERVED 4G35.

4–273 . Reserved For Future Use.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-36 RESERVED 4G36.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

4–274 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-37 RESERVED 4G37.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-38 RESERVED 4G38. Reserved For Future Use. 4–275 .1.

Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-39 RESERVED 4G39.1. 4–276 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-40 RESERVED 4G40.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–277

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-41 RESERVED 4G41.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–278

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-42 RESERVED 4G42.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–279

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-43 MOBILITY READINESS SPARES PACKAGE (MRSP) & IN-PLACE READINESS SPARES PACKAGE (IRSP) REPORT (R43/R52) 4G43.1. Purpose. Provides a listing of MRSP/IRSP authorizations and assets. It is also a product to perform reconciliation, identify shortages and excesses, and facilitate control of inventory. It closely replicates the R43, R52, etc. 4G43.2. Program Logic. 4G43.2.1. Airborne Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the airborne mobility readiness spares package detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status followup military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail, and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have an airborne MRSP detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by airborne MRSP detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity airborne MRSP short, and quantity on hand. Item table, airborne MRSP, due-out detail, duein detail, status followup MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail, and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.2. MSK Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the mission support kit (MSK) detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status followup military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail, and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have an MSK detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by MSK detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity MSK short, and quantity on hand. Item table, MSK detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status followup MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail, and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.3. Special Spares Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the special spares detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status followup military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail, and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have a special spares detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by special spares detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity special spares short, and quantity on hand. Item table, special spares detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status followup MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail, and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.4. HPMSK Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the high priority mission support kit (HPMSK) detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status followup military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have an HPMSK detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by HPMSK detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity HPMSK short and quantity on hand. Item table, HPMSK detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status follow-up MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed.

4–280

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4G43.2.5. Non-Airborne Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the non-airborne MRSP detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status follow-up military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail, and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have a non-airborne MRSP detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by non-airborne MRSP detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity non-airborne MRSP short, and quantity on hand. Item table, non-airborne MRSP detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status follow-up MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail, and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.6. IRSP Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN, organization (ORG) code, and shop code. It scans the in-place readiness spares package (IRSP) detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status follow-up military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have an IRSP detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by IRSP detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity IRSP short and quantity on hand. Item table, IRSP detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status follow-up MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail, and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.7. WCDO Sheet. Accepts parameters for SRAN. It scans the war consumable distribution objective (WCDO) detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship, status follow-up military standard requisitioning & issue procedures (MILSTRIP) detail, status ship detail and item table. It then retrieves all item records that have a WCDO detail assigned. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are group sorted by WCDO detail number, stock number, authorized quantity, quantity WCDO short, and quantity on hand. Item table, WCDO detail, due-out detail, due-in detail, status follow-up MILSTRIP detail, status ship detail and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. 4G43.2.8. Computed Fields. 4G43.2.8.1. Quantity Airborne MRSP Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.2. Quantity Airborne MRSP Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.8.3. Quantity HPMSK Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HANDAUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.4. Quantity HPMSK Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.8.5. Quantity MSK Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.6. Quantity MSK Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND)

4–281

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4G43.2.8.7. Quantity Non-Airborne MRSP Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.8. Quantity Non-Airborne MRSP Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.8.9. Quantity Special Spares Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HANDAUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.10. Quantity Special Spares Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.8.11. Quantity WCDO Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HANDAUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.12. Quantity WCDO Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITYQUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.8.13. Quantity WRM IRSP Excess = DECODE(GREATEST(QUANTITY ON HANDAUTHORIZED QUANTITY,0),0,0,QUANTITY ON HAND-AUTHORIZED QUANTITY) 4G43.2.8.14. Quantity WRM IRSP Short = DECODE(GREATEST(AUTHORIZED QUANTITY-DEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND,0),0,0,AUTHORIZED QUANTITYDEPLOYED QUANTITY-QUANTITY ON HAND) 4G43.2.9. Parameters. 4G43.2.9.1. SRAN. This will accept any valid SRAN. The SRAN may be typed in; if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. Selection may also be made by a single SRAN, group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided. 4G43.2.9.2. ORG code. This will accept any valid ORG code. The ORG code may be typed in; if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. Selection may also be made by a single ORG code, group of ORG codes or ALL ORG codes from the dropdown list provided. 4G43.2.9.3. Shop code. This will accept any valid shop code. The shop code may be typed in; if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. Selection may also be made by a single shop code, group of shop codes or ALL shop codes from the dropdown list provided. 4G43.3. Reference. See AFMAN 23-110, Volume 2, Part 2, Chapter 10 and Chapter 26. 4G43.4. Distribution. As requested.

4–282

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-44 RESERVED 4G44.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–283

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-45 RESERVED 4G45.1. Reserved For Future Use.

4–284

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–285 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-46 RESERVED 4G46. Reserved For Future Use.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-47 RESERVED 4G47. 4–286 . Reserved For Future Use.

1. 4–287 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-48 RESERVED 4G48. Reserved For Future Use.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-49 RESERVED 4G49. 4–288 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-50 RESERVED 4G50. 4–289 . Reserved For Future Use.

4–290 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-51 RESERVED 4G51.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-52 RESERVED 4G52.1. 4–291 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-53 RESERVED 4G53. 4–292 . Reserved For Future Use.1.

Reserved For Future Use.1. 4–293 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-54 RESERVED 4G54.

1. Reserved For Future Use. 4–294 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-55 RESERVED 4G55.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-56 RESERVED 4G56. 4–295 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-57 RESERVED 4G57. 4–296 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-58 RESERVED 4G58. 4–297 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

4–298 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-59 RESERVED 4G59. Reserved For Future Use.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–299 . Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-60 RESERVED 4G60.1.

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-61 RESERVED 4G61.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–300 .1.

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-62 RESERVED 4G62.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–301 .

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-63 RESERVED 4G63.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. 4–302 .

4–303 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-64 RESERVED 4G64.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-65 RESERVED 4G65. 4–304 .

1. 4–305 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-66 RESERVED 4G66. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-67 RESERVED 4G67. 4–306 .1.

4–307 . Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-68 RESERVED 4G68.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-69 RESERVED 4G69. Reserved For Future Use. 4–308 .

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-70 RESERVED 4G70.1. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–309 .

Reserved For Future Use. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-71 RESERVED 4G71.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–310 .1.

and then by transaction serial number. or ‘1V’.3. Records are displayed by type account code (B and E together). 4G72.3. then RY = Filler 1.1. ‘1T’.1. When TTPC = ‘1S’. Multiple SRAN entries are not allowed. When TRIC = ‘REC’.2. otherwise F2 = F2. SUPAD = SUPAD.2. This register then becomes an auditable document that can also be used for research purposes. As requested.2. otherwise DOLD = DOLD. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-72 CONSOLIDATED TRANSACTION HISTORY (CTH) REGISTER (R72) 4G72.2. Purpose. Computed Fields. Mandatory parameters are a valid SRAN. 4G72.3. 4G72.1. Supplementary Address (SUPAD). then RY = NULL (blank).2.2. When (TRIC = ‘1PU’ and TTPC = ‘7Y’) or (TRIC = ‘DOR’ and TTPC = ‘2A’ or ‘2C’).4.4. 4G72.1.1. Start Date (YYYYDDD format) and End Date (YYYY DDD format). 4G72. Part 4. then by stock number. 4G72. 4G72.4. then SUPAD = the first three positions of the SUPAD. When TRIC = ‘REC’ and TTPC = ‘1B’ and SUPAD is null (blank). ‘1U’. 4–311 . then by transaction date. Volume 2.3.1. Otherwise. then F2 is NULL (blank). Part 2. When TRIC = ‘REC’ and TTPC = ‘1B’ and SUPAD is not NULL (not blank). AFMAN 23-110. then SUPAD = three spaces concatenated with positions 5-7 of Filler 2 (if Filler 2 has a value).1. Parameters.1. Chapter 14.2.1.2. Filler 2 (F2).2.2.2.2. 4G72. 4G72. Program Logic.2.3.3.1.1. Chapter 18 and Volume 2.4. To produce a consolidated register of transaction histories from the CTH database for the period indicated in the heading. The primary purpose of the register is to provide a listing in transaction register format for satellites being re-homed to another base. 4G72. then DOLD = the FISCAL YEAR OBLIGATION.2.2. 4G72.2.1. 4G72. 4G72. Reason Why Code (RY). Distribution .2.1. Available parameters are SRAN (single SRAN). 4G72. Scans the CT_HISTORY records in the AFSCDB and selects records that meet the edit parameter values.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. RY = RY.1. Otherwise.1. Available References. 4G72.4. Start Date and End Date. Date of Last Demand (DOLD). When TRIC = ‘REC’ and TTPC = ‘1B’.

4–312 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-73 RESERVED 4G73. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.

Reserved For Future Use. 4–313 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-74 RESERVED 4G74.1.

2. 4G75. To provide a list of mobility equipment assets for use at base level and to compute percentages of assets on hand. A Sum is computed on each change of Document Number. Purpose.” The records are sorted by DOCUMENT Number and have page items that include SRAN. 4G75. ORG CODE.1. 4G75. OVER/SHORT QTY.4.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. 4G75. As requested. Grand Total In Use.2. Reference. Chapter 26.1. 4G75. Volume 2. This will accept any valid SRAN. Grand Total Deployed Quantity and Grand Total Over/Short Quantity.2. select using dropdown list provided or by manually typing in the organization code. 4G75.3.2. Program Logic. Scans Item_Table and Authorized_In_Use_Dtl tables and retrieves all items based upon parameter plus Use_Code of “A.2. Parameters. 4G75. Total Authorized Quantity. 4G75. Part 2. See AFMAN 23-110.2.1. WRM APPLICATION CODE.2. ORG Code and WRM Application. Computed Fields.2.1. TOTALS.2. This will accept any valid organization code. If single or multiple entries are needed. 4G75.2. 4G75.3. This will accept any valid WRM application code. select using dropdown list provided or by manually typing in the WRM application code. If single or multiple entries are needed. select using dropdown list provided or by manually typing in the SRAN.1. SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Distribution. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-75 MOBILITY EQUIPMENT REGISTER (R75) 4G75. This field is computed by adding the Deployed Quantity and Quantity on Hand minus the Authorized Quantity.1.2.2. Totals are provided for Total Line Items. 4–314 . If single or multiple entries are needed. ORG Code and WRM Application Type.

4–315 .1. Reserved For Future Use.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-76 RESERVED 4G76.

2. The SRAN and the ORG & SHOP code are displayed as page items.2. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4G-77 SHELF LIFE CONTROL LIST 4G77. select a single shelf life code. Volume 2.2. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs. As requested. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. Selected Shelf Life Code List Sheet. 4G77. 4G77.2. The SRAN and the shelf life code are displayed as page items.2.2. select a single SRAN. Part 2. 4G77. Shelf life code. they must be separated by a comma. a group of shelf life codes or all shelf life codes. Distribution. Computed Fields. Functional Check List Sheet. See AFMAN 23-110. To provide a listing of items in the Logistics Readiness Squadron/supply activity warehouse(s) that require inspection due to possible deterioration while on the shelf and a listing of items that require functional check before installation or issue.5. If multiple entries are typed. This parameter will accept any valid SRAN.2. SRAN. they must be separated by a comma. 4G77. If selecting from the dropdown list.2.1. Purpose. Accepts parameter for SRAN then scans the Item table and selects all item records having a shelf life code not equal to 0 (zero) and shelf life code not null for the SRAN or SRANs in the parameter.5. 4G77. Parameters. 4G77.4. The item table data is then displayed in stock number sequence. If selecting from the dropdown list.1. Accepts parameter for SRAN then scans the Item table and selects all item records having a Functional Check Flag Not Equal to 0 (zero) and Functional Check Flag NOT NULL for the SRAN or SRANs in the parameter.2. The SRAN and the shelf life code are displayed as page items.1. N/A 4G77. 4G77.5. The item table data is then displayed in ORG & SHOP sequence. The shelf life code may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. If multiple shelf life codes are typed. Accepts parameters for SRAN and shelf life code then scans the item table and selects item records that meet the input criteria. Reference.2.4.3. The item table data is then displayed in stock number sequence.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4G77. 4–316 . Shelf Life Code List Sheet. Program Logic .3. Chapter 10. This parameter will accept any valid one (1) position shelf life code. 4G77.

The program accepts parameters for SRAN. SRAN . 4H1.2. Purpose. Selection may also be made by a single SRAN.1. As Requested. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-1 AUTHORIZED IN-USE DETAIL ORG/SHOP COUNTS REPORT (DISC 001) 4H1. 4H1. Computed Fields. The SRAN may be typed in. authorized quantity and extended dollar value.2. N/A 4H1. group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided.2.1.2.1. Reference. ORG SHOP and Account Code fields are then displayed as page items with totals at the bottom. The SRAN.2.2.This will accept any valid SRAN. Program Logic. 4H1. Totals will be displayed for the on-hand quantity. then scans the Authorized In-Use Detail and retrieves selected records. 4–317 .2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. O/H QTY EXTENDED COST = QUANTITY ON HAND*UNIT PRICE (Quantity On-Hand multiplied by the Unit Price) 4H1.1. 4H1.3. Org’s and SRAN.1. This report will read all Authorized In-Use Details on file and provide a file of counts that can be printed or imported into Excel. Distribution. The files will include totals for the Org/Shop’s.4. AUTH QTY EXTENDED COST = AUTHORIZED QUANTITY*UNIT PRICE (Authorized Quantity multiplied by the Unit Price) 4H1. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. Parameters.

Invalid Dates Sheet.2. 4–318 . Provide managers at base/command level a tool to identify assets with an extended non-demand history. All sheets have two parameters that must be supplied: SRAN and retention months. match the SRAN parameter.3. Page item for the sheet is the ERRCD. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. This will accept one valid SRAN. Extended Non-Demands Sheet. match the SRAN parameter.2.2.3.4.ORGANIZATION CODE AND ORGANIZATION TITLE 4H2.4.2.2.2.1.2. an ERRCD of XB3 or XF3.3. Distribution.2. 4H2. Parameters. and have a DOLD or Date SPC 5 assigned greater than the number of months entered for retention parameter. 4H2. SRAN. a serviceable balance. a serviceable balance.4. RETENTION DATE . This will accept any whole number. MONTHS W/O DMDS – NBR OF MONTHS SINCE DOLD TO CURRENT DAY 4H2. Retention Months. As requested. Reference.1. They are used as selection criteria for all sheets. 4H2. 4H2. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-2 CONSUMABLE RETENTION REPORT (DISC 002) 4H2.4.2. Purpose.2. 4H2. Program Logic. 4H2.1. Computed Fields. N/A. 4H2. 4H2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The default value is 84 months.2.3. Scans the item table for records which have a budget code of 9.1. Scans the item table for records which have a budget code of 9. and have invalid DOLD and Date SPC assigned dates. an ERRCD of XB3 or XF3. 4H2. Specific information about the record to include any excess or adjusted level details is displayed.2.

SRAN . Computed Fields. Delivery destination and ORG cost center data are displayed. To provide a listing of all Delivery Destination records loaded in the Standard Base Supply System. See AFMAN 23-110. N/A 4H3. select a single SRAN. Distribution.2. The records are sorted by ORG code within SRAN and then Shop Code.2.2.This will accept any valid SRAN. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-3 DELIVERY DESTINATION LISTING (DISC 003) 4H3. 4H3. If selecting from the dropdown list. Purpose.1.4.4. Delivery Destination by Delivery Destination Code Sheet. Reference. If multiple entries are typed. 4H3. As requested. 4–319 . Delivery Destination and ORG Cost Center data are displayed. The records are sorted by delivery destination code within SRAN. Volume 2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4H3. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Part 2. a comma must separate them. Program Logic.2.3. It scans and retrieves selected records from the Delivery Destination and Organization Cost Center Records (OCCR). The SRAN is displayed as a page item. Parameters. Delivery Destination by Organization (ORG) Code Sheet. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. 4H3.3.1. 4H3.2. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided.2. It scans and retrieves selected records from the Delivery Destination and Organization Cost Center Records (OCCR). Chapter 2. 4H3. The SRAN is displayed as a page item. Accepts parameters for SRAN.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. N/A.1. 4H4. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided.2. select a single SRAN. 4H4. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs. Applies to all sheets. Purpose. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-4 DETAIL RECORD COUNTS REPORT (DISC 004) 4H4.3. The SRAN is displayed as a page item.2. Scans and displays the selected detail and provides count.2. 4–320 . Accepts parameters for SRAN. 4H4. Program Logic. The following sheets are available: Adjusted-Level-DetailRDO-Suspense-Detail Airborne-MRSP-Detail REM-Vehicles-Only-Detail Authorized-In-Use-Detail Serialized-Control-Detail Due-In-DetailShipment-Suspense-Detail Due-In-From-Maintenance-Detail Special-Spares-Detail Due-Out-Detail SPRAM-Detail EOQ-Consumption-Detail Status-FLP-MILSTRIP-Detail Excess-Report-Detail Status-Local-Purchase-Detail Item-Detail Status-Ship-Detail Master-Bench-Stock-Detail Supply-Point-Detail MICAP-Suspense-Detail Unserviceable-Detail MSK-Detail WRM-WCDO-Spares-Detail Non-Airborne-MRSP-Detail 4H4. Parameters.This will accept any valid SRAN. If selecting from the dropdown list. Computed Fields. If multiple entries are typed. 4H4. Distribution. As requested. Reference.1. Counts are data-point item aggregates contained within Discoverer.2. SRAN . a comma must separate them. To provide a report of the total number of records on the database for each type of detail loaded.4. Applies to all sheets.

Program Logic. Address by DODAAC Sheet. a comma must separate them. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-5 DODAACS BY DODAACS AND RID (DISC 005) 4H5.1. 4–321 .4. To provide listing of all Department of Defense Activity Address Code (DODAAC) Records loaded in the Standard Base Supply System (SBSS).1. It scans and retrieves selected records from the Shipping Destination record. Purpose. 4H5. Accepts parameters for SRAN. The records are sorted by Ship to SRAN. select a single SRAN.1. 4H5.1. N/A 4H5. 4H5.3. Parameters. SRAN . The records are sorted by Routing Identifier. It scans and retrieves selected records from the Shipping Destination record.1. Shipping Destination data is displayed. The SRAN is displayed as a page item.3. 4H5. Distribution. If multiple entries are typed. As requested.This will accept any valid SRAN.2. Shipping Destination data is displayed. N/A.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Computed Fields. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. The SRAN is displayed as a page item. Address by RID Sheet. 4H5.2. group of SRANs or ALL SRANs. Reference. If selecting from the dropdown list.

1. If multiple entries are typed. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs. 4H6. due-in. select a single SRAN. Due-Outs Firm with no FY obligation Sheet. It scans the due-in detail. Computed Fields. Item table. Records are sorted by stock number. and item table.1.2.3. Purpose.This will accept any valid SRAN.4.2. Part 2. It scans the due-out detail and item table. It then retrieves all due-out details that contain a valid due-in requisition number in the appropriate field but the due-in detail is not present. (Corresponding D/I is not loaded for the D/O). Item table and due-out detail information is displayed. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN. It scans the due-in detail.2. 4H6. *. Parameters. 8. If selecting from the dropdown list.2.5. they must be separated by a comma. Volume 2. 4H6. Item table. or $ Activity Code = X. and item table. due-out detail. It then retrieves due-out details with an urgency of need (UND) designator other than ‘C’ that do not have a due-in document number in the appropriate field. 0. or D NOTE: SRAN is displayed as a page item. As requested 4–322 . and due-out detail information is displayed. It then retrieves all due-in details that contain a valid due-out document number in the appropriate field but the due-out detail is not present. D/I’s marked for a D/O which is not present Sheet (Corresponding D/O is not loaded for the D/I). SRAN is displayed as a page item. E.4. Reference. N/A 4H6. 4H6. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Program Logic . R. It scans the due-out detail and item table. D/O’s not UND ‘C’ not marked for a D/I Sheet.2. 4H6. Distribution. D/O’s marked for a D/I which is not present Sheet. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are sorted by stock number. P.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. AFMAN 23-110. due-out detail. Records are sorted by stock number. J. Chapter 9. Item table and due-out detail information is displayed. due-in.2. It then retrieves due-out details meeting all of the following criteria: Firm Fiscal Year Obligation is “Null” Budget Code = 9. 4H6. 4H6. Provides listing of error conditions between Due-in and Due-out details. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-6 DUE-IN & DUE-OUT MISLINKED (DISC 006) 4H6. 4H6.6.3. Records are sorted by stock number. Accepts parameters for SRAN. and due-out detail information is displayed.2. SRAN . SRAN is displayed as a page item.2.

due-in. It scans the due-in detail.Accepts parameters for SRAN.5.2. due-out detail.” Bad status is defined as follow-up status counter “less than or equal to” the value entered in the parameter. RID. and item table. and RID. and item table. SRAN and supply status are displayed as page items. 4H7. Item table. and routing identifier (RID). status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. due-in. status ship detail. It then retrieves all due-in details that have bad status. SRAN and supply status are displayed as page items. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number. and item table.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. status ship detail. It scans the due-in detail. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number. and RID. D/I’s w/ D/O’s and No Status Sheet. Provides a listing of all due-in details that do not have a corresponding status follow-up military standard requisitioning and issue procedures (MILSTRIIP) detail. SRAN is displayed as a page item. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number.1. RID. RID. Bad status is defined as a follow-up status counter “less than or equal to” the value entered in the parameter. It then retrieves all due-in details.1. and status ship detail information is displayed. due-in.2. D/I’s w/ D/O’s and Bad Status Sheet . SRAN is displayed as a page item. and item table. and also do not have a corresponding status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. and do not have a corresponding status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. status ship detail. SRAN is displayed as a page item.2.4. D/I’s w/o D/O’s & Bad Status Sheet . D/I’s w/o D/O’s and No Status Sheet. Item table. Accepts parameters for SRAN.2. which do not have a linked due-out. status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-7 DUE-INS WITH NO STATUS OR DUE-INS WITH BAD STATUS (DISC 007) 4H7. status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. and supply status indicator. All D/Is & No Status Sheet .Accepts parameters for SRAN. status follow-up MILSTRIP. due-out detail. and have bad status. All D/I’s and Bad Status Sheet. which do not have a linked due-out. and item table. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number. Program Logic . due-out.2. It then retrieves all due-in details that do not have a corresponding status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. status follow-up MILSTRIP. and status ship detail information is displayed.Accepts parameters for SRAN. Accepts parameters for SRAN. and status ship detail information is displayed. which have a linked due-out. due-out. status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. and status ship detail information is displayed. It then retrieves all due-in details.6. 4H7. Item table. Item table. Bad status is defined as a follow-up status counter “less than or equal to” the value entered in the parameter. It then retrieves all due-in details. status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. and supply status indicator. status follow-up MILSTRIP. status ship detail. It then retrieves all due-in details.2.3. Item table. It scans the due-in detail.2. It scans the due-in detail. status ship detail. duein.2. due-out detail. and item table. 4H7. due-out. Accepts parameters for SRAN. It also selects status MILSTRIP details that have “Bad Status. 4H7. 4H7. which have a linked due-out. It scans the due-in detail. and supply status indicator. It scans the due-in detail. Purpose. Bad status is defined as a follow-up status counter “less than or equal to” the value 4–323 . status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. 4H7. status ship detail. and have bad status. due-out detail. 4H7. due-in. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number. and status ship detail information is displayed. status follow-up MILSTRIP. status follow-up MILSTRIP.

2.2. 4H7. This will accept any valid SRAN. group of RIDs or ALL RIDs from the dropdown list provided. Chapter 4 entered in the parameter. Supply Status Indicator.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4H7.quantity due in * item table. 4H7. SRAN and supply status are displayed as page items.8. Computed Fields. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them.3.2.3. Selection may also be made by a single RID.4. Distribution. group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided. As requested 4–324 . This will accept any status follow-up counter (99 or less).2. The counter may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. Chapter 9. only numerical values are valid. due-in.2. SRAN. The RID may be typed in.8. This will accept any valid RID.unit price 4H7. Volume 2. Reference. Although other values are present in the dropdown list.8. Records are sorted by RID and then due-in date serial number. 4H7. due-out. See AFMAN 23-110. and status ship detail information is displayed. Selection may also be made by a single SRAN.2. 4H7. status follow-up MILSTRIP. 4H7. Item table. RID (Routing Identifier).7. Parameters. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. Part 2. The SRAN may be typed in.8. Multiple entries are not permitted. Extended Cost = due-in detail.1.

4H8. Distribution.1. Volume 2.2. 4H8.3. Shop code. 4H8. If multiple entries are typed. SRAN and RID are displayed as page items. Accepts parameters for SRAN. shop code.3.4. status ship detail.2. status follow-up MILSTRIP.2. and item table. This query is very similar to the R31. Due-Out Report Sheet. urgency of justification code (UJC). The UJC may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. due-in. 4H8. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them.due-out quantity * item table. This will accept any valid ORG. due-out. Chapter 9. ORG (Organization) code. The RID may be typed in. Selection may also be made by a single ORG. It then retrieves all due-out details. This will accept any valid RID. 4H8. Provides a listing of all due-out details. The shop code may be typed in. status local purchase detail. due-out detail. and item table.4. and status ship detail information is displayed. Due-out Extended Price = due-out detail. Records are sorted by due-out document number. Part 2. It scans the due-in detail.2.2.4.unit price. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. organization (ORG) code. Parameters. This will accept any valid SRAN.2. organization (ORG) code. Records are sorted by due-out document number. status local purchase detail. and urgency of justification code (UJC). group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided. a group of UJCs or ALL UJCs.2. due-out detail.4. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. select a single UJC. status follow-up MILSTRIP detail. The SRAN may be typed in.2. UJC. group of RIDs or ALL RIDs from the dropdown list provided. It then retrieves all due-out details that have a corresponding due-in detail. See AFMAN 23-110. a comma must separate them. 4H8. Program Logic. Reference. This will accept any valid UJC.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. Item table. Computed Fields. Item table. RID. Selection may also be made by a single SRAN.4. shop code.4. SRAN.2. If selecting from the dropdown list. due-out. group of ORGs or ALL ORGs from the dropdown list provided. 4H8. Requisitioned Due-Outs Sheet. and routing identifier (RID).3. 4H8. Accepts parameters for SRAN. Selection may also be made by a single RID.2. 4H8. group of shop codes or ALL shop codes from the dropdown list provided.2.2. This will accept any valid shop code. SRAN is displayed as a page item. 4H8. Selection may also be made by a single shop code.4. 4H8.1. 4H8. It scans the due-in detail.1. Purpose. As requested. 4–325 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-8 DUE-OUT REPORT (DISC 008) 4H8. and due-in detail information is displayed. The ORG may be typed in.4.

if both entries are typed a comma must separate them. It scans the due-out detail.2. This will accept any valid SRAN. 4H9.2. Accepts parameters for SRAN and type of due-out (memo or firm). Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-9 ITEM RECORDS WITH BALANCES AND DUE-OUTS (DISC 009) 4H9. Item table.” The MFF may be typed in. due-out detail.2.1.2. 4–326 . Reference. Selection may also be made by a single MFF. Part 2.1. or both MFFs from the dropdown list provided. interchangeable and substitute group (I&SG) stock number relationship. See AFMAN 23-110. Distribution. MFF (Memo/Firm Flag). 4H9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4H9. if multiple entries are typed a comma must separate them. This will accept either a “1” or “0.2. Purpose. Volume 2. SRAN and MFF (Memo/Firm Flag) are displayed as page items. As requested.4. The SRAN may be typed in. Records are sorted by stock number. N/A 4H9.3. and item table. Program Logic. Chapter 9. and I&SG stock number relationship information are displayed. Selection may also be made by a single SRAN.2. 4H9. Computed Fields. Parameters. SRAN. It then retrieves all item records that have a serviceable balance and also have an established due-out. Provides a listing of all item records that have a serviceable balance and also have a due-out established. group of SRANs or ALL SRANs from the dropdown list provided.1.2.2.2. 4H9. 4H9.

Chapter 10. Program Logic. warehouse number and warehouse stockroom are displayed as Page Items.1.2. serviceable balances. Parameters.2. Computed Fields. 4H10. Reference. Volume 2. Part 2. Purpose. If selecting from the dropdown list. select a single SRAN. If multiple entries are typed. 4H10.This will accept any valid SRAN.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. extended costs. 4H10. Totals.1. As requested.2. Distribution. they must be separated by a comma. The SRAN.4. Provide a listing of all records with a warehouse location and to provide a file of counts. The SRAN may be typed in or selected from the dropdown list provided. and line items are displayed.1. 4H10. See AFMAN 23-110. SRAN .1. Warehouse bin rows. Scans item table and retrieves the selected records with a warehouse location. warehouse horizontal bin rows. 4H10.3.2.1. The files will be broken down to the 7th position of the warehouse location. Accepts parameter for the SRAN. and horizontal bin row. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4H-10 WAREHOUSE LOCATION COUNTS REPORT (DISC 010) 4H10. a group of SRANs or ALL SRANs. Extended Cost = Unit Price * Serviceable balance 4H10. 4H10. The records are then sorted by warehouse bin rows and warehouse horizontal bin rows. bin row. 4–327 . Totals are displayed for each change of stockroom.2.

1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Reserved for Future Use . 4–328 . Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4I-1 RESERVED 4I1.

4J1.3. STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL. SPECIAL_CONTROL. Condition(s): Selects MILSTRIP follow-up status details without a matching due-in detail and any additional user-defined parameters. Purpose. and SRAN_REF_TABLE.4.1. and 103 (DOCUMENT-NBR) records on the legacy system.3.1. Tab 3 (103-FLP DN QLP File). If a matching due-in does not exist.3. 4J1. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.2. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. This is the listing of legacy 103-document number images that are required to be deleted using QLP Update. 4J1. 4J1. 4–329 . Tab 1 (FLP List). The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-1 STATUS FLP MILSTRIP / WITHOUT DUE-IN (ACC102) 4J1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. (for status ship details the supplementary address must also not be equal to "TARREC") a listing is produced and a delete image is written in a data file format to delete the “orphan” 208 (STATUS-FLP-MILSTRIP-DETAIL). Program Logic.3. Secondary tables include the ITEM_TABLE. This program does not require an enterprise table. 4J1. Condition(s): Selects MILSTRIP follow-up status details without a matching due-in detail and any additional user-defined parameters. 211 (STATUS-SHIP-DETAIL). Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). This is the listing of legacy MILSTRIP follow-up status document numbers that are required to be deleted. Tab 2 (FLP DN QLP File). This is the listing of legacy MILSTRIP follow-up status document numbers that are required to be deleted using QLP Update. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds several listings based on user input parameters.2.2.3. 4J1. and status document number. SRAN. To provide a listing to identify all MILSTRIP follow-up status and shipment status details with no matching due-in.2.1. and status document number. The program compares status details (except local purchase) against due-in details. SRAN. The data for this report was compiled using the following criteria: 4J1. and status document number. The primary tables used to build this report are the DUE_IN_DTL. stock record account number (SRAN). 4J1. Condition(s): Selects MILSTRIP follow-up status details without a matching due-in detail and any additional user-defined parameters. Totals: The total number of MILSTRIP follow-up status document numbers identified for deletion are counted (COUNT). Tab 4 (SS List). and STATUS_SHIP_DTL.2.3.

4J1.) 4J1. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects status ship details (provided the supplementary address is not equal to "TARREC"). This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Totals: The total number of status ship document numbers identified for deletion are counted (COUNT). Data File Formats.5. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.1. and status ship document number.2. Condition(s): Selects status ship details without a matching due-in detail (provided the supplementary address is not equal to "TARREC"). and any additional user-defined parameters. SRAN. 4J1.6. and any additional user-defined parameters.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Parameters.5. SRAN. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. 4J1. Optional: None. Mandatory: 4J1. 4J1.6. 4J1. without a matching due-in detail and any additional user-defined parameters. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. and status ship document number. Condition(s): Selects status ship details without a matching due-in detail (provided the supplementary address is not equal to "TARREC"). (Note: It is strongly recommended that you only input a single SRAN or SRANs with a “Host-Satellite” relationship.6. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. 4J1. This is the listing of legacy 103-document number images that are required to be deleted using QLP Update. 4J1.3. Tab 5 (SS DN QLP File).1. This is the listing of legacy status ship document number images that are required to be deleted using QLP Update. This is the listing of legacy status ship document numbers that are required to be deleted. SRAN.1. Computed Fields. multiple SRANs would be impossible to tell apart in the QLP Update files because the SRAN field is not part of the file). Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.DOC_DATE_SERIAL_NBR concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) 4–330 . and status ship document number.5.5. Due to legacy input formats.5.4.1. Tab 6 (103-SS DN QLP File). The query must have at least one SRAN entry. None. SRAN.3. Tab 2 (FLP DN QLP FILE): NO POS POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1-69 69 Constant data and MILSTRIP follow-up status document number REMARKS/NOTES ‘(a single quote) concatenated to ‘DELETE STATUS-FLPMILSTRIP-DETAIL WHERE 208-DOCUMENT-NBR = ‘ concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) concatenated to STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL.

Tab 3 (103-FLP DN QLP FILE): NO POS POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1-57 57 Constant data and MILSTRIP follow-up status document number REMARKS/NOTES ‘(a single quote) concatenated to ‘DELETE DOCUMENT-NBR WHERE 103-DOCUMENT-NBR = ‘ concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) concatenated to SYS_DESIG concatenated to STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL. This requires a computer operations database manager with QLP update access to complete the required action.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J1. The legacy SURGE program sends summary data to the console type-out along with display messages.7. 4–331 . 4J1. Tab 5 (SS DN QLP FILE): NO POS POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1-61 61 Constant data and status ship document number REMARKS/NOTES ‘(a single quote) concatenated to ‘DELETE STATUS-SHIPDETAIL WHERE 211-DOCUMENT-NBR = ‘ concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) concatenated to STATUS_SHIP_DTL.DOC_DATE_ SERIAL_NBR concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) 4J1.6.2.4.DOC_DATE_SERIAL_NBR concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) 4J1.1. Although Discoverer doesn’t have that capability.3.7.DOC_DATE_ SERIAL_NBR concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) 4J1.7.7. The data files created need to be processed with QLP Update. As a workaround.6.6. Discoverer does not have the ability to use a legacy 103-document number to build the QLP statements because that record does not exist in the AFSCDB.2. Tab 6 (103-SS DN QLP FILE): NO POS POS FIELD DESIGNATION 1-57 57 Constant data and status ship document number REMARKS/NOTES ‘(a single quote) concatenated to ‘DELETE DOCUMENT-NBR WHERE 103-DOCUMENT-NBR = ‘ concatenated to ‘ (a single quote) concatenated to SYS_DESIG concatenated to STATUS_SHIP_DTL.3. the 208 (STATUS_FLP_MILSTRIP_DTL) and 211 (STATUS_SHIP_DTL) document numbers are used. Chapter 4 4J1. 4J1. Special Instructions. a summary count of these images (Tabs 1 and 4) is provided in its place.

Chapter 4 Since there is a 103 record for every document number that exists in the legacy system this is a viable strategy.9. Reserved for future use. As requested.10. 4J1. Reference. Distribution. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. 4J1. Sample Report/Letter. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement.8. 4–332 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J1.

1. due-in date serial number. All activity code ‘C’ DIFM details meeting the above criteria are selected. ‘1’. the serviceable DIFM detail records for this enterprise table are scanned as follows: First two positions of the ERRCD must equal ‘XD’.3. REPAIR_CYCLE.3. Sort(s): Sort by PFMR code.2. ‘4’).1. shop code. and SRD.1. The enterprise table requires data from 10 tables and one view. Paging item is the report date (taken from the TH_DMS_DATE_901 field. The listings. 4–333 . and no obligation. In general terms. 4J2. and Major Command (MAJCOM) personnel with a dollar value of budget code 8 DIFM items by DIFM status code. Program Logic.2. and SRAN_REF_VW.2. 4J2.1. Secondary tables include t h e B A S E _ C O N S TA N T S _ 1 . Budget code must equal ‘8’. ‘2’. Condition(s): None. Tab 2 (Option 1). the DIFM status flag must be in (‘0’.2. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_RSD_DIFM_VALUE table and build several listings and data files based on user input parameters. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-2 REPARABLE SUPPORT DIVISION (RSD) DIFM REPORT (ACC200) 4J2.3. The exchange price and the markup price are multiplied by the quantity due-in to obtain the enterprise table EXTENDED_EXCHANGE_PRICE and EXTENDED_MARKUP_PRICE values. For activity code other than ‘C’. ORG_COST_CENTER_100_999. The primary table used to build the enterprise table is the DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE_DTL. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2.3. PROJECT_FUNDS_MGMT. Purpose. Total dollar values are computed by DIFM status code for both ‘AWP’ and non-AWP assets.2. SPECIAL_CONTROL. 4J2. ORG_COST_CENTER. 4J2. C O S T _ TA B L E .3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. using the exchange price. 4J2. Year of obligation for the DIFM due-out is also broken out by current fiscal year (FY). Tab 3 (Option 1 DIFM NO DO). 4J2. 4J2. D U E _ O U T _ D T L .1. Sort(s): Sort by column headings. Global Logistics Support Center (GLSC) materiel management personnel. data files.3. I T E M _ TA B L E . previous FY.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. organization code. and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.2. 4J2. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J2. To provide Logistics Readiness Squadron (LRS) personnel. Tab 1 (Glossary).2. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).

²‘2’: Sort by organization code.3. 4–334 . number of chargeable status days (descending). organization code.3. ²‘3’: Sort by total status days. ²‘7’: Sort by number of AWP days (descending). organization code. 4J2. Paging items are the report date (taken from the TH_DMS_DATE_901 field). shop code. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2. and SRD. shop code. and duein date serial number. organization code. shop code. and due-in date serial number. Sort(s): Sort by PFMR code.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. There are no paging items. ²‘9’: Sort by DIFM status flag.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Paging items are the report date (taken from the TH_DMS_DATE_901 field). 4J2. organization code. SRAN. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2. Tab 4 (Option 1 Totals by PFMR). ²‘5’: Sort by number of chargeable status days (descending). 4J2. 4J2. ²‘6’: Sort by DIFM location. shop code. ²‘8’: Sort by DIFM location. Tab 6 (Option 3). Sort(s): Sort by PFMR code. SRAN.3. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2..6. and due-in date serial number. Tab 7 (Totals). shop code. SRAN.3. organization code. number of chargeable status days (descending). shop code. organization code. and due-in date serial number. Paging items are the report date (taken from the TH_DMS_DATE_901 field). and due-in date serial number. and system designator. and due-in date serial number. Sort(s): Tab 5 (Option 2) has nine sorts the user may select from through parameter input.7. due-in date serial number. Tab 5 (Option 2). and due-in date serial number. Sort(s): Sort by PFMR code and document number. ²‘4’: Sort by number of issue days (descending).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2.5. and system designator. organization code. and due-in date serial number. DIFM status flag.4. They are as follows: ²‘1’: Sort by PFMR code. organization code. organization code. and AWP_NONAWP indicator. shop code. and due-in date serial number. shop code. and system designator. shop code. shop code.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.

4.5. If the DIFM detail with a DIFM status flag of ‘1’ doesn’t have a matching due-out document number. Sort(s): Sort by system designator. Sort(s): Sort by system designator.3. PFMR code. 4J2. this value is computed using only NBR_AWP Days. Populated from the enterprise table value ‘NBR_STAT_DAYS’.8. If the value is ‘111’ it is converted to ‘0’. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items.4.’TOC’) then this value is computed using the formula (NBR_ISSUE_DAYS – (NBR_AWP_DAYS + DELAYED_OTHER_DAYS) – NBR_NUM_ DAYS). NBR OF DAYS SINCE DOLC. If the DIFM status code is in (‘CTR’. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2. Tab 8 (DIFM Data File). If the end value in either formula is less than zero a value of ‘0’ is assigned.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. and organization code. ISS. 4J2. PFMR code. ‘C’) then this value is computed using the formula (NBR_AWP_DAYS + NBR_NUM_DAYS). Computed Fields. 4J2. this value is computed using the formula (NBR_ISSUE_DAYS . Otherwise. 4J2.4. If the value is ‘99’ it is converted to ‘100’.4. Otherwise. Populated from the enterprise table value ‘NBR_CHARG_STAT_DAYS’.3. the standard FY obligation code applies and used to populate the applicable column of the report. Populated from the enterprise table value ‘NBR_NUM_DAYS’.(NBR_AWP_DAYS + DELAYED_OTHER_DAYS)).4. CHRG. If any of the dates in the formula fall outside a normal julian date range or the grand total is a negative number a value of ‘0’ is assigned. Populated from the enterprise table value ‘NBR_AWP_DAYS’. This value is computed using the formula (REQUISITION_DATE – DATE_OF_LAST_CHANGE). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2. ‘TCG’.1. FY OBLIGATION. and organization code. This value is computed using the formula (REQUISITION_DATE – ISU_DOR_DATE (positions 4-7)). this field gets populated as ‘NO’. If the Percent Base Repair (PBR) value is null then it is converted to ‘NOR’.6.4. If the activity code <> ‘S’ the number of status days is computed using the formula (REQUISITION_DATE – 4–335 . 4J2. Since the output is a data file. Otherwise. Paging items are the SRAN and system designator. 4J2.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. PBR. 4J2. 4J2. If the ISU_DOR_DATE = ‘0’ the value is ‘0’. TOT. If the last position of the current DIFM status code = ‘P’ and position one is not in (‘F’. AWP. Populated from the enterprise table value ‘NBR_ISSUE_DAYS’.4. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. If the value computed is less than zero a value of ‘0’ is used.4. Otherwise. Sort(s): Sort by PFMR code.3. the standard PBR value applies and used to populate the applicable column of the report. ‘PDM’.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.9. 4J2. 4J2. Since the output is a data file.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. If any of the dates in the formula fall outside a normal julian date range or the grand total is a negative number a value of ‘0’ is assigned. Tab 9 (Data File). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J2.7.4.

). Multiple PFMR entries (if used) must be separated by a comma.1. Optional: 4J2. This field will be edited as a single numeric character string. DAYSOLD. (Note: This parameter only applies to Tab 5 (Option 2)).1. This is the number of days the DIFM detail must exceed in order to meet the criteria for this report. PFMR. 4J2. If the activity code = ‘S’ the number of status days is computed using the formula (REQUISITION_DATE – ISU_DOR_DATE (positions 4-7). Multiple ORG entries (if used) must be separated by a comma. 4J2. SRAN. 4J2. If the ORG parameter is not used. Chapter 4 DUE_IN_DATE_SERIAL_NBR (positions 1-4)). SORT.1.5. If this field is left blank it will select all ORGs. The user must input a DAYSOLD value. This field will be edited as a whole number. The query must have a SRAN entry. Data File Formats.1.2. 4J2. If the PFMR parameter is not used.4. (Note: This parameter only applies to Tab 5 (Option 2)). ORG. 4J2. the user must input at least one ORG.2. Tab 8 (DIFM Data File): (Note: All data lengths are space or zero filled to provide a standard data length per record type. the user must input at least one PFMR. Parameters. EXTCOST.2. This field will be edited as a whole number. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. The user must input a EXTCOST value. Mandatory: 4J2.) 4J2.5. (Note: This parameter only applies to Tab 5 (Option 2)).AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5.6.1. no decimals and no dollar signs. NO POS 15 14 1 3 3 16 3 POS 1-15 16-29 30 31-33 34-36 37-52 53-55 FIELD DESIGNATION Stock Number Document Number DIFM Status Flag Current DIFM Status Code SRD Organization Title PFMR Code REMARKS/NOTES First 16 positions 4–336 .5. (Note: This parameter only applies to Tab 5 (Option 2)).3.1.5. This is the amount the extended cost must be greater than or equal to in order to meet the criteria for this report.5. If this field is left blank it will select all PFMRs.5.1.1.5.2.5.2. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. If any of the dates in either formula fall outside a normal julian date range or the grand total is a negative number a value of ‘0’ is assigned. 4J2.6. (Note: This parameter only applies to Tab 5 (Option 2)). The user must select a SORT. 4J2. 4J2.

2.) NO POS 3 4 1 2 15 3 14 POS 1-3 4-7 8 9-10 11-25 26-28 29-42 FIELD DESIGNATION PFMR Code Blank DIFM Status Flag Blank Stock Number Blank Document Number REMARKS/NOTES 4–337 .6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Tab 9 (Data File): (Note: All data lengths are space or zero filled to provide a standard data length per record type. Chapter 4 NO POS 13 13 5 2 3 2 3 2 19 13 5 5 5 5 5 5 3 4 5 23 4 1 POS 56-68 69-81 82-86 87-88 89-91 92-93 94-96 97-98 99-117 118-130 131-135 136-140 141-145 146-150 151-155 156-160 161-163 164-167 168-172 173-195 196-199 200 FIELD DESIGNATION CFY Fund Balance (Supply) Exchange Price DIFM Quantity Due-in Blank DIFM Location Blank Percent Base Repair System Designator Nomenclature Markup Price Number of Chargeable Status Days Number of Status Days Blank Number of AWP Days Number of Issue Days Blank Previous DIFM Status ISU DOR Date Date of Last Change Blank Due-out Date Level Of Maintenance REMARKS/NOTES First 19 positions Positions 4-7 4J2.

The SBSS can have uninitialized data in the 203-DELAYED-OTHER-DAYS and 203-AWPDAYS which is represented as the number “16416”. Special Instructions.1. The legacy SURGE program has a major discrepancy as it computes the chargeable status days. Chapter 4 NO POS 1 5 3 3 2 3 5 3 1 3 2 3 2 5 2 4 2 4 2 4 3 13 3 13 2 34 2 27 2 POS 43 44-48 49-51 52-54 55-56 57-59 60-64 65-67 68 69-71 72-73 74-76 77-78 79-83 84-85 86-89 90-91 92-95 96-97 98-101 102-104 105-117 118-120 121-133 134-135 136-169 170-171 172-198 199-200 FIELD DESIGNATION Blank DIFM Quantity Due-in Blank Current DIFM Status Code Blank Previous DIFM Status Blank SRD Blank DIFM Location Blank Percent Base Repair Blank Due-out Date Blank Number of Issue Days Blank Number of AWP Days Blank Number of Chargeable Status Days Blank Extended Exchange Price Blank Markup Price Blank Nomenclature Blank Date of Last Change Blank REMARKS/NOTES ‘NOMENCLATURE = ‘ concatenated to first 19 positions of nomenclature ‘NBR OF DAYS SINCE DOLC: ‘ concatenated to Date of Last Change 4J2.7. 4J2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.7. This value should actually be zero in these cir- 4–338 .

7.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J2. 4J2. User will now directly input the parameters and have full knowledge of what information was requested.7. Once fielded as a duplicate to the current SBSS program. 4J2.7. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. which the SURGE converts to 0 The actual computation should be: 128 – (0+0) = 128. 4J2. Chapter 4 cumstances. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. so lines 1 and 2 of the SBSS version are line one of the Discoverer version. The legacy SURGE populates the phrase ‘AWP DETAILS WERE NOT LISTED PER PARAMETER CARD’ as a result of user input.5. These items do not migrate to the AFSCDB because the DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE table requires the organization record to be loaded before the DIFM record will load. User can always select from the drop-down list of valid PFMRs which will prevent this scenario from happening. 4J2.7. This will not be duplicated in Discoverer. The SURGE does NOT convert the value. but subtracts the sum of these two fields from the Issue Days computation resulting in a negative number.3.9. The data file format has changed. For example: Issue Days computes to 128 days (current date minus the 203-ISU-DOR-DATE) 203-AWP-DAYS = 0 203-DELAYED-OTHER-DAYS = 16416 (uninitialized value. This will not be duplicated in Discoverer.6. Distribution. a future enhancement will be requested by ELSG to do an internal computation to change the “16416” value to zero for these columns of data.4. These DIFM details are identified in the error logs during the AFSCDB migration. The new format will be a major change if a program reads the data file to parse it out for other programs. this is beyond the capability of Discoverer so the end user (or designated representative) will now be required to process/download this file and FTP to another location (if needed). The legacy SURGE lists DIFM items with the phrase “ORG NOT LOADED” but this will not be duplicated in Discoverer. The legacy SURGE output file is hard-coded to FTP to HQ ACC.8. usually as a result of user input in the parameter card. The legacy SURGE would print part of the record on 2 separate lines. Reference. The negative number is then converted to zero and displayed in the SURGE. 4J2. should be 0) 128 – (0+16416) = -16288. Discoverer can only print once per line of data. However. As requested. lines 3 and 4 of the SBSS version are Discoverer line 2.2.7. etc. 4–339 . 4J2. The legacy SURGE populates the phrase ‘ORG NOT LOADED’ in the TITLE heading of the report when bad PFMRs are encountered.

2. or the date of the first DFM change. and the TIN_DATE was null at that time.1. Tab 1 (Glossary). 4J3. Purpose. Program Logic. The start date will always be counted as one day. and the ISU_DOR_DATE is null. Tab 2 (Daily).3. The time will be calculated by days into six buckets.3.2. ITEM_TABLE. 4J3. post-repair delay. REPAIR_CYCLE. Since TRANSACTION_HISTORY is the primary table used for this report.3. and ICBM maintenance awaiting installation. Active DIFM detail records continue to have the various “buckets of time” (i. 4J3.2. 4J3.1. The primary table used to build the enterprise table is the TRANSACTION_HISTORY. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-3 REPAIR CYCLE EFFICIENCY REPORT (ACC203) 4J3.2. etc) updated until meeting the conditions for a closed record. pre-repair delay. Sort(s): Sort by column headings.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J3. and SRAN_REF_TABLE. ‘ISU’. and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.2. CURRENT_DIFM_STATUS_CODE. To provide MAJCOM and base level personnel with repair time estimates for Materiel Support Division (MSD) DIFM items. whichever is first.2. Only the last DIFM status code will be used to compute each “bucket”.e. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_RC_EFFICIENCY table and build a daily listing or monthly data file based on user input parameters. 4J3. Condition(s): None. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). This report tracks MSD DIFM items from the time of issue to the time of turn-in.3. Secondary tables include the COST_TABLE. Any records meeting those conditions will have the ISU_DOR_DATE set equal to the transaction history requisition date. Type Transaction Phrase Code (TTPC) is equal to ‘1A’.2.2. there is an additional daily check for missing active DIFM detail records caused by failed or skipped migrations. Active DIFM detail records are closed when the TRIC is equal to TIN. 4J3. repair. PREVIOUS_DIFM_STATUS. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J3. 4–340 .2.1. Transaction Identification Code (TRIC) for all stock numbers must be equal to (‘DUO’. DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE_DTL. Multiple changes of the DIFM status code on the same day will not be tracked.1. contract maintenance. 4J3.2. data file. ‘2U’). 4J3. ‘MSI’) and TRANSACTION_PHRASE_CODE must equal ‘2P’. the TTPC is equal to (‘2M’.3. ‘2O’.2. The “clock” representing the time in each “bucket” will start on the day the part is released from the Logistics Readiness Squadron/Supply Activity. Active DIFM detail records are then updated when the TRIC is equal to DOR. awaiting parts.2. The listing.

SORT (Tab 2). If this field is left blank it will select SRD. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.6.3.1. Userdefined sort options include SRD (SRAN. Sort(s): Internal sort so that the header record is always the first record. and REP (SRAN. part. This field will be edited as a three-digit character string.1. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. ex: 2010-04). SRD). part. This field is the sum of days for the PRE_DELAY. any additional user-defined parameters. LOM (SRAN. Multiple SORT entries are not allowed. Data File Formats.2 (including sub-paragraphs) for active DIFM detail records. stock number. and TIN_DATE year and month equal to the user-defined month parameter.5.1.5. 4J3.4.1. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J3.1.5.5. Multiple entries are not allowed. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. Multiple SRAN entries are not allowed. REP_DELAY. Format is YYYY-MM. SRD is the default sort. level of maintenance).5. Parameters. SRAN (Tab 2).6. 4J3.1. HOST SRAN (Tab 3). part. part.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5. Multiple HOST SRAN entries are not allowed. 4J3. The query must have a SRAN entry. 4J3. user-defined sort parameter. and also selects closed DIFM detail records if TIN_DATE is blank or for the current month.1. Optional: None. The query must have a SORT entry. Computed Fields.3. NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION POS REMARKS/NOTES 4–341 . 4J3. Mandatory: 4J3. part. Tab 3 (EOM Data File). Since the output is a data file.3. Record Number 1 (Header record for file).1.2 (including sub-paragraphs) for closed DIFM detail records.5. ORG (SRAN. 4J3.2. MONTH (Tab 3).4. This field will be edited as a six-digit-numeric character string. AWP. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. 4J3. The query must have a HOST SRAN entry. TOTAL (Applies to Tab 2).) 4J3. organization code). Tab 3 (EOM Data File): 4J3. 4J3.1.2. POST_DELAY.4.6.1. The query must have a MONTH entry. repair organization/shop code). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J3. and ZCP_ZUS details. 4J3. 4J3. and document number. any additional user-defined parameters. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. CTR_PDM.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 1-24 25-49 50-61 62-72 24 25 12 11 Header Title Base Name Header Phrase System Date Constant ‘ACC203 VER 6.43 BASE: ’ Single space before/after base name Constant ‘ RUN DATE: ’ Formatted as ‘DD MON YYYY’

4J3.6.1.2. Record Number 2 (Detail record for closed DIFM details for the selected month). NO POS 4 13 3 13

POS 1-4 5-17 18-20 21-33

FIELD DESIGNATION As of Date Blank Standard Reporting Designator Stock Number

REMARKS/NOTES Formatted as ‘YYDD’

34-52 53-57 58-64 65-71 72-78 79-85 86-92 93-99 100-121 122 123-136 137-145 146 147-157 158-161 162-165 166-169 170-173 174 175-176

19 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 22 1 14 9 1 11 4 4 4 4 1 2

Nomenclature DIFM Quantity Due-in Pre-Delay Days AWP Days Repair Delay Days Post-Delay Days CTR-PDM Days ZCP-ZUS Days Blank Tex Code DIFM Document Number Turn-in Date and Serial Number Action Taken Code Unit Price (Exchange price for budget code ‘8’ assets) ISU/DOR Date Backorder Date Turn-in Date SRAN Level of Maintenance Code MAJCOM Code

Matches the legacy SURGE so there is no space allocated for the last two possible positions (if they exist) for ‘L’ & ‘P’ numbers First 19 positions

Turn-in date formatted as ‘YDDD’

Formatted as ‘YDDD’ Formatted as ‘YDDD’ Formatted as ‘YDDD’

4–342

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4J3.7. Special Instructions. 4J3.7.1. There is no primary option (like existed in the legacy SURGE) to update changes between long days (multiple calendar days for a single business day). 4J3.7.2. New DIFM detail records (for a date that has already passéd) may appear on the listing if the same report parameters are processed at a later point in time. The legacy SURGE report maintains historical records based on transactions. If the transaction was not recorded by the legacy SURGE on the day that it happened, it is not managed by the program. 4J3.7.3. The legacy output file is hard-coded to FTP to various sites. However, this is beyond the capability of Discoverer so the end user (or designated representative) will now be required to process/download this file and FTP to another location (if needed). 4J3.8. Reference. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. 4J3.9. Distribution. As requested.

4–343

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-4 COMBAT ORIENTED SUPPLY ORGANIZATION (COSO) EFFECTIVENESS REPORT (ACC214) 4J4.1. Purpose. To provide a management tool for validating the support provided by COSO warehouses (i.e. Aircraft Parts Store (APS) and/or Flight Service Center (FSC)). This report includes a listing of items ordered by aircraft maintenance activities but currently not stocked in the APS or FSC. It also includes stockage/storage effectiveness rates based on user-defined parameters for organization codes and warehouses. The assets are stratified by both economic order quantity (EOQ) and reparable assets and there is both a daily and monthly option of this report. When managers review the listing(s) and a firm decision is made not to move the property to the applicable COSO warehouse, action should be taken to load application code ‘NO’ to the item record. MAJCOMs and Logistics Readiness Squadrons/Supply Activities may assign additional codes. However, only application codes ‘N?’ (where ‘?’ is a wildcard), ‘XX’, ‘X3’, ‘X6’, and ‘Y2’ are considered COSO assets when computing stockage/storage rates. 4J4.2. Program Logic. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT table and build several listings based on user input parameters. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J4.2.1. The primary table used to build the enterprise table is the TRANSACTION_HISTORY. Secondary tables include the ITEM_TABLE, ORG_COST_CENTER, SPECIAL_CONTROL, and SRAN_REF_TABLE. 4J4.2.1.1. In general terms, the transaction history records for this enterprise table are scanned as follows: TRIC must be in (‘DUO’, ‘ISU’, ‘MSI’). System designator must be equal to ‘01’ with one additional SRAN (FB4817) included since it was the only satellite account running this report at the time of development. TTPCs for ISU/MSI transactions must be in (‘1A’, ’1C’, ’1E’, ’1G’, ’1I’, ’1O’, ’1Q’, ’2I’, ’2K’, ’3P’, ’3Q’, ’5C’, ’5E’, ’5I’, ’6C’, ’6J’, ’6N’) and TTPCs for DUO transactions must be in (‘2D’, ’4W’). Activity codes for due-outs must be in (‘B’, ’J’, ’R’, ’S’, ’U’, ’X’). Transactions are bypassed when IEX is equal to ‘E’ or ’K’. Transactions are bypassed when Type Account Code is equal to ‘K’ or ’P’. Transactions are bypassed when SRD is equal to ‘ZZZ’ unless the second position of the UJC is equal to ‘R’. Transactions are bypassed when the shop code is equal to ‘TC’ or ‘TO’. 4J4.2.1.2. For the monthly option of this report, a current (defined as date of last migration) warehouse location and application code check is conducted and compared against the user-defined COSO warehouses. If the stock number is now assigned to a COSO warehouse or the application code indicates the stock number will not be moved forward the document number(s) will not be printed on the listing.

4–344

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4J4.3. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). 4J4.3.1. Tab 1 (Daily Report). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Paging item is the report date (taken from the TH_DMS_DATE_901 field). Sort(s): Sort by EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND, TH_FSC, TH_ITEM_ID_NBR, TH_MMC, TH_ORG, and TH_DOCUMENT_NBR (positions 2-14). 4J4.3.2. Tab 2 (Daily Totals). Condition(s): Sum of selected items (by category) based on program logic in paragraph 4J4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. There are no paging items. Sort(s): Sort by EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND and TH_ORG. 4J4.3.3. Tab 3 (Monthly Report). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Paging item is the 3-character designation for the month (automatically selected for this report). Sort(s): Sort by EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND, TH_FSC, TH_ITEM_ID_NBR, TH_MMC, TH_ORG, and TH_DOCUMENT_NBR (positions 2-14). 4J4.3.4. Tab 4 (Monthly Totals). Condition(s): Sum of selected items (by category) based on program logic in paragraph 4J4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. There are no paging items. Sort(s): Sort by EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND and TH_ORG. 4J4.4. Computed Fields. 4J4.4.1. COSO ISSUE (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘ISU’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘E’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.2. COSO ISSUE (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘ISU’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘R’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.3. COSO MSI (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘MSI’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘E’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.4. COSO MSI (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘MSI’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘R’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.5. OTHER ISSUE (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘ISU’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘E’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE.

4–345

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4J4.4.6. OTHER ISSUE (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘ISU’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘R’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.7. OTHER MSI (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘MSI’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘E’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.8. OTHER MSI (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘MSI’ and EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND equal to ‘R’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE. 4J4.4.9. COSO B/O (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ and TTPC = ‘2D’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the userdefined COSO WAREHOUSE or the warehouse location was blank. 4J4.4.10. COSO B/O (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ and TTPC = ‘2D’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE or the warehouse location was blank. 4J4.4.11. OTHER B/O (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ and TTPC = ‘2D’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE and not blank. 4J4.4.12. OTHER B/O (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ and TTPC = ‘2D’ where the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE and not blank. 4J4.4.13. 4W B/O (For EOQ category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ and TTPC = ‘4W’. 4J4.4.14. 4W B/O (For Recoverable category). The total line items (within each user-defined ORG CODE) with TRIC ‘DUO’ AND ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ and TTPC = ‘4W’. 4J4.4.15. COSO STORAGE (For EOQ category). The COSO storage effectiveness rate (no exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.16. COSO STORAGE (For Recoverable category). The COSO storage effectiveness rate (no exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE

4–346

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.17. COSO STOCKAGE (For EOQ category). The COSO stockage effectiveness rate (no exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.18. COSO STOCKAGE (For Recoverable category). The COSO stockage effectiveness rate (no exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.19. STOR-NO (For EOQ category). The COSO storage effectiveness rate (exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O – COUNT(CASE WHEN ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.APP_CD_STK_STORE_RATE_INCL_IND = ‘NO’) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.20. STOR-NO (For Recoverable category). The COSO storage effectiveness rate (exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O – COUNT(CASE WHEN ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.APP_CD_STK_STORE_RATE_INCL_IND = ‘NO’) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.21. STK-NO (For EOQ category). The COSO stockage effectiveness rate (exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘E’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O COUNT(CASE WHEN ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.APP_CD_STK_STORE_RATE_INCL_IND = ‘NO’) * 100 + .5). (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.22. STK-NO (For Recoverable category). The COSO stockage effectiveness rate (exceptions provided for application codes) is computed using the formula: IF ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND = ‘R’ THEN TRUNC ((COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI) / (COSO ISSUE + COSO MSI + COSO B/O + OTHER ISSUE + OTHER MSI + OTHER B/O COUNT(CASE WHEN ENTERPRISE_COSO_EFFECT.APP_CD_STK_STORE_RATE_INCL_IND = ‘NO’) * 100 + .5).

4–347

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 (Note: This occurs within each user-defined ORG CODE. All identified fields must take place before the formula can be executed). 4J4.4.23. TOTALS (For both EOQ and Recoverable categories). Within each category, sum the individual columns of data known as (’COSO ISSUE’,’COSO MSI’,’OTHER ISSUE’,’OTHER MSI’,’COSO B/O’,’OTHER B/O’,’4W B/O’) and then compute the individual columns of data known as (‘COSO STORAGE’,’COSO STOCKAGE’,’STOR-NO’,’STK-NO’) using their respective formulas. 4J4.4.24. TOTAL HITS FOR STOCK NUMBER: Within each category, this is the number of line items (for each stock number) with TRIC ‘ISU’ or ‘MSI’ where the org code of the document number was equal to one of the user-defined org code(s) and the first two positions of the warehouse location were not equal to the user-defined COSO WAREHOUSE(s) or the application code was not in (’XX’,’X3’,’X6’,’Y2’) or the first position of the application code was not equal to ‘N’. (Note: Only applies to Tab 3 (Monthly Report)). 4J4.4.25. EOQ_RECOVERABLE_IND. Assigned within the enterprise table and determines what category the transaction will be assigned. If the first two positions of the ERRCD equals ‘XB’ then ‘E’ is assigned. If the first two positions of the ERRCD is in (‘XD’, ‘XF’) then ‘R’ is assigned. 4J4.4.26. APP_CD_STK_STORE_RATE_INCL_IND. Assigned within the enterprise table and used to determine whether to include or exclude the transaction when computing the various stockage/storage rates. If the application code is in (‘XX’,’X3’,’X6’,’Y2’) or the first position of the application code is equal to ‘N’ then the value ‘NO’ is assigned. Otherwise, the value ‘YES’ is assigned. 4J4.5. Parameters. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.) 4J4.5.1. Mandatory: 4J4.5.1.1. SRAN. The query must have a SRAN entry. Multiple SRAN entries are not allowed. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. 4J4.5.1.2. COSO WAREHOUSE. The user must input at least one COSO WAREHOUSE entry. Multiple COSO WAREHOUSE entries (if used) must be separated by a comma. This field will be edited as a two-digit numeric character string. 4J4.5.1.3. ORG CODE. The user must input at least one ORG CODE entry. Each ORG CODE can only be assigned to one ORG MDS. Multiple ORG CODE entries (if used) must be separated by a comma. This field will be edited as a three-digit numeric character string. 4J4.5.1.4. ORG MDS. The user must input at least one user-defined MDS entry. This gets linked to a specific ORG CODE. Maximum number of positions is six (nine counting the ORG CODE). For example, organization code 100 assigned to ‘F15’ would be ‘100F15’. Multiple MDS entries (per ORG CODE) are not allowed. Multiple MDS entries must be separated by a slash. For example, organization code 100 assigned to ‘F15’ and organization code 222 assigned to ‘C5’ would be ‘100F15/222C5’. 4J4.5.1.5. TYPE WHSE. For each MDS the user must select ‘APS’ for Aircraft Parts Store or ‘FSC’ for Flight Service Center to indicate the type of COSO warehouse the MDS is supported by. The default is ‘APS’. 4J4.5.2. Optional: None.

4–348

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8, Chapter 4 4J4.6. Data File Formats. None. 4J4.7. Special Instructions. 4J4.7.1. The legacy SURGE has both a daily and monthly option. The option processed is determined based on computer date and not parameter input. The daily report is based on date of last migration. However, when the program recognizes the month has changed the monthly option is immediately processed. For example, if you ask for the monthly option in the middle of June you will still get results for the month of May. Therefore, the enterprise table gets appended to each day instead of being overwritten. ELSG will add a step to their housekeeping procedures and periodically delete any excess records. The expectation is that approximately 62 days (two months) worth of data will be maintained. 4J4.7.2. The legacy SURGE was originally built solely for system designator 01. However, this SURGE was recently modified for Indian Springs (FB4817), the A2 account on Nellis. It is considered a special version of the same SURGE and only runs on that database. In order to totally eliminate the current need for the legacy SURGE we added SRAN FB4817 to the established criteria for this enterprise table. 4J4.7.3. The legacy SURGE has a parameter file that allows an organization code to be assigned to multiple user-defined MDS names. However, the legacy SURGE only prints the data one time meaning all subsequent instances of the organization code will reflect zeros on the report. Since the Discoverer report can only use a print line one time, criteria for the parameters on the report include limiting an organization code to a single MDS. 4J4.7.4. Due to Discoverer limitations, the exact format of the legacy SURGE cannot be duplicated. However, almost all of the same information has been provided. For example, rather than a legacy header of “COSO EOQ STORAGE/STOCKAGE EFFECTIVENESS” or an “MDS =F15”, these items are now placed in columns of data as in “COSO STORAGE” – “EOQ” and “MDS” – “F15”. 4J4.8. Reference. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. 4J4.9. Distribution. As requested.

4–349

3. Condition(s): Selects items with positions 1-2 of ERRCD <> ‘XD’ and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 1 (All XD Stock Numbers (ACC221) Pt1).01) and any additional user-defined parameters.3. Carcass or UAP = 0 (ACC221) Pt5).01) = 0 or (Carcass Cost * . Condition(s): Selects items where (Latest Acquisition Cost (LAC) * . Tab 5 (Standard.2. 4J5.01) + (Direct Allocable Cost Recovery (DACR) * .01) = 0 or (Markup Price * . This program does not require an enterprise table. Sort(s): Sort by stock number. 4J5. Markup. Tab 2 (All XB/XF Stock Numbers (ACC221) Pt 2). Not XD = 2) and stock number. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds several listings based on user input parameters.1. 4J5. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-5 BUDGET CODE 8 COST VALIDATION (ACC221) 4J5. The data for this report was compiled using the following criteria: 4J5.3.3.2. Purpose.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. Condition(s): Selects items where (position 1-2 of ERRCD = 'XD' and (Standard Price * .01) (Exchange Price * . Condition(s): Selects items where positions 1-2 of ERRCD = 'XD' and (Standard Price * . Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). 4J5. Secondary tables include the SPECIAL_CONTROL and SRAN_REF_TABLE.3.Exchange Cost] <> Markup Cost (ACC221) Pt4).01) = 0 or (Exchange Price * .01) + (Business Overhead Cost Recovery (BOCR) * . To provide a listing of all budget code ‘8’ assets that have questionable prices loaded to the item and/or cost records.01) and any additional user-defined parameters.1.5. 4J5.3. Program Logic.2.2. Tab 4 ([Standard Price . 4J5. Tab 3 ([LAC + BOCR@LAC + DACR@LAC] <> Standard Price (ACC221) Pt3). From there the program performs several computations and produces several listings to include a 1SQ data file that should be processed in-line as a Stock Number Users Directory stock number interrogation.3.1. Sorts: Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1. The stock number must have a budget code of ‘8’ and a Date of Last Transaction greater than ‘0’ in order to be considered for review. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1. The primary tables used to build this report are the ITEM_TABLE and COST_TABLE.01) <> (Standard Price * . Exchange.01) <> (Markup Price * . 4J5. Condition(s): Selects items with positions 1-2 of ERRCD = ‘XD’ and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J5. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.01) = 0 or Unserviceable 4–350 .4. Not XD = 2) and stock number. Sort(s): Sort by stock number.

75) > (LAC * . Tab 7 (75% of LRC > LAC (ACC221) Pt7).01) and any additional user-defined parameters. Not XD = 2) and stock number. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1.3. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1. and any additional user-defined parameters. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1. 4J5. Not XD = 2) and stock number. Condition(s): Selects items where positions 1-2 of ERRCD = 'XD' and (Carcass Cost * .11.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J5. Condition(s): Selects items where (Standard Price * .3. Mandatory: 4–351 .9.01) < 0.3.05).01 * 0.5. Computed Fields. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1. Not XD = 2) and stock number.3. 4J5. 4J5. Condition(s): Selects items where positions 1-2 of ERRCD = 'XD' and (Exchange Price * . Condition(s): None.01) <> (UAP * .1. Tab 12 (HQ Data File).01) + (BOCR * . Condition(s): Selects items where national item identification number (NIIN) is NULL or ‘’ (space) and any additional user-defined parameters. Not XD = 2) and stock number.8. and any additional user-defined parameters. Not XD = 2) and stock number. Tab 8 (Standard Price <> Unit Price (ACC221) Pt8).3. Tab 9 (No Price Record Loaded (ACC221) Pt9).05 (ACC221) Pt10). Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1.01) and any additional user-defined parameters.7.01) <> (Unit Price * . Condition(s): Selects items where positions 1-2 of ERRCD = 'XD' and (Latest Repair Cost * . 4J5.10.3. Tab 11 (1SQ File).01) = 0) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J5.01) = 0) or (positions 1-2 of ERRCD <> 'XD' and Standard Price * . Parameters. Sort(s): Sort by stock number.) 4J5.01) < 0. Sort(s): Sort by ERRCD Type (XD = 1.12. 4J5. Condition(s): Selects items that meet a condition in tabs 3 through 10 and any additional user-defined parameters.01). 4J5. Not XD = 2) and stock number.4. Chapter 4 Asset Price (UAP) * . Tab 6 ([Carcass Cost + BOCR@LAC + DACR@LAC] <> UAP (ACC221) Pt6). 4J5.05) or ((Standard Price * .3.5. Tab 10 (Prices < $0.01) + (DACR * . Sort(s): None.6. None. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.

01 BOCR@LAC * . Optional: None.01 DACR@LAC* . SRAN. Tab 12 (HQ Data File): NO POS 15 2 3 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 POS 1-15 16-17 18-20 21-31 32-42 43-53 54-64 65-75 76-86 87-97 98-108 109-119 FIELD DESIGNATION Stock Number System Designator ERRCD Unit Price * . Tab 11 (1SQ File): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 22 Constant data and stock number POS 1-22 REMARKS/NOTES ‘1SQ08’ concatenated to two spaces concatenated to FSC concatenated to ITEM_ID_NBR concatenated to MMC 4J5. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.2. Data File Formats.5.1.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. Chapter 4 4J5.01 Exchange Price * .6. 4J5. 4J5.01 Standard Price * .01 REMARKS/NOTES Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions 4–352 . This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.01 Markup Price * .01 LAC * .01 UAP * . 4J5.01 LRC * .6.1.5.2.

Parts of the legacy SURGE program suggested that positions 171-172 of the HQ data file (Tab 12) should be populated with the report part and ERRCD type.3. XD stock numbers and non-XD stock numbers. these positions/columns are not populated for the non-XD items. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. This usually requires a computer operations database manager to complete the required action.g. 4J5. The HQ data file was previously forwarded automatically from the legacy system to a specific file server.4. this is beyond the capability of Discoverer so the end user (or designated representative) will now be required to process/download this file.7.9. pseudo). 4–353 .01 DACR@LRC * . Chapter 4 120-130 131-141 142-152 153-163 164-170 171-172 173-176 177-195 11 11 11 11 7 2 4 19 BOCR@LRC * . Some parts of this report include (and are sorted by) two types of items. Special Instructions.01 Material Cost Recovery * . Sample Report/Letter.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. Therefore. The 1SQ data file needs to be processed in the legacy system (e. 4J5. Distribution.g.8.7.01 Date of Last Transaction Constant ‘FB’ SRAN Nomenclature Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions Left justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions From ITEM_TABLE Right justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions 4J5. testing revealed those fields were only used in the sort logic and the data file always returned a value of ‘FB’.2. 4J5.01 Carcass Cost * . Exchange Price). 4J5. 4J5.10.7. As requested.7. 4J5. Reserved for future use. Reference.7. However. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. 4J5. The non-XD stock numbers do not possess all the cost data that XD items possess (e. However.

9. 6 . 4J6.2. Distribution. To t a l N u m b e r S e r v i c e a b l e U n i t s i n S t o c k = S u m o f ITEM_TABLE. 4 J 6 .DEMAND_LEVEL for c a s e s w h e r e I T E M _ TA B L E . Purpose.2. SRAN . 9.4. Total Number with Demand Level = Count of cases where ITEM_TABLE. To t a l N u m b e r N o t A s s i g n e d M A X L e v e l = C o u n t o f c a s e s w h e r e ITEM_TABLE. 4 J 6 .3.1.2. or M. they must be separated by a comma. 4J6. Program Logic.IEX_CODE is 8.2. 2 . 4–354 . 4J6. IEX Summary. Accepts parameter for a single SRAN or multiple SRANs.3. Records are sorted by IEX and SRAN/system designator if multiple SRANs are selected.3.SERVICEABLE_BALANCE for cases where ITEM_TABLE. Accepts parameter for a single SRAN or multiple SRANs. 3 . The SRAN and system designator are displayed as Page Items.3. 4J6. or M and ITEM_TABLE. Computed Fields.2. 9. Reference. 4J6.3. or M and ITEM_TABLE.3. 2 .1. IEX. As requested. 4J6. or M and generate an IEX totals summary of various attributes.IEX_CODE is 8. then stock number. 4J6.3. 9. Scans item table and provides summary of records assigned an IEX 8. To provide a listing of items with issue exception code (IEX) 8. Total Dollar Value of Demand Level = Sum of ITEM_TABLE.STOCKAGE_PRIORITY_CODE is equal to E. 4J6.4. Parameters. 9 o r M m u l t i p l i e d b y ITEM_TABLE. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-6 HAZMART MATRIX REPORT (ACC250) 4J6. HAZMART MATRIX.IEX_CODE is 8. Records are sorted by system designator (for multiple SRAN selections). 9.MAX_LEVEL_FLAG is not equal to 1 (item does not have a maximum level). If multiple entries are typed. 4J6. N/A.IEX_CODE is 8. 2 . I E X _ C O D E i s 8 .4. 4J6.7. 3 . 4 J 6 . 4J6.2. 9. or M.IEX_CODE is 8. 2 .2. or M and ITEM_TABLE.MAX_LEVEL_FLAG is equal to 1 (item has a maximum level). 9.This will accept any valid SRAN. or M and ITEM_TABLE.IEX_CODE is 8. 5 .2. Total Number Stockage Priority Code (SPC) E = Count of cases where ITEM_TABLE. 9. 9. To t a l N u m b e r A s s i g n e d M A X L e v e l = C o u n t o f c a s e s w h e r e ITEM_TABLE. Total Number of Line Items = Count of cases where ITEM_TABLE. The SRAN and system designator are displayed as Page Items.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.2. or M for selected SRAN(s). or M for selected SRAN(s).1.DEMAND_LEVEL is greater than 0.UNIT_PRICE.2. 3 . Scans item table and retrieves records assigned an IEX 8.

FSC. '6850'. '5640'. A check (MAX) of all different system designators will also be computed and displayed in the ‘SD’ column at each change in FSC. '5835'. '3680'. Action quantities will also be added together (SUM) and displayed in the ‘QTY’ column at each change in FSC. The data for this report was compiled using the following criteria: 4J7. '2920'. '2530'. '9140'. Sort(s): Sort by stock record account number (SRAN).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. '6610'. '4940'. '6830'. '1560'. '5430'. '5915'. '5340'. '4910'. system designator. '5930'. '5910'. '5960'. '6665'. '2925'. '9390'. '6605’. '1430'. '5805'. '5831'.2. '6230'. including Federal Supply Class (FSC) summaries for a selected date range. '5961’. '3655'. '8510'.1. '8040'. '9630'. '5820'. '4210'. '5999'. '1375'. '1680'. '2240'.1. 4J7. '5826'. '7920'. '9130'. '5680'. '6350'. '5985'.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. '8410'. '3433'. '2910'. '2640'. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-7 HAZMART METRIC (ACC251) 4J7. '2540'. '6780'. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds several listings based on user input parameters. '1630'. 4J7. '5935'. '9110'. '9330'. '3610'.2. '6625'. '4920'. '6140'. '7035'. The primary tables used to build this report are the ITEM_TABLE and CT_HISTORY table.2. '5925'. '4240'. '5950'. (Also known as sheets and worksheets). '6740'. '7360'. '6630'. '2520'. '8415'.3. Tab 1 (ACC251 HAZMART Metric Details). 4J7. '4120'.2.2. '7040'. '8010'. '5945'. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J5. '5330'. To provide a listing of TRM transactions. '4220'. Tab 2 (ACC251 FSC Summary). '7045'. '6810'. '9620'. '6640'. '1420'. '7025'. '6135'. The program scans the consolidated transaction history (CTH) area based on user-defined FROM/TO dates looking for ‘TRM’ transactions that have a type transaction phrase code (TTPC) <> ‘CA’. '6240'. and TTPC. '6750'. '9160'. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. '9150’. '6120'. '4230’.3. '8405'. Program Logic.2. Totals: A count (COUNT) of all stock numbers will be computed and displayed in the ‘STOCK NUMBER’ column at each change in FSC. '4330'. '5970'. '6840'. This program does not require an enterprise table. '3439'. '5920'. '7930'. '9920'. '6260'. '6130'. The federal stock class (FSC) must be equal to one of the following in order to be considered for this report: ('1370'. '6820'. '6685'. Secondary tables include the SPECIAL_CONTROL and SRAN_REF_TABLE. 4–355 . Tabs. '5975'. '8465'. Purpose. '8030’. 4J7. '8710'. '7510'. '2835’. '8720'. '4130'. '8120'. '8520'. '6635'. '3950'.3. document number.3. '6675'. '7530'. '1660'. '5610'. '5350'. '5965'. 4J7. '9930'). 4J7.1.

system designator. Part 2. Reserved for future use.1. None. 4J7.5. See AFMAN 23-110.2.10. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J5. 4J7.5. Sample Report/Letter. None. Optional: None.5.5. As requested.2. None. 4J7. 4J7. Mandatory: 4J7. The query must have ONLY one TO DATE (format YYYYDDD). Reference. The query must have ONLY one FROM DATE (format YYYYDDD). and FSC. 4J7. 4J7.9.3. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.6. Parameters. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. 4J7. Special Instructions.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.7.1.8. 4J7.) 4J7. SRAN.1.4. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. Volume 2. Computed Fields. 4J7. FROM DATE. The same stock number listed twice (due to different transactions) would count as two line items. Totals: A summarized count (COUNT) of all stock numbers will be computed and displayed (as line items) in the ‘STOCK NUMBER’ column at each change in FSC. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. Distribution. Action quantities will also be added together (SUM) and displayed (as units) in the ‘QTY’ column at each change in FSC. 4–356 . 4J7. Data File Formats. Chapters 15 and 19. TO DATE.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. A check (MAX) of all different system designators will also be computed and displayed in the ‘SD’ column at each change in FSC.1.5.1.5.

3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Optional: None.2. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Computed Fields.1. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). Program Logic.2.5. Due-out document numbers must be memo and fiscal year obligation cannot be a NULL value.2.1. 4J8. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.5. The primary tables used to build this report are the DUE_OUT_DTL and ITEM_TABLE. Sort(s): Sort by host stock record account number (SRAN). (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. 4J8. This program does not require an enterprise table. system designator. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-8 MEMO OBLIGATED DUE-OUT BC 9 CHECK (ACC277) 4J8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Tab 1 (Memo Obligated Due-out BC 9 Check (ACC277)) Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J8. None. 4J8. 4–357 .5. 4J8.1.2. Parameters. The ‘THIS IS THE GRAND TOTAL’ field will be computed by adding (SUM) the ‘EXTENDED PRICE’ column at each change in host SRAN. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.1. The data for this report was compiled using the following criteria: 4J8. 4J8.) 4J8. Mandatory: 4J8.2.3.4.5. SRAN. SRAN.1. 4J8. Budget code for all stock numbers must be equal to ‘9’. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds several listings based on user input parameters. and due-out organization code. To provide command and global logistics support center (GLSC) personnel with a total dollar value of memo obligated budget code ‘9’ due-outs for end-of-year processing. Secondary tables include the SPECIAL_CONTROL and SRAN_SPECIAL_CONTROL_VW. Purpose.1. 4J8. 4J8.2. Totals: The ‘TOTAL EXTENDED COST’ field will be computed by adding (SUM) the ‘EXTENDED PRICE’ column at each change in system designator and each change in host SRAN.3.

Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. None. 4J8.7. 4–358 . 4J8.10. Sample Report/Letter.6.9. Distribution. None. Chapter 4 4J8. Reference.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.8. Special Instructions. Data File Formats. As requested. Reserved for future use. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. 4J8. 4J8.

4J9. Purpose. 4J9. 4J9.1.PFMR/OCCR image.1.1. The complete process (in general terms) is defined as follows: 4J9. a n d ORG_COST_CENTER_ACCT_SUMMARY.PFMR/OCCR image.1.Due-out image.1. SPECIAL_CONTROL.1.the “asterisk” record or the header record.1.1.1. To provide multi-use data primarily needed by contractors to provide support to MAJCOMs. It queries the BASE_CONSTANTS_1 record for the HOST_SRAN.DIFM image. Query ‘1’ .D26 type image.1. 4J9. A unique “RCD” field will be built with each query to aid in the sorting and grouping of the data. ^1A .4.Report run image.3.Header identification image.1. It also combines data from due-out details similar to the R31 program.5. 4J9.6. ^3 .8. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the ORG_COST_CENTER and TRANSACTION_HISTORY.10. and R72.1. 4J9.1.PFMR/OCCR image.7. 4J9.1.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.1. creates a date from the SYSDATE.Repair cycle image.2. There are twelve different types of “records” built and displayed. 4J9.1. ^* . Program Logic. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_SUPERSCAN table and build two listings based on user input parameters. 4–359 .1. R E PA I R _ C Y C L E .1. 4J9. DUE_OUT_DTL. ^1B .2. C O S T _ TA B L E .2.Record Count. 4J9. 4J9. O R G _ C O S T _ C E N T E R _ E E I C _ S U M M A RY. O R G _ C O S T _ C E N T E R _ 1 0 0 _ 9 9 9 . ^0 .1. 4J9.1.1. D26. Secondary tables include the BASE_CONSTANTS_1. ^1D . ^6 . The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J9. PROJECT_FUNDS_MGMT.1.12.2. ^Z .2. The ENTERPRISE_SUPERSCAN table data is derived from eleven separate queries and then combined.1. 4J9.2. HOST_BASE. The following is a brief summary of the records: 4J9.9.PFMR/OCCR image. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. ^2 . ^4 . DUE_IN_FROM_MAINTENANCE_DTL.1. This program provides a single process to obtain data that would normally come from SBSS programs that include NGV934. 4J9.11. and creates a RCD field composed of “^*”.1. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-9 OPTEMPO SUPERSCAN (ACC300) 4J9.1.1. I T E M _ TA B L E .R72 type image. creates a program name of “(ACC300) ”. The BASE_CONSTANTS_1 table is used to link satellite accounts to host accounts for access to the host-unique table. ^1C . ^5 .1.1. CSB_SD.2.

It creates a RCD field composed of “^4”.5. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN.10. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN.2.2. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN.2. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN.2. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN.2. SRAN. SRAN.2.2. SRAN.the “1A” record or the “A” set of organizational cost data. It creates a RCD field composed of “^3”.2. It creates a RCD field composed of “^1D”. SRAN.the “4” record or the “Due-out” data set. 4J9.00”. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN. Query ‘8’ .11. creates a version number of “2. 4J9. It creates a RCD field composed of “^6”. It creates a RCD field composed of “^5”. Query ‘9’ . 4J9. Query ‘5’ . SRAN. CSB_SD. The budget code must equal “8” and the first two positions of the ERRCD must equal “XD”.the “5” record or the “Due-in From Maintenance (DIFM)” data set.the “1D” record or the “D” set of organizational data.9.the “6” record or the “Repair Cycle NRTS > 0 Cost” data set. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN. Query ‘6’ . SRAN. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN. 4J9.2. Query ‘2’ .2. HOST_BASE. 4J9. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN. Query ‘4’ .2. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN.2.the “3” record or the “Consolidated Transaction History Register (R72)” data set. SRAN. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN. 4J9.the “zero” record or the base identification data record. and creates a RCD field composed of “^0”. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN.2.6.the “1B” record or the “B” set of organizational cost data.2. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN. and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN.4. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN. The budget code must equal “8” and the first position of the document number must be unequal to “U”. Query ‘10’ . 4J9. Chapter 4 4J9.2. SRAN. It queries the SRAN_REF_VW for the HOST_SRAN.2.2.the “1C” record or the “C” set of organizational cost data. The due-out detail must be firm or have a fiscal year of obligation assigned. 4J9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Query ‘11’ . and SYS_DESIG linking the host base with its satellites by the HOST_SRAN and gathering all records by HOST_SRAN. 4–360 .2. It creates a RCD field composed of “^2”.2. It creates a RCD field composed of “^1A”. SRAN. The budget code must equal “8” and the first two positions of the ERRCD must equal “XD”.the “2” record or the “Materiel Support Division Summary” data set. 4J9. Query ‘3’ .7.3.2. It creates a RCD field composed of “^1B”. It creates a RCD field composed of “^1C”. Query ‘7’ .2. It queries the BASE_CONSTANTS_1 record for the HOST_SRAN.8.

5.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6. Since the output is a data file.3.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. (Note: The START DATE is not required or authorized for Tab 1 (ACC300 DAILY). The user must input an end date (e. 4J9. START DATE.1. Data File Formats. Optional: None. (Note: The END DATE is not required or authorized for Tab 1 (ACC300 DAILY).g.1.3. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string.5. Therefore.1. Since the output is a data file. The user must input a start date (e. 2009). 4J9.6.5.1. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J9.5.g. HOST-SRAN. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.3. 2009031 for January 31. Sort(s): The output had no defined sort in the legacy SURGE. Computed Fields. Record 1 (^*): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 2 9 4 22 Constant data (record type) Report Date Host SRAN Host Base Name POS 1-2 3-11 12-15 16-37 REMARKS/NOTES “^*” 4–361 . The query must have at least one host SRAN entry. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). 4J9.5. we did not include one in this report.1. All system designators under the host SRAN account will be selected along with the host SRAN.3.5. Sort(s): The output had no defined sort in the legacy SURGE.1. 4J9. 4J9. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J9. Chapter 4 4J9. we did not include one in this report. Mandatory: 4J9. END DATE.2.) 4J9.2. (Note: Multiple host SRANs are not authorized for Tab 2 (ACC300 CTH) option).4. None. Parameters. Multiple host SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Tab 1 (ACC300 DAILY). Therefore.1. 4J9. Tab 2 (ACC300 CTH). 2009).2. 2009001 for January 1. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. 4J9. 4J9. 4J9.

2. The CTH version is hard-coded “(ACC300) “ 49-52 4 Base SRAN 4J9. Record 3 (^1A): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 3 3 2 3 2 4 4 6 6 22 POS 1-3 4-6 7-8 9-11 12-13 14-17 18-21 22-27 28-33 34-55 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) OCCR Org Code System Designator PFMR Code OCCR Fund Code OCCR Fiscal Year OCCR OBAN OCCR RC/CC PFMR ADSN OCCR Organization Title REMARKS/NOTES “^1A” 4–362 .3. Chapter 4 38-39 40-48 2 9 System Designator Report Number The daily version retrieves this info from a specified field.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.00” “DAILY” if a daily run or “CTH “ if a CTH run Format is HH:MM:SS and derived from the SYSDATE 4J9.6. The CTH version is hard-coded “2. Record 2 (^0): NO POS 2 4 22 4 POS 1-2 3-6 7-28 29-32 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Host SRAN Host Base Name Version REMARKS/NOTES “^0” 33-37 38-39 40-46 47-53 54-61 4 2 7 7 8 Type Report System Designator CTH Start Date CTH End Date (or the report date if daily run) Time Report Started The daily version retrieves this info from a specified field.6.

Chapter 4 56-71 72 16 1 PFMR Title Blank 73-74 2 Blank 75 76-78 79 80 81 82 83 84-90 91-92 93-98 99-111 112-124 125-137 138-150 151-163 164-176 177-189 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 7 2 6 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 Blank PFMR Debtor Code PFMR Detail Output Flag OCCR EAID Reporting Organization Flag PFMR SF1080 Controller Code OCCR Type Organization Code PFMR Partial Billing Flag OCCR Date of Last Update OCCR ESP Code OCCR MFP Code PFMR CFY Issues (Supply) PFMR CFY Turn-ins (Supply) PFMR CFY Obligated Due-outs (Supply) OCCR CFY Net Sales Cumulative No Fly Fuels (EEIC 693) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 602) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 605) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 609) This was the PFMR DBOF Flag in the legacy report. However.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. However. Record 4 (^1B): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 3 Constant data (record type) 3 OCCR Org Code POS 1-3 4-6 REMARKS/NOTES “^1B” 4–363 .4. that data was not migrated to the Air Force Supply Central Database Kept same format as the legacy report Right justify with spaces (when needed) to fill up all positions 4J9. that data was not migrated to the Air Force Supply Central Database This was the PFMR Sales Code in legacy report.

Chapter 4 7-8 9-21 22-34 35-47 48-60 61-73 74-86 87-99 100-112 113-125 126-138 139-151 152-164 165-177 178-190 2 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 System Designator OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 627) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 628) OCCR CFY Net Sales Cumulative Ground Fuels (EEIC 641) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 6X3) OCCR CFY Obligated Due-outs (EEIC 6X4) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 600) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 602) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 605) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 609) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 627) OCCR CFY Net Sales Due-outs (EEIC 628) OCCR CFY Net Sales Cumulative Utility Fuels (EEIC 642) OCCR CFY Net Sales (EEIC 6X3) OCCR CFY Net Sales (EEIC 6X4) 4J9.5.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Record 5 (^1C): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 3 3 2 13 13 13 13 13 POS 1-3 4-6 7-8 9-21 22-34 35-47 48-60 61-73 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) OCCR Org Code System Designator REMARKS/NOTES “^1C” OCCR PFY Issues (Supply) Blank Kept same format as the legacy code OCCR PFY Due-outs (Supply) Blank Kept same format as the legacy code OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 602) 4–364 .

Record 7 (^2): NO POS 2 4 2 POS 1-2 3-6 7-8 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Host Base SRAN System Designator REMARKS/NOTES “^2” 4–365 .6.7.6. Record 6 (^1D): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 3 3 2 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 POS 1-3 4-6 7-8 9-21 22-34 35-47 48-60 61-73 74-86 87-99 100-112 113-125 126-138 139-151 FIELD DESIGNATION REMARKS/NOTES Constant data (record type) “^1D” OCCR Org Code System Designator OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 605) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 609) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 627) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 628) Blank Kept same format as the legacy code OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 6X3) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 6X4) OCCR Target (Supplies) OCCR Target (Equipment) PFMR Target (Supplies) PFMR Target (Equipment) 4J9. Chapter 4 74-86 87-99 100-112 113-125 126-138 139-151 152-164 165-177 178-190 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 605) OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 609) OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 627) OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 628) Blank Kept same format as the legacy code OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 6X3) OCCR 1PFY Due-outs (EEIC 6X4) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 600) OCCR 1PFY Net Sales (EEIC 602) 4J9.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Record 8 (^3): NO 4–366 .8.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 9-11 12-25 26-40 41-47 48-52 53-55 56 57 58-60 61-62 63-74 75-93 94-99 100-101 102 103-113 114-124 125-135 136-146 147-157 158-168 169-182 183-185 186-188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 3 14 15 7 5 3 1 1 3 2 12 19 6 2 1 11 11 11 11 11 11 14 3 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PFMR Code Document Number Stock Number Transaction Date Transaction Serial Number SRD Demand Code TEX Code TRIC Type Transaction Phrase Code Type Transaction Phrase Nomenclature Action Quantity Unit of Issue Supply Condition Code Latest Acquisition Cost (LAC) Standard Price Markup Price Carcass Cost Exchange Cost Extended Cost Mark For Original TRIC ERRCD Filler-1 Field Filler-3 Field IEX Code TEX Code Reason Why Code Credit Code Level of Maintenance Flag Taken from positions 8-10 of Transaction History Mark For field First 19 positions Taken from Reason Why Code field Taken from Transaction History record Taken from Transaction History record Taken From position 1 of Issue Priority field 4J9.6.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 POS 1-2 3-17 18-20 21-22 23 24-42 43 44-50 51-55 56 57-59 60-62 63 64 65-66 67-72 73 74-76 77 78-91 92-94 95-99 100-113 114-128 129-135 136-142 143 144 145-146 147-152 153-158 159-169 170-171 172-175 POS 2 15 3 2 1 19 1 7 5 1 3 3 1 1 2 6 1 3 1 14 3 5 14 15 7 7 1 1 2 6 6 11 2 4 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Stock Number ERRCD Unit of Issue Budget Code Nomenclature Type Account Code Transaction Date Transaction Serial Number TEX Code Routing Identifier Code Status or Advice Code Serialized Report Code Filler-2 Field (First Position) Issue Priority Supplementary Address Reason Why Code FIA Transaction Code Demand Code Document Number TRIC Output Terminal Number Mark For Stock Number Requested Date of Last Demand Date of Last Transaction Material Category/Source of Supply Code Print Flag Fund Code Action Quantity Ending Balance Extended Cost Type Transaction Phrase Code Users Initials REMARKS/NOTES “^3” First 19 positions Taken from Transaction History Record Zero Fill Field 4–367 .

Record 10 (^5): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 2 15 2 3 6 1 3 14 POS 1-2 3-17 18-19 20-22 23-28 29 30-32 33-46 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Stock Number System Designator PFMR Code OCCR RC/CC Level of Maintenance Flag Percent Base Repair Document Number REMARKS/NOTES “^5” 4–368 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.6.10. Record 9 (^4): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 2 15 2 14 19 1 1 4 3 1 3 2 5 11 7 14 POS 1-2 3-17 18-19 20-33 34-52 53 54 55-58 59-61 62 63-65 66-67 68-72 73-83 84-90 91-104 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Stock Number System Designator Document Number Nomenclature TEX Code Memo/Firm Indicator Fiscal Year Obligation ERRCD Budget Code Routing Identifier Code Unit of Issue Due-out Quantity Extended Cost Date of Last Transaction Mark For REMARKS/NOTES “^4” First 19 positions 4J9.9.6. Chapter 4 176-177 178-179 2 2 System Designator Application Code (if serialized reporting code >= ‘A’) ELSE Spaces Positions 178-179 only apply to CTH report 4J9.

Record 12 (^Z): 4–369 .6. Record 11 (^6): (Note: Only found in Daily Run) NO POS 2 15 2 3 1 1 3 6 6 3 11 11 11 11 11 POS 1-2 3-17 18-19 20-22 23 24 25-27 28-33 34-39 40-42 43-53 54-64 65-75 76-86 87-97 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Stock Number System Designator ERRCD Budget Code Level of Maintenance Flag Project Number Reparable Generations NRTS Reparable Generations RTS Percent Base Repair Latest Acquisition Cost (LAC) Standard Price Markup Price Carcass Cost Exchange Cost REMARKS/NOTES “^6” Zero Fill Field Zero Fill Field 4J9. Chapter 4 47-51 52-62 63-73 74-76 77 78-80 81-83 84-87 88-91 92-95 96-99 100-103 104-110 111-142 143-145 5 11 11 3 1 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 7 32 3 DIFM Quantity Zero Fill Field Extended Exchange Cost Extended Markup Cost Current DIFM Status Code DIFM Status Flag SRD DIFM Location Number of Days Since Date of Last Change (DOLC) Total DIFM Status Days Total DIFM Issue Days Total AWP Days Total Charge Status Days ISU/DOR Date YYYYDDD Nomenclature Previous DIFM Status 4J9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.11.12.6.

4J9.1.7.3. The legacy SURGE will right-justify the text one time and leftjustify the text the next time. 4J9. this is beyond the capability of Discoverer so the end user (or designated representative) will now be required to process/download this file and FTP to another location (if needed). The Discoverer script has a format change for the ^Z record.7. 4J9. 4J9. Days difference between the document number date and requisition date (Status Days). There were instances where the legacy SURGE program did not print the MARK FOR or STOCK-NBR-REQUESTED data in the ^3 record even though it exists on the transaction history record. 4J9.3. Days difference between the DIFM ISU_DOR_DATE and requisition date (ISU Days). so the days difference calculations will have one more day per leap year crossed (Dec 31 of each year). but counts every year as 365 days. 4J9. The Discoverer version will always reflect 3 positions.7.7.7. Days difference between the DIFM DATE_OF_LAST_CHANGE and requisition date (DOLC Days).7.3. Sum of DIFM AWP_DAYS and DOLC Days (AWP Days).3. but at times it is only two in the legacy SURGE. However. This affects the following calculations: 4J9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The Discoverer script will list these two fields if they exist. The Discoverer script will fill the left side with spaces to get a 3-position field.4.7. there are times only two digits are selected.1. SURGE does not calculate a leap year. Discoverer (Oracle) calculates the leap year automatically. AL. The legacy output file is hard-coded to FTP to sites at HQ ACC and Montgomery.7. 4J9. The sum of images is in positions 24-29 instead of the legacy format of positions 3-8. Chapter 4 POS 1-2 3-21 22-29 NO POS 2 19 8 FIELD DESIGNATION Constant data (record type) Constant data Image Count REMARKS/NOTES “^Z” “IMAGES TRANSFERRED:” 4J9. The Discoverer version will always reflect two positions.7.6. There was no special code to blank these fields on the legacy SURGE and we could not duplicate this “error” in the Discoverer script.3.3. 4J9.2. Special Instructions. 4J9.4. The sum of images remains the same. but at times it is only 1 in the legacy SURGE. 4J9.3. 4J9.2.7. The calculations in the ^5 records for the days difference function can possibly have differences when compared to the legacy report. The FIA-TRANS field is supposed to be three positions long. When selecting positions 8-10 of the MARK FOR field (the SRD) of the ^2 record .5. 4–370 .7.7.7. This option provided the least amount of data mismatches on this column.7.5. The ISSUE-PRIORITY field is supposed to be 2 positions long. ISU Days minus (AWP Days plus DIFM DELAYED_OTHER_DAYS) (Charge Days).

Chapter 4 4J9.10. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement. Reference.8. Distribution. 4J9. Reserved for future use. Sample Report/Letter. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. 4J9.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. As requested.9. 4–371 .

Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-10 BUDGET CODE 9 EXCESS DETAIL SCAN (ACC303) 4J10. Query ‘1’ – provides budget code ‘9’ items with a sum of the minimum level detail authorized quantities by stock record account number (SRAN) and stock number. Query ‘3’ – provides budget code ‘9’ items with a sum of the fixed level detail authorized quantities by SRAN and stock number.2.2. 4J10.2. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J10. 4J10. 4–372 .2. Once the queries have been completed.2.2. Stock numbers that are not coded as budget code ‘9’ are excluded from this report. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_BC__9_EXCESS table and build several listings based on user input parameters. (Note: The demand level of the master stock number is used as the demand level for all interchangeable stock numbers within the same ISG).4. S R A N _ B A S E _ C O N S TA N T S _ 1 _ V W.1.2. Secondary tables i n c l u d e t h e I S G _ S T O C K _ N B R _ R E L AT I O N S H I P. 4J10.3. 4J10. To provide a listing of excess budget code ‘9’ assets for any host-satellite account relationship.3.3. A D J U S T E D _ L E V E L _ D T L .3. Purpose. 4J10. and SPECIAL_CONTROL. 4J10. Program Logic. Tab 1 (ACC303).2.2. Query ‘4’ – provides budget code ‘9’ items with the customer oriented leveling technique (COLT)/readiness based level (RBL) detail authorized quantities by SRAN and stock number.2. The primary table used to build the enterprise table is the ITEM_TABLE.5. Query ‘2’ – provides budget code ‘9’ items with a sum of the maximum level detail authorized quantities by SRAN and stock number.2. the data is combined and the requisitioning objective is computed by SRAN and stock number.1. MASTER_BENCH_STOCK_DTL.2. 4J10. From there a search is made to retrieve the demand levels of all stock numbers (within an interchangeable and substitute group (ISG)) coded as the master stock number.2. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). The program considers all types of adjusted level details during the computation to determine what assets (if any) are excess.2. The complete process (in general terms) is defined as follows: 4J10.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J10. The ISG information is used in formulas for computing excess for interchangeable stock numbers.2.1.2. The ENTERPRISE_BC_9_EXCESS table data is derived from four separate queries and then combined so that the excess (if it exists) can be properly computed. 4J10.1. A final query is then applied to gather all the additional information needed to compute the excess quantity (if there is any) and populate the report.

that overrides all conditions listed above.10. Optional: None. None. is greater than 0. This value is initially the RO of the master stock number (if it exists. 4J10.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. and the stock number being computed for excess is the interchangeable) or the demand level of the stock number.5.9. This value is the demand level of the master stock number (if it exists. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. Paging item is the data date taken from the SPECIAL_CONTROL table.5.3. Data File Formats. Multiple host SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Reserved for future use.7. Special Instructions.8.1. and is greater than 0).1. Sample Report/Letter. and the stock number being computed for excess is the interchangeable) or the demand level of the stock number computed for excess. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J7. Computed Fields. Distribution. Parameters. Reference. It is replaced by the minimum level if greater than the demand level of the stock number (or if greater than the demand level or RO of the master stock number when the stock number computed for excess is the interchangeable). As requested.6. None. The query must have at least one host SRAN entry. is greater than 0. 4J10. 4–373 . Mandatory: 4J10.5. HOST-SRAN.4. This value is computed by using the formula (serviceable balance – RO).4. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. system designator.4. EXCESS$. It is also replaced by the fixed level (if greater than 0) of the stock number (or the fixed level of the master stock number when the stock number computed for excess is the interchangeable).) 4J10.4.2. 4J10. and stock number. 4J10. 4J10. this level is loaded to the interchangeable but applies to both. It is also replaced by the maximum level if less than the demand level of the stock number (or if less than the demand level or RO of the master stock number when the stock number computed for excess is the interchangeable. 4J10.) 4J10.5.1.2. 4J10. 4J10. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.1.4. EXCESS. For stock numbers with a master/interchangeable relationship. DEMAND LEVEL.4. This value is computed by using the formula ((serviceable balance – RO) * unit price * . (Note: If there is a COLT/RBL level.01) 4J10. 4J10. REQUISITIONING OBJECTIVE (RO). 4J10.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–374 .3. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J8.5. The primary tables used to build this report are the TRANSACTION_HISTORY and ITEM_TABLE. The Mark For field in the transaction history table must have (‘A’ or ‘X’) in position 8 or (‘R5J’ or ‘R5K’) in positions 8-10. Computed Fields. Tab 1 (C13). Mandatory: 4J11.3.2.2. Optional: None.1. 4J11. Parameters. SRAN. Purpose. The type transaction phrase code must be ‘2D’ or ‘4W’. Sort(s): None. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. The listing and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. To provide a list of transactions from the daily transaction history that created weapon system due-out details. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-11 DAILY WEAPON SYSTEM CHECK (C13) 4J11. 4J11.2. 4J11. None.2. 4J11. 4J11. This program does not require an enterprise table.1.4.1. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). Program Logic. 4J11.5.) 4J11. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas.3. The query must have at least one SRAN entry.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J11. The data for this report was compiled using the following criteria: 4J11. Secondary tables include the SPECIAL_CONTROL and SRAN_REF_TABLE.5.2. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds a listing based on user input parameters.1.2.1. 4J11.5.1.

Data File Formats. As requested.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. the SRAN and transaction date cannot be printed in the header of the Discoverer report. 4J11. 4–375 . None. However. 4J11. as a workaround they have been listed as the first two data elements. Reserved for future use. Sample Report/Letter.7.10.9. Distribution. Reference. Unlike the legacy report. 4J11.8. Special Instructions. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement.6. 4J11. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. Chapter 4 4J11.

S P E C I A L _ S PA R E S _ D T L .3.3. 4J12.2. and WRM_IRSP_SPARES_DTL. system designator. stock number. NON_AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL.2. Paging item is ‘Data Date’ which is derived from the ordinal date. Sort(s): Sort by stock record account number (SRAN). Sort(s): Sort by SRAN. Program Logic.3. and stock number.3. Paging item is ‘Data Date’ which is derived from the ordinal date. system designator.1. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). SPECIAL_CONTROL.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J12. None. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-12 FREEZE CODE LISTING (C25) 4J12.2. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J9. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list.2. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J9. 4J12.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Parameters. freeze code.5. AIRBORNE_MRSP_DTL. freeze code. and stock number. To provide listings of items frozen for inventory on both the item and the war readiness materiel (WRM) records. Mandatory: 4–376 .2. Secondary tables include the BASE_CONSTANTS_1. system designator.1.1. The listings and parameters are described in detail in various sections below. and document number. and ORG_COST_CENTER.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Paging item is ‘Data Date’ which is derived from the ordinal date. MSK_DTL.3.4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_FREEZE_CODE table and build several listings based on user input parameters. warehouse locations (Null values first). The freeze code on the item and WRM records must have a value other than NULL. freeze code. HPMSK_DTL. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J12. SRAN_BASE_CONSTANTS_1_VW. ISG_STOCK_NBR_RELATIONSHIP. The primary tables used to build the enterprise table are the ITEM_TABLE. Purpose. Tab 1 (Stock Number Seq). 4J12.) 4J12. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J9.1. Computed Fields. Tab 3 (Details Stock Number Seq). Tab 2 (Whse Location Seq). 4J12. 4J12. 4J12.5. 4J12. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN.

9. The query must have at least one SRAN entry. See AFMAN 23-110.1.1. 4J12. However.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Part 2. 4J12. Distribution. 4J12. 4–377 . Multiple SRANs (if used) must be separated by commas. Special Instructions. 4J12. SRAN. the SRAN and transaction date cannot be printed in the header of the Discoverer report. as a workaround they have been listed as the first two data elements. Reference.2. Unlike the legacy report. Chapter 10. Sample Report/Letter. Reserved for future use. 4J12.5. Chapter 4 4J12.10. Optional: None.8.6. Data File Formats. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. None. As requested.5. Volume 2. 4J12.7.

The program will check to see if an approved ASL (type level flag equal to A/B/C/E) with a level justification code unequal to zero/G/H is present for the selected stock number. ‘1’). and the stockage priority code (SPC) is not in (‘5’. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-13 COLT-MICAP LEVEL CHANGE (L22) 4J13.2. It scans the Air Force Supply Central Database (AFSCDB) and builds several data files based on user input parameters. Records not meeting the previous condition will then receive an additional check. ‘E’. 4J13. The primary table used to build this report is the ADJUSTED_LEVEL_DTL.3. ² Format XCA Delete transactions on COLT levels where the authorized quantity equals ‘0’. ‘1’) or number of demands current equals ‘0’). 4J13. the number of demands current is greater than ‘0’. the mission impact code (MIC) is in (‘0’. Additionally. and Major Command (MAJCOM) personnel with a tool to scan the item-detail record area looking for item records that have a COLT adjusted stock level (ASL) detail record with an authorized quantity of zero. Secondary tables include the ITEM_TABLE and SRAN_REF_VW. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets). Program Logic. The program will then create a XCA to delete the COLT ASL and create a LVL to force releveling. 4J13.3. the item record MIN or MAX or FIX Flag equals ‘1’. ²Format 1F3D transactions on non COLT/RBL levels where the stock number has the base closure flag on. The data files and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.1. To provide Logistics Readiness Squadron (LRS) personnel. For records that meet this condition the program creates a XCA to update the COLT ASL authorized quantity to one and LVL input to force releveling. 4J13.1. Tab 1 (XCA Delete). 4–378 . ²Format XCA Delete transactions on RBL levels where the stock number has a RID of ‘SXX’ (where ‘XX’ is a wildcard). Purpose. The data images for this report are compiled using the following criteria: ²Format XCA Delete transactions on COLT/RBL levels where the stock number has the base closure flag on. this program performs a routine clean-up action by checking for ASLs where the base closure flag is on. Remaining ASLs are checked to see if the associated item record has a MIC of one or zero and that the number of demands current field is greater than zero. 4J13. In general terms. all ASL records meeting the parameter criteria are scanned. ²Format XCA Update transactions on COLT levels where the authorized quantity equals ‘0’.2.2. This program does not require an enterprise table. Global Logistics Support Center (GLSC) materiel management personnel.2. When the base closure flag is on (set to ‘1’). and (MIC not in (‘0’. ‘N’). Goal is to correct cases where COLT is not supporting an item properly between COLT runs. the item record MIN or MAX or FIX Flag equals ‘1’.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1. the program formats the necessary XCA/1F3 delete images.

3. and SRAN. The query must have a HOST_SRAN entry. system designator.5. Tab 1 (XCA Delete) NO POS 1-3 4-6 7 8-22 POS 3 3 1 15 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Routing Identifier Code (To) Blank Stock Number REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘XCA’ Taken From SRAN_REF_VW. item-id number (NIIN). Tab 2 (XCA Update). Mandatory: 4J13. Since the output is a data file.3. Since the output is a data file. Tab 3 (1F3D). system designator. 4J13. 4J13. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. Optional: None.6.5. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J13. Sort(s): Host SRAN.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J13.1. Sort(s): Host SRAN. Sort(s): Host SRAN. None. Since the output is a data file. Sort(s): Host SRAN. system designator. Multiple HOST_SRAN entries are not allowed.4.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.2.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. and SRAN.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. item-id number (NIIN). Computed Fields.5.1.) 4J13.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. 4J13. Data File Formats. Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J13.3. item-id number (NIIN). item-id number (NIIN).) 4J13. 4J13.1. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J13. Tab 4 (LVL). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J13.4. 4J13. (Note: All data lengths are space or zero filled to provide a standard data length per record type.RID 4–379 . HOST_SRAN. and SRAN.5. Since the output is a data file. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. Parameters. 4J13. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. system designator.6. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items.3. and SRAN.1.2.

2.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Tab 3 (1F3D) NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION 3 Transaction Identification Code POS 1-3 REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘1F3’ 4–380 . Chapter 4 NO POS 2 5 2 4 3 3 11 11 5 2 POS 23-24 25-29 30-31 32-35 36-38 39-41 42-52 53-73 74-78 79-80 FIELD DESIGNATION Unit of Issue ASL Authorized Quantity Type Account ASL SRAN Routing Identifier Code (From) Blank Constant ‘D0000000000’ Blank System Date Blank REMARKS/NOTES Zero-filled field Constant ‘FB’ Taken From ITEM_TABLE.RID Constant ‘00001’ Constant ‘FB’ Taken From ITEM_TABLE.RID Formatted as YYDDD 4J13. Tab 2 (XCA Update) NO POS 3 3 1 15 2 5 2 4 3 3 11 11 5 2 POS 1-3 4-6 7 8-22 23-24 25-29 30-31 32-35 36-38 39-41 42-52 53-73 74-78 79-80 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Routing Identifier Code (To) Blank Stock Number Unit of Issue ASL Authorized Quantity Type Account ASL SRAN Routing Identifier Code (From) Blank Constant ‘U0000000000’ Blank System Date Blank REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘XCA’ Taken From SRAN_REF_VW.3.6.RID Formatted as YYDDD 4J13.

4J13. that is beyond the capability of Discoverer.7. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement.8.4.1. However. Special Instructions. Each tab must now be downloaded by the user and forwarded for SBSS processing via the pseudo to make the desired changes to the database. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4J13.9. Distribution. The sequence of processing the files does make a difference. 4J13. ²Process all XCA Delete transactions to completion. Chapter 4 NO POS 1 3 15 2 5 14 34 3 POS 4 5-7 8-22 23-24 25-29 30-43 44-77 78-80 FIELD DESIGNATION Action Code Blank Stock Number ASL System Designator Blank ASL Document Number Blank Initiator REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘D’ Constant ‘L22’ 4J13. Use the following sequence to ensure that all data files will be successfully processed: ²Process all 1F3D transactions to completion. As requested.7. ²Process all XCA Update transactions to completion. The legacy COBOL program would automatically send the data file images to pseudo for processing. 4–381 . Tab 4 (LVL) NO POS 3 4 15 2 56 POS 1-3 4-7 8-22 23-24 25-80 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Blank Stock Number ASL System Designator Blank REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘LVL’ 4J13. Reference.6. ²Process all LVL transactions to completion.

8. The first position of the ITEM_TABLE. 4J14. Secondary tables include the ADJUSTED_LEVEL_DTL.501.RID field must be equal to ‘S’. The fifth position of the stock number must be numeric (e. This program will scan the ENTERPRISE_PDL table and build images for four different SBSS transactions based on user input parameters.1. 4J14.2.2.2. The primary table used to build the enterprise table is the ITEM_TABLE. For bases that are not supported by the GLSC. 4J14.2. The data for the enterprise table was compiled using the following criteria: 4J14. The unit price of each stock number must be less than $1. 4J14. Program Logic.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.1.2. the base’s MAJCOM will coordinate all PDL activities. 4J14. The ASL level justification code must be equal to ‘0’ or the ASL application SRAN tasking must be equal to ‘TPROACTVLV%’ (where ‘%’ is a wildcard). PDL is a tool for Lead Commands and makes use of global demand data to proactively lay-in adjusted stock levels (ASL) (or bench stock levels) at one base using demand data from other bases that operate the same weapon system. no “L” or “P” stock numbers will be considered). Budget code for all stock numbers must be equal to ‘9’. Tab 1 (1F3L).9.7.3. The acquisition advice code must not equal ‘V’ or ‘Y’.6.4. 4J14.3. NULL values are also excluded).2. To provide a program to compute levels for items consisting of no demand history or extremely low historical demands. Chapter 4 ATTACHMENT 4J-14 PROACTIVE DEMAND LEVELING (PDL) 4J14.2.2. SPECIAL_CONTROL. 4J14.2.3. The cumulative recurring demands plus the number of demands current must be greater than ‘0’. The transactions and parameters are described in detail in various sections below.5. 4J14. Proactively setting levels based on global demands prevents MICAPs at a cost that is less than the sum of weapon system downtime and MICAP backorder costs.g. (Note: For those proficient with Oracle. Purpose. Tabs (Also known as sheets and worksheets).2. This report also provides the user with the recommended transaction images to be processed in the SBSS if the stock number is approved for PDL. The Global Logistics Support Center (GLSC) will administer the PDL process (run the PDL programs and load the PDL levels).1. 4J14. 4–382 . and SRAN_REF_VW. The Lead Commands will decide which weapon systems will use PDL and set the criteria for determining which items to proactively stock. The health hazard flag must be equal to ‘0’ or blank and the issue exception code must not equal ‘8’ or ‘9’.2. 4J14. 4J14.

Sort(s): Sort by SRAN and ITEM_ID_NBR (also known as the NIIN). 2 .5) 4–383 . Chapter 4 Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 1A2. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J14.2 (including sub-paragraphs). 4J14.5. 4 J 1 4 .2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. the health hazard flag being equal to ‘0’ or space and the stockage priority code being greater than or equal to ‘4’. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN and ITEM_ID_NBR (also known as the NIIN).2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. and any additional user-defined parameters. Tab 2 (1F3D).2. 4 . 4 . Sort(s): Sort by SRAN and ITEM_ID_NBR (also known as the NIIN). Computed Fields. 4J14.3. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. Tab 4 (2BS). Tab 5 (FCD). 4J14.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 1 .3.4. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters. Since the output is a data file of recommended SBSS transactions. Since the output is a data file of recommended SBSS transactions. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. If the S U M ( N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ C U R R E N T + N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ PA S T _ 6 _ M O N T H S + N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ PA S T _ 7 _ 1 2 _ M O S ) = 0 THEN 0 ELSE TRUNC(( SUM(CUMLTV_RECURRING_DEMANDS)/ ( SUM(NBR_OF_DMDS_CURRENT + NBR_OF_DMDS_PAST_6_MONTHS + NBR_OF_DMDS_PAST_7_12_MOS)) +0.3. there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. I N P U T L E V E L Q U A N T I T Y ( A p p l i e s t o Ta b 1 ) . Since the output is a data file of recommended SBSS transactions. Since the output is a data file of recommended SBSS transactions.5) 4 J 1 4 . there are no report/column headers and there are no paging items. Sort(s): Sort by SRAN and ITEM_ID_NBR (also known as the NIIN). 4J14. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J14.2 (including sub-paragraphs) and any additional user-defined parameters.3. Tab 3 (FIL). A U T H O R I Z E D Q U A N T I T Y ( A p p l i e s t o Ta b 4 ) . Sort(s): Sort by SRAN and ITEM_ID_NBR (also known as the NIIN). Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J14. Since the output is a data file of recommended SBSS transactions. Condition(s): Selects items based on program logic in paragraph 4J14. If the S U M ( N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ C U R R E N T + N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ PA S T _ 6 _ M O N T H S + N B R _ O F _ D M D S _ PA S T _ 7 _ 1 2 _ M O S ) = 0 THEN 0 ELSE TRUNC(( SUM(CUMLTV_RECURRING_DEMANDS)/ ( SUM(NBR_OF_DMDS_CURRENT + NBR_OF_DMDS_PAST_6_MONTHS + NBR_OF_DMDS_PAST_7_12_MOS)) +0.4. 4J14.

4J14. Mandatory: 4J14. The TARGET SRAN is the base receiving the demand history.1. The query must have an SRD entry. 6840. 8030.1. Provided defaults suggested as a minimum include (6810.5. Multiple FSC EXCLUSIONS entries are allowed. 4J14. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. This field will be edited as a four-digit alpha-numeric character string. The query must have a TARGET SRAN entry. Chapter 4 4J14. TARGET SRAN(s).6.5.5. RANGE. This field will be edited as a one-digit-numeric character string. SRD.1. 8010. This field will be edited as a four-digit character string. The query must have a DONOR SRAN entry. This is the number of SRANs that must have a positive cumulative recurring demand value for a stock number to be identified as a candidate stock number. Parameters.5. 9140.5. 8040. Tab 1 (1F3L File): NO POS 3 1 3 15 2 5 1 3 2 8 10 4 POS 1-3 4 5-7 8-22 23-24 25-29 30 31-33 34-35 36-43 44-53 54-57 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Action Code Blank Stock Number System Designator Input Level Quantity Activity Code Organization Code Shop Code Blank Application Application Date REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘1F3’ Constant ‘L’ For the Target SRAN Constant ‘A’ Constant ‘007’ Constant ‘SC’ Constant ‘TPROACTVLV’ Julian Day from system date formatted as YDDD 4–384 . 9150. 6830. 9130.5. This field will be edited as a three-digit alpha-numeric character string. 9110. Multiple SRD entries are allowed.) 4J14. and 9160). Multiple entries are not allowed. DONOR SRAN(s). The query must have a RANGE entry.6. 4J14. Data File Formats.1. 6820. 7930. 4J14.2.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. The query must have an FSC EXCLUSIONS entry. (Note: Users can either type in their values or select from the provided dropdown list. 4J14.5. 4J14. Multiple DONOR SRAN entries are allowed. One is the default value. FSC EXCLUSIONS.5.1. 9135. Multiple TARGET SRAN entries are allowed.3.5. 4J14. Optional: None. The DONOR SRAN is the base providing the demand history.1.4.1.2. 6850.1.

6.2.6. Tab 3 (FIL File): NO POS 3 1 2 1 15 2 2 9 3 POS 1-3 4 5-6 7 8-22 23-24 25-26 27-35 36-38 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Controlled Item Code Blank Reason Why Code Stock Number System Designator Unit of Issue Blank Routing Identifier Code REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘FIL’ For the Target SRAN Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL 4–385 . or Blank Constant ‘A’ Constant ‘B’ Constant ‘8’ Constant ‘B’ Julian Day from system date formatted as YYDDD Constant ‘L01’ 4J14. Tab 2 (1F3D File): NO POS 3 1 3 15 2 5 14 37 POS 1-3 4 5-7 8-22 23-24 25-29 30-43 44-80 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Action Code Blank Stock Number System Designator Blank Document Number Blank REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘1F3’ Constant ‘D’ For the Target SRAN Document number of the detail to be deleted on TARGET SRAN 4J14.3.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 58-60 61-65 66 67 68 69 70-72 73-77 78-80 3 5 1 1 1 1 3 5 3 Standard Reporting Designator Blank Type Level Flag Level Directed By Code Level Justification Code Approval Flag Blank Approval Date Initiator. Desk Number.

Tab 5 (FCD File): NO POS FIELD DESIGNATION POS REMARKS/NOTES 4–386 . Chapter 4 39-41 42 43 44 45 46-47 48 49 50 51-56 57-88 89 90-99 100-109 110-119 120-122 3 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 6 32 1 10 10 10 3 ERRCD Type Account Code Blank Quantity Unit Pack Code Budget Code Blank Demilitarization Code Blank Precious Metals Indicator Blank Nomenclature Blank Standard/Unit Price Materiel Cost Recovery Carcass Cost Manager Designator Code Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL Blank for “short” FIL 4J14. Tab 4 (2BS File): NO POS 3 4 15 2 5 1 1 4 37 3 1 POS 1-3 4-7 8-22 23-24 25-29 30 31-35 36-39 40-76 77-79 80 FIELD DESIGNATION Transaction Identification Code Blank Stock Number Blank Authorized Quantity Activity Code Blank Date of Last Demand/Current Date Blank Standard Reporting Designator Action Flag REMARKS/NOTES Constant ‘2BS’ Constant ‘B’ Constant ‘0000’ Constant ‘L’ 4J14.6.6.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.5.4.

An ‘N’ is returned if the stock number is not loaded at the host account and a long FIL is then formatted. 4J14. This report originated from a MAJCOM-specific requirement.9. Short FIL Criteria. Due to its high use throughout the Air Force it was converted to a Discoverer report. 4J14. Distribution. Special Instructions.7. Reference. For Tab 3 (FIL). 4J14. As requested.AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. 4–387 .7. a short FIL is determined by a function which returns ‘Y’ if the stock number is loaded at one of the bases under the host account.8. Chapter 4 1-3 4-7 8-22 23-24 25-37 38 3 4 15 2 13 1 Transaction Identification Code Blank Stock Number System Designator Blank Stockage Priority Code Constant ‘FCD’ For the Target SRAN Constant ‘3’ 4J14.1.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–388 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–389 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–390 .

Chapter 4 4–391 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–392 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–393 .

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–394 .

Chapter 4 4–395 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–396 .

Chapter 4 4–397 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–398 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–399 .

Chapter 4 4–400 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–401 .

Chapter 4 4–402 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–403 .

Chapter 4 4–404 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–405 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–406 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–407 .

Chapter 4 4–408 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–409 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

Chapter 4 4–410 .AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8.

AFMAN 23-110 Volume 2 Part 8. Chapter 4 4–411 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful